Home

Strahl D1600mkII User's Manual

1. i PHONES Headphones RO When inputting in stereo you should select two adjacent inputs 1 2 3 4 so that track editing can be performed more efficiently Kit you are recording from a connected mic locate the mic at a sufficient distance from the D1600mkII so that it does not pick up noise Connections for recording digital sources e Optical digital S P DIF output of a digital output device such as DAT or MD S P DIF IN jack of the D1600mkII use an optical digital cable for con nection For details on assigning the audio inputs to mixer channels and auditioning the input sound refer to Assign audio inputs to the mixer p 36 Make other connections Connections for mixdown Here s how to make connections when the song cre ated on the D1600mkII will be mixed down on an external recording device DAT MD tape recorder etc e Optical digital S P DIF input of a digital record ing device such as DAT or MD S P DIF OUT of the D1600mkII e AUXIN inputs of an analog recording device such as a cassette tape recorder lt gt MASTER OUT L R jacks of the D1600mkH1 Connections when using external effects If you wish to apply a
2. PLAY LEDs will blink the rhythm p 72 a ie als If you want to use Trigger Recording refer to 6 Other recording methods p 43 E lt A T ON 8 When you are ready to perform press the PLAY key Recording will begin begin performing on your instrument During recording the REC and PLAY LEDs will light JEL A E J fa ET In the track view screen the bar will start moving at the point you press the PLAY key 17 Quick Start E y Step 3 Mixdown Step 2 Overdubbing Step 4 Mastering 18 9 When you have finished performing press the STOP key Recording will stop and the REC and PLAY LEDs will go dark REW FF STOP PLAY REC Ha gt Call SE SCRUB ON In the track view screen the region from the beginning to the end of your audio recording is displayed as a thick line CH Trio arras 5 fol CEO Areas in which you did not perform are also displayed as a thick line 9 Play back Now we ll play back the recorded song from the beginning TRACK STATUS key setting Specify the track that you want to play back 1 Press the front panel track 8 TRACK STATUS key to select PLAY LED lit green Playback 2 Hold down the STOP key and press the REW key The counter time will move to the beginning of the song REW
3. 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200 Sets the delay time from the dry sound Thru Pre Delay Thru 0 100 Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound ERLVUER Leve ocios 0 100 Sets the level of early reflections RvbLvl Reverb Level 0 100 Sets the reverberation level EQTrim EQ TI sad 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15 Sets the gain of High EQ Mix Wem Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds ER Level Reverb Level These parameters set the early reflection level and reverb level Changing these parameter values allows you to simulate the type of walls in the room That is a larger ER Level simulates a hard wall and a larger Reverb Level simulates a soft wall 7 RV7 Early Reflection This effect is only the early reflection part of a reverberation sound and adds presence to the sound You can select one of the four decay curves II Sharp Loose Selects the decay curve for the early Modula Revers reflection ERTime ER Time msec 10 800 Sets the time length of early reflection PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200 Sets the time taken from the original sound to the first early reflection EQTrim EQ
4. Inf 38 24 Sets the compressor output gain Tube TubeType SS 1 99 Burn Vacuum tube characteristics 145 Effect Parameter List Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX 2in2out x 2 Insert FX 2in20Ut x 2 Linlout x 4 Linlout x 8 Effect Control Master FX Final FX Final FX Lin2out x 2 146 P4EQ Parametric 4band EQ Fcl Band1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 0k Oh Cerner reece emer yes 0 5 10 0 G1 Gain AAA 18 18 Fc2 Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 5 0k EE 0 5 10 0 G2 Gain dB inside 18 18 Fc3 Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 0k ELE eent 0 5 10 0 G3 Gain E 18 18 Fc4 Band4 Cutoff Hz 500 20 0k OO EEN 0 5 10 0 G4 Gain Olea 18 18 TM E 0 100 Exctr Exciter Blend Exciter Blend 100 100 Empha Emphatic Point 0 140 ENT 0 100 Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Sets the gain of Band 1 Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 Sets the gain of Band 2 Sets the center frequency of Band 3 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Sets the gain of Band 3 Sets the center frequency of Band 4 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Sets the gain of Band 4 Sets the parametric EQ input level Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Sets the frequency range to be empha sized Sets the EQ input level Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets th
5. Symbol Select symbols Insert Insert a space and move the subsequent characters backward Space Select a space blank Backsp Delete the character before the cursor loca tion Delete Delete the character at the cursor location ClearAll Erase the entire name 4 Finalize the name If you are satisfied with the name you input press the OK button To cancel without changing the name press the Cancel button y D E d E E E to the mixer Recording Assign audio inputs Playback i Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 35 36 3 Selecting another song You can select an existing song in any of the following three ways To select the preceding or following song number e If you hold down the STOP key and press the FF key you will move to the end of the current song Doing this at the end of the song will move to the beginning of the next song e If you hold down the STOP key and press the REW key while you are located at the beginning of the current song e g 000 00 000 you will move to the beginning of the preceding song If you are in the middle of the current song you will move to the beginning of the current song To make a major change in the song number 1 Press the SONG CD key to
6. EG mI gt O Key MI O BASS AHIl Vo IMI Chorus 1 DE O Chorus 2 M Dr EG MIR O Key N O BASS vllt Vo IMI O Chorus 1 Dt Chorus 2 Dk Dr O EG O Key IMIH BASS Vo Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Dr F Chorus 1 Dk O Chorus 2 Dk Dr K The faders and pan knob on the top panel do not actually move but you can watch the values change in the SCENE MixView tab page BA LIHEW SCEHE m aaa oaa o TACT ETTA A AAAA Registering a scene 1 Move the current time to the location at which you wish to register the scene Use the counter or FF REW keys to move p 46 2 Adjust the mixer settings Adjust the CHANNEL faders PAN knobs EQ and effect settings 3 Register the scene Press the STORE key to capture the current time location When you press the SCENE key the registration destination scene number SCENE will be displayed and the settings will be registered Ki Registered scenes are assigned numbers sequen tially starting at the lowest unused number Even during playback or recording you can use step 3 above to register a scene Automatically switching scenes while a song plays Scene Playback Scenes you registered can be selected automatically dur ing playback at the time locations you specify NS Register each scene at the time location where you want the mixer settings to change Regis
7. 4 Data compatbility with other models in the Digital Recording Studio series This section discusses data compatibility between the D1600mkI and the D12 D16 version 2 0 and following D1200 D1600 and D1200mkII models of the Digital Recording Studio series amp If you want to use D1600mkII data on the D16 you must update the D16 s system to version 2 or later Effect programs D1600mkII effect programs can also be used on the D1200 or D1200mkII in the same way Some D1600mkII effect programs may not work in the same way on the D12 D16 and D1600 This is because the algorithms of the following three D1600mkII effects differ from those of the D12 D16 and D1600 e 48 PA1 Pre Amp Simulator e 49 EB1 Bass Multil e 52 MS1 Mic Multi Be aware that if an effect program using these algorithms is created on the D1600mkKII it will not produce the same results when restored to the D12 D16 or D1600 The opposite is also true amp Since insert effects can also be used in scenes you will not obtain the same results when D12 D16 or D1600 data is restored to the D1600mkII or conversely Compatibility of data written to CD R or CD RW Data compatibility with the D12 D1200 and D1200mkil A CD R or CD RW created on the D12 D1200 or D1200mkII can be used in the same way as D1600mkII data Song data and effect user data will appear in the D1600mkII s drive list as D12 B A CD R or CD RW cr
8. The D1600mkil does not synchronize as a slave If the D1600mkII is set as a MTC slave several seconds may be required before synchronization is achieved Can t control other devices via MMC In the SYSTEM USB MMC tab page is Select MMC Mode set to Transmit Is the device receiving MMC set correctly to receive MMC The D1600mkIl does not transmit mixer parameters In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page is the ControlChange parameter Trans turned on Is the device receiving control changes set to record MIDI channels 1 16 The D1600mkIl does not receive mixer parameters In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page is the ControlChange parameter Recv turned on WAV Can t preview Is the WAV file format supported Select and preview a WAV file of a format that is supported p 79 106 USB Computer does not detect the D1600mkiIl Is the USB cable connected correctly p 7 85 Is the D1600mkII in USB mode p 85 amp Depending on the hardware system of the computer you are using it may not be able to detect the D1600mkII in some cases An error occurs when you disconnect the computer Use the correct procedure when disconnecting p 85 156 When you connect you are asked to install software or a device driver L Does the version of the operating sys
9. 12 12 Sets the high range output level of the vocoder HiMix Modulator High Mm 0 100 Sets the high range output level of the modulator Bal Vocoder Carrier Carrier 1 99 99 1 Sets the balance between the vocoder Vocode outputand the Carrier Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Formant Shift By offsetting the Carrier filter you can adjust the height of the fre quency range to which the vocoder effect is applied The tonal qual ity will change significantly Noise Level This parameter enables you to mix white noise with the Carrier Modulator High Mix This parameter sets the high range output level of the right channel sound Modulator If the modulator is a human voice it will make the words more clear Vocoder Carrier Wet Dry The Vocoder Carrier parameter sets the balance between the vocoder sound and the left channel sound Carrier The Wet Dry parameter sets the balance between the effect and dry sound If you wish to change the intensity of the vocoder effect select Wet for Wet Dry and adjust the balance using the Vocoder Carrier parameter 35 LA St Pitch Shifter Stereo Pitch Shifter This is a stereo pitch shifter The pitch shift amount for the left and right channels can be reversed from each other Mode Mode Slow Medium Fast Switches Pitch Shifter mode
10. Details of each operation you can select here are explained below MMcMaster 12J001 01 000 Select MMC Mode MMCBevID Dn 2 200 B U Rst Type Backup 1 Song Control g MIDI E Sunc 4 BU Roth Dellt This operation backs up the selected song and the effect user data 1 ae Excoute AE 1 Select MMC Mode sss Transmit Receive Off ee DUT D 000 Turn MMC transmission or reception on off Transmit MMC will be transmitted Receive MMC will be received Off MMC will not be used 2 MMCDeviD MMC Device ID cccccccoooooooox 000 127 Specify the device ID that will be used when transmit ting receiving MMC To enable MMC transmission reception connect the external MIDI device to the D1600mkII via MIDI set the device ID to match and set Select MMC Mode appro priately Ki If this parameter is set to 127 MMC can be trans mitted received to from all ID numbers P5 B U Rst Backup restore using a removable disc Here you can backup save and restore load data to and from a removable disc such as CD R or CD RW You can restore the following data e D1600mkII backup data e D12 backup data e D16 backup data e D1200 backup data e D1200mkII backup data MS For details on data compatibility refer to p 81 amp When backing up to CD R RW you cannot save more than one backup on a single disc setectDrive 1J001 01 000 ive 1 Backup 1 Son SIE H Backup 1 S
11. E Tempo Manu 120 04 04 Metrod SelSong 1 Press the 14 button located at the left of the counter to access the Select TimeDisp Type dialog box Select Timebisp Type i G 0 000 00 660 Cy 240 B0Free CH A00 00 B0F 2 Select the type of time units that you wish to view press the OK button You can select one of the following four types of display o measures beats 1 96 of a beat oo minutes seconds 1 1000 of a second oo F minutes seconds 1 30 of a second Free minutes seconds remaining available recording time In order for the __ _ Free display to accurately indicate the remaining time you must set the recording track TRACK STATUS to REC and set the counter display to FreeTime When you do so the remaining recording time will be displayed according to the number of tracks that are set to REC 2 Moving the current time location Using the counter 1 Select a page in which the counter is displayed in the upper part of the LCD screen such as the SONG CD SelSong tab page 2 Select the portion in the counter that you wish to change to a new location mes ISO 000 G D 661 HEWSONG E Tempo Manu 120 04 04 Metrod SelSong JEditSong FraPlay AOR Ku ES 3 Rotate the VALUE dial to change the time Using the FF or REW keys Moving backward Press the REW k
12. FullR FOR ange Gate Thrshl Threshold an 0 127 Attack Attack esse crete ot ciate ae 1 100 Relse Release cccccrccrncnnnn 1 100 Respo RESPONSE see 1 100 DeEss Deesser Sets the level at which the effect begins to apply Sets the attack time Sets the release time Sets the speed at which the effect will respond to change in the input This effect attenuates unwanted sibilants in a vocal signal Sense Sensitivity 0 100 Fc Side Band EQ fc 500 20 0k Q Side Band EQ Dindir 0 5 10 Gain Side Band EQ Galin 18 18 Ratio Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Thrsh Threshold dB 40 0 Attck e EE 1 100 Relse Release ccc 1 100 Level Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24 Sets the sensitivity Sets the center frequency of the side band EQ Sets the bandwidth of the side band EQ Sets the gain of the side band EQ Sets the signal compression ratio Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Sets the attack time Sets the release time Sets the output gain Cho H Chorus Flanger This effect gives a sense of pitch movement and depth to the sound Adjusting the delay time will change the effect signifi cantly DTime Delay Time 0 0 50 0ms Sets the delay time LFO LFO Wave atra TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Speed LFO Frequency 0 02 20 0 Sets
13. Specify the number of times that the data will be copied EXPO EXECUtE errada Execute the track editing operation This area displays the audio data of the track as a wave form Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely This can be selected when the cursor is at SourceTrack or DestTrack E Before you make settings here it is best to make approximate settings for the IN OUT and TO times and register them 6a SCIOCUI CK satan Select the track for which you wish to make time settings 6b Zoom In O ut Up DOWN ssssssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Adjust the displayed range and height of the waveform 6C LOCA sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnan In Out To Make Locate settings When you place the cursor at Locate the Scrub func tion will automatically be turned on and you can rotate the VALUE dial to listen to only the SelectTrack solo as you set the Locate points When you press the OK button the specified times will be overwritten onto the corresponding keys IN LOC1 etc If you press the Cancel button the setting will be cancelled Edit Type Insert Track This operation inserts a blank in the IN OUT range of the insert destination track DestTrack When this is executed Exec any track data that followed the inserted blank will be moved toward the end of the song IN OUT DestTrack
14. 0 8s 0 8 seconds The peak hold indicator will be held forever The hold indicator will be cleared when you press the PkHold button to access the dialog box SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference MONITOR FX AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END OAI RHYTHM CD USB METER Tr VIEW pa LA LA ey FADER PAN 134 23 TRACK STATUS These indicators show the status of each track Each time you press the TRACK STATUS key the LED will change color to indicate the selected function e PLAY LED lit green The selected track can be played e REC LED lit red The selected track can be recorded e INPUT LED lit orange An external audio signal can be sent to the selected track This can be done only while stopped Select this when you wish to listen to the sound of other tracks as you play your instrument or for rehearsing before you record or when you wish to mix an external input with the playback tracks e MUTE LED off The selected track will be muted silent amp The settings available here will depend on the state set tings of the recorder When stopped the selection will change in the order PLAY INPUT gt REC MUTE PLAY During record ing or playback the selection will alternate between PLAY lt gt MUTE or INPUT lt gt MUTE 24 PAN Set the location pan at which
15. 000000000000000000000000009090 P2 InsEff1 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 1 i InputlevelMeter IN1 2 CLP 8 18 42dB This shows the input level of each effect The horizontal axis indicates the effect input and the vertical axis shows the level IN2 will be input only if INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 tab page is 2in2outx2 EffectN umber 000 001 128 U001 128 Select the effect program U001 U128 is the user area where you can store effect programs that you have edited If the effect program includes a control function a will be displayed following the effect name The effects that can be selected will depend on the SelectEffType setting in the INSERT EFFECT InsAsn tab page For the effects that are available in each configuration refer to Effect Program List p 166 EffectProgramN ame sssccsssseeseanees Effect Program List When you press this button the Effect Algorithm dialog box will appear Here you can view the structure of the program and on off settings An insert effect program consists of up to five types of effect of 001 01 000 3a EPOCHCON sssssssunnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Use these to select the effect that you want to edit When you press an Effectlcon button the Edit Effect dialog box will appear CTime 15 8rn LEO Speed B 14Hz
16. Control tab page In the INSERT EFFECT InsAsn tab page make sure that a valid effect has been selected in SelectEffType Example Situations such as when InsEff3 is selected for Asn and lin2outx2 is selected for SelectEffType only InsEff1 or InsEff2 can be used _ Is the correct device being used to control the effect Control the effect using the device that is selected by the SYSTEM USB Control tab page Device parameter p 91 _ For the selected effect have you chosen effect pro gram number 000 NO EFFECT or an effect pro gram that does not include a control function When controlling via MIDI does the MIDI channel of the D1600mkII match the MIDI channel of the trans mitting MIDI device p 92 Can t select an Lin2outx2 insert effect _ Insert effect assign may have been set to Trk gt lin2out x2 insert effects can be selected if the INSERT EFFECT InsAsn tab page Assign parameter is set to In Set this parameter to In Master effect does not apply L Is the send from each channel set to 0 or near 0 In the MASTER EFFECT AUX EffSnd1 or EffSnd2 tab page raise the Send amount _ Is the return set to 0 or near 0 In the MASTER EFFECT AUX MstEff1 or MstEff2 tab page raise RetLevel to increase the return level __ If you are monito
17. Cut BOCH E E Tuner H Assign the input sound to mixer channel 2 Press the track 2 TRACK STATUS key to select INPUT the LED will light orange Use trim to adjust the input level Press the METER TRACK VIEW key Press the button to access the dialog box Choose PreFaderLev press the OK button When you input sound into the mic the Ch2 level meter will move accordingly Adjust the input 2 TRIM knob while you watch the level meter Raise the TRIM as high as possible Don t allow the level to reach CLP when you produce your loudest sound Audition the sound Set the MASTER and CHANNEL 2 faders to unity gain 0 dB Access the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page Press the MasterLR button to turn it On high lighted Gradually raise the PHONES LEVEL knob or MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob and listen to the sound in your headphones or monitor system 37 Basic operation Creating Selecting a song Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 38 Connect a keyboard to the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 jacks and assign them to mixer channels 9 and 10 1 Connect your keyboard Set the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 trim to the mini mum 4 dB and lower the MASTER fader before connecting your keyboard to the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 j
18. Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 63 Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location Mixdown Using Using the effects mixer y MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song the system settings editing 64 5 Verify the results Press the IN LOC1 key to play back from the IN location and verify that the data was deleted correctly You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command Reversing track data Reverse Track The Reverse Track command copies a reversed version of the specified region IN OUT of recorded track data to the TO location of another track e The IN OUT region can be copied not just once but multiple times in succession e Data can be copied not only from one track but from multiple tracks simultaneously Procedure for reversing track data Reverse Here s how to reverse the IN OUT region of track 1 and copy it three times to the TO location of track 2 1 Register the IN OUT and TO times 2 Select the Reverse command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to ReverseTrack sourceTrack 5 001 01 000 GR ReverseT rack 2 US o Tr Tmport E DestTrack Source Trac
19. H Press LOC MARK or SCENE Selsong Eden PraPlay AUER 3 Register the time location you captured Press one of the IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOG3 or END LOCA keys to register the saved location in that key The registration will be com pleted as soon as you press the key Ki Even if you perform steps 2 and following dur ing playback or recording the time location at the moment you pressed the STORE key will be preserved and can be registered in a locate point Moving to a locate point When you press a previously registered IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 or END LOC4 key you will move to the registered location Using marks to move the time location oeeeee eee ee tee eee e see ER You can register a specific location in a mark and then 3 8 U sing scru b pla yba ck etc to move instantly to the registered location fin d a precise t me lo ca t on A name can be assigned to each mark and used to navi gate within a song By using the Scrub function the Play From To function Up to 100 marks can be registered in each song or the Slow Play function you can accurately find the location where an audio region begins or set a locate Registering a mark time or mark time with greater precision 1 Move the current time to the location that you wish to register as a mark Use the counter or the FF REW keys to change the current time 2 Press the STORE key to capture the time location
20. If the file was loaded correctly the display will indicate Check sum OK If not the display will indicate Check sum NG If the display indicates Check sum NG restart the D1600mkII and load the system file once again If the Check sum NG message appears again it is possible that the D1600mkII has malfunctioned Please contact your Korg distributor MIDI W hat is MIDI MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface and is a world wide standard that allows a variety of musical information to be exchanged between electronic musical instruments and computers 1 MIDI connections Special MIDI cables are used to transmit and receive MIDI messages Connect these cables between the MIDI connectors of the D1600mkII and the MIDI connectors of the external device with which you wish to exchange data MIDI IN connector MIDI messages from another MIDI device are received here Connect this to the MIDI OUT connector of the external device MIDI OUT connector The D1600mkII transmits MIDI messages from this connector Connect this to the MIDI IN connector of the external device MIDI channel settings MIDI allows information for multiple MIDI devices to be conveyed over a single MIDI cable by using sixteen MIDI channels 1 16 If MIDI messages are being transmitted on MIDI channel 1 the messages will not be received unless the receiving device is also set to MIDI channel 1 2
21. Off Normal operation The solo signal will be output from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and from the PHONES jack E LA E TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS METER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference TT VIEW Muela l FX AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH JEND LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB P2 Monitor Monitor settings Here you can select the audio that will be sent from the mon itor output IMONITOR OUT L R jacks and the headphone output PHONES jack 132 WD EE 8 o PORRO OM ROO OR UI On Off Sends the master LR bus to the monitor output Nor mally you will turn this On JS On This signal will be sent from monitor output Off This signal will not be sent from monitor output A If solo is turned on for a signal in the Solo tab page you will be unable to turn this setting On In order to turn this On you must first turn solo Off in the Solo tab page DO iia aia On Off If a signal is being soloed in the Solo tab page this set ting will automatically be On MEN On This signal will be sent from monitor output Off This signal will not be sent from monitor output WW dE On Off Selects the bus to which the rhythm sound will be sent On The rhythm will be sent to the monitor LR bus Use this setting when you want to out
22. Time Reverb Time eech 0 1 10 0 Sets the reverberation time HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200 Sets the delay time from the dry sound Thru Pre Delay Thru 0 100 Sets the mix ratio of non delay sound EQTrim EQ Trim oprrcrtei orienten 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15 Sets the gain of High EQ Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Pre Delay msec Pre Delay Thru The Pre Delay sets the delay time to the reverb input allowing you to control spaciousness Using the Pre Delay Thru parameter you can mix the dry sound without delay emphasizing the attack of the sound al m SITT TI e e E e PPE ee Y UG keng Ben y E A Ad EE Ae Bebe Bed 5 RV5 Reverb Room This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make the sound tighter Changing the balance between the early reflections and reverb sound allows you to simulate nuances such as the type of walls of a room 6 RV6 Bright Room This room type reverb emphasizes the early reflections that make the sound brighter Time Reverb Time sec 0 1 3 0 Sets the reverberation time HiDamp High Damp
23. Transmitted and received MTC transmission reception MIDI Clock transmission Tempo map 200 points per song Sync track 1 track per song Tempo rec CD R RW functional Audio CD writing Disc At Once Track ity At Once backup restore WAV file export import ISO9660 Backup restore FAT16 WAV file import FAT16 export FAT16 Copy insert erase delete swap reverse time expansion compression fade normalize optimize tracks can be copied between songs USB functionality Track editing Song editing Copy move delete rename protect Counter locate format Min Sec mSec Meas Beat Tick Min Sec Frame 30NDF only lt MIDI functionality gt MIDI functionality Mixer control effect control MMC transmission reception MTC transmission reception MIDI Clock transmission lt Mixer section gt Structure 24 channel input 8 BUS 1 AUX 1 MASTER Signal processing 32 bit 44 1 kHz Equalizer HIGH f 10 kHz G 15 dB MID 0 1 20 kHz G 15 dB LOW f 100 Hz G 15 dB Scene memory 100 scenes per song lt Effect section gt Structure insert x 8 maximum master x 2 maximum final x 1 All usable simultaneously Signal processing 44 bit 44 1 kHz Programs insert 128 preset 128 user master 32 preset 32 user final 32 preset 32 user Algorithms 98 Effects 106 lt G eneral gt Display Power supply Power consumption Dimensions Weight 240 x 64 pixel LCD with back
24. button in the upper left of the screen select PostFaderLev in the dialog box that appears and press the OK button Final effect settings 1 Access the MASTER EFFECT AUX FinalEff tab page Esrectumser 5 000 00 000 vision ena ET E E GE ME Finale EffectNumber 2 Select EffectNumber and use the VALUE dial to select the Effect Program List p 166 desired final effect 3 If you press the button located at the right of EffectNumber the structure of the final effect you selected will be displayed as icons You can press one of these icons to make detailed settings When you have finished making settings press the OK button to return to the MASTER EFFECT AUX FinalEff tab page Check the song 1 Press the PLAY key to play back the song and check how the effect sounds 2 If you want to edit the effect parameters refer to step 3 of Final effect settings When you have finished editing press the STOP key 2 Create the master track amp When you create an audio CD the data of track 1 and track 2 is what will be written to the CD You will create the master track by combining the song data into tracks 1 and 2 If your song consists of only one or two tracks copy or swap the track data into tracks 1 and 2 If your song consists of multiple tracks bounce the track data to combine it into tracks 1 and 2 Bounce refers to the process of combi
25. 163 ces Various Troubleshooting messages Hard disk and CD R RW drive MIDI implementation chart Block diagram Effect Program List Rhythm Pattern List Index Demo Song I Digital Recording Studio Model Di1600mkII MIDI Implementation Chart Date 2003 7 14 ee Lrezlsel es Basic Default Channel Changed Memorized Messages Altered Note 127 Number True Voice kokok k kokok k kk Velocity Note On Note Off Aftertouch Polyphonic Key Effect control reception only All control numbers 000 119 are received Mixer control transmission reception 07 Fader Monophonic Channel Pan EffSend1 2 AuxSend 16 19 20 25 Eq Low Mid MidFc Hi 68 71 72 77 InEq Low Mid MidFc Hi 80 81 82 83 Subln Lev Bal Mono Mute 86 87 MstEff1 RetLev RetBal 88 89 MstEff2 RetLev RetBal Pitch Bend 94 ChannelPair Function x X Control Change zbsp Master fader O x X O O X X X Program Change Variable Range Scene numbers 1 100 S BN 9 Received transmitted only for 30 frame non drop System Exclusive Quarter frame System Song Position Common Song Select Tune O x x x System Clock Real Time Command O O Local On Off Aux All Notes Off Messages Active Sense Reset X Notes 1 Received if MMC Mode Receive is selected in SYSTEM USB MMC 6 Transmitted received for mixer control when ControlChange is
26. 4 GlobalCh GlobalChannel cccsesesseersseeeeans 01 16 Specify the global MIDI channel This setting is required in the following situations e When using MIDI messages to control an effect with a Device setting other than Pedal e When using program change messages to transmit receive scene changes To allow MIDI messages to be transmitted and received connect the external MIDI device to the D1600mkII via MIDI and set the MIDI channel of the external device to match the GlobalCh of the D1600mkKII ProgramChange TTaNS oomoocccocooroconaanronnaaanos On Off Turn program change message transmission on off Program changes are transmitted when you switch scenes or execute a Store or Recall operation ProgramChange ReCV ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn On Off Turn program change reception on off When a program change is received the scene will change ControlChange Trans ssssssssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn On Off Turn control change message transmission on off The corresponding control change message is transmit ted when you modify a mixer parameter A external sequencer connected via MIDI can record the control changes transmitted from the D1600mkIL 5 ControlChange ReCV cscccsscssssessssesssseseseseans On Off Turn control change reception on off Control change messages that were recorded on an external MIDI sequencer can be received by the D1600mkII to contr
27. 6 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 7 In the TRACK Vtr1 8 tab page select virtual track b for track 1 8 Verify that the data was copied correctly Play back from the beginning of the song and verify that the data was copied correctly K You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command In this case you must return track 1 to virtual track Ml yy a Exchanging entire tracks virtual tracks Swap Whole Track This command exchanges swaps the data of an entire recorded track from beginning to end with the data of another entire track e Not only individual tracks but multiple tracks can be swapped simultaneously This command can be used in ways such as the follow ing e Recorded tracks can have their numbers re ordered by type e Data that is scattered across different virtual tracks can be rearranged into virtual track a etc Procedure for exchanging an entire track Here s how track 1 can be exchanged with the currently selected virtual track a of track 2 1 Select the Swap Whole command In the TRACK Edit Trk tab page set EditType to SwapWholeTrack sourceTrack 5 001 01 000 H SwaprfholeT rack tr 8 utr
28. A Midera 15 0 15 0 dB Set the mid EQ gain You can cut boost over a range of 15 0 15 0 dB at the cutoff frequency specified by MidEc 2 LOWE iirinn Fc 100Hz 15 0 15 0 dB Set the low EQ gain You can cut boost over a range of 15 0 15 0 dB ata 100 Hz cutoff frequency Enable pairing for adjacent mixer channels For details refer to P1 Ch1 8 Select the inputs for mixer channels 1 8 Pair gt p 123 P2 Eq5 8 EQ settings for mixer channels 5 8 Here you can apply EQ equalizer to the playback of tracks 5 8 Refer to P1 Eq1 4 EQ settings for mixer channels 1 4 P3 Eq9 12 EQ settings for mixer channels 9 12 Here you can apply EQ equalizer to the playback of tracks 9 12 Refer to P1 Eq1 4 EQ settings for mixer channels 1 4 P4 Eq13 16 EQ settings for mixer channels 13 16 Apply EQ equalizer to the playback of tracks 13 16 Refer to P1 Eql 4 EQ settings for mixer channels 1 4 P5 Phase Phase settings for mixer channels Here you can invert the phase of each channel This setting applies to the playback tracks If an audio device is input in stereo via a jack whose hot and cold conductors are reversed their stereo position may be blurred or portions of the sound may be cancelled This setting lets you invert the phase to correct such situations EECH O1 OO HE N NormalPhase The phase of this channel will not be inverted Normally yo
29. Do D w To go back up to the previous level Select lt and press the OK button Press the OK button to confirm your selection or press the Cancel button to cancel d Delef eeekkukVuRNRREEEREEKRRKKREEEREEERRRRKAEEEREEKKRRKAEREERERKEEEN You can delete a WAV file or folder from the USB drive Select the WAV file or folder that you want to delete and press the Delete button to delete it db rw asssnuuaniuneuuuuunun anunua enero You can audition the first two seconds of the selected WAV file If you select a WAV file of an unsupported format one of the following error messages will appear SAMPLE RATE NOT 44 1k The sampling frequency of the WAV file is not 44 1 kHz SAMPLE BIT NOT FIT The bit depth of the WAV file is not 8 16 or 24 bit ILLEGAL WAV DATA The WAV file unsup ported for a reason other than the above 3 DOS iia 1 16 1 2 15 16 clip Selects the editing destination track Clip will be 1 if the selected WAV file is monaural or 2 if it is stereo E Fe DG cocida tee Etekeereguge E El Indicates whether the selected WAV file is monaural or stereo EN Indicates a monaural WAV file EJ Indicates a stereo WAV file 5 Exec EXecute s ssssusssuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns Executes the WAV file import P5 Export Exporta WAV file You can copy data from an audio track and export it by sav ing it as a WAV file on a CD R RW disc o
30. Off On Mode Mode Switch Rotate Stop Speed Speed Switch Slow Fast RotAcc Rotor Acceleration 0 100 Rotor Rotor Ratio Stop 0 50 2 00 HrnAcc Horn Acceleration 0 100 Horn Horn Ratio vues Stop 0 50 2 00 HR Bal Horn Rotor Balance Rotor 1 99 Horn MicDst Mic Dieiancel 0 100 Spread Mic Spread veces 0 100 Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Overdrive on off Degree of distortion Output level of overdrive Tone of overdrive Speaker simulation on off Switches between speaker rotation and stop Switches the speaker rotation speed between slow and fast Determines how quickly the rotor rotation speed in the low range is switched Adjusts the low range side rotor rota tion speed Standard value is 1 00 Selecting Stop will stop the rotation How quickly the horn rotation speed in the high range is switched Adjusts the high range side horn rota tion speed Standard value is 1 00 Selecting Stop will stop the rotation Sets the level balance between the high range horn and low range rotor Sets the distance between the micro phone and rotary speaker Sets the angle of left and right micro phones Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Horn Acceleration Rotor Acceleration On a real rotary speaker the rotation speed is accelerated or deceler ated gradually after you switch the speed
31. TmpTrack tab page to record a tap tempo or tempo data from a sequencer and select Tempo Track here The time signature will follow the settings created in the TmpMap tab page For details refer to Tempo map p 72 Ze VENDO arnes 40 240 Specify the tempo that will be used when Tempo Source is set to Manual In the case of TempoMap this will show the current tempo created in the ImpMap tab page In the case of TempoTrack this will show The units are 40 240 de DO daa 01 04 16 16 Specify the time signature that will be used when TempoSource is set to Manual In the cases of TempoMap and TempoTrack this will show the time signature corresponding to the current time as specified in the ImpMap tab page 115 TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS METER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOCI BEM emi SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH JEND LOCA lA CD USB 116 4 SCIRAVOM TEE Rhythm Pattern List Specify the rhythm parameter that will be used when TempoSource is set to Manual In the cases of TempoMap and TempoTrack this will show the rhythm corresponding to the current time as specified in the ImpMap tab page Press the lr button and select a p
32. eee e DestTrack a a 2 DestTrack mmm 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the insert destination track WA In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available 3 Exec Execute usina Execute the track editing operation This area displays the audio data of the track as a wave form Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track gt p 100 101 TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO FF IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH JEND LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB Edit Type Erase Track This operation erases the track data in the IN OUT range of the erase destination track DestTrack When this is executed Exec the IN OUT range will con tain silence IN OUT DestTrack l 3 DestTrack rT eS Testo Tmport ora 2 DestTrack o 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the erase destination track In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available 3 Exec Execute ura Execute the track editing operation This displays the audio data of the track as a waveform Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track gt p 100 Edit Type Delete T
33. messages start appearing frequently and executing the CheckDrive operation did not help You can format the song drive and USB drive simultaneously or individual ly amp When you execute this Format operation all data will be erased from the disk so be sure to check the con tents of the disk before you execute amp If an unexpected accident such as a power failure occurs during the format operation the D1600mkII may become unable to operate correctly If this occurs please contact your Korg distributor 1 Select the type of format operation In the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page choose SelOperation and use the VALUE dial to select the desired type of format e Format ALL format the entire hard disk e Format S format the song drive e Format U format the USB drive beats Ie 001 01 000 Format All HE USE Mode SelOperation 2 Execute the Format operation Press the Exec button to open the dialog box Are You Sure Use the Quick button to select the type of format ting Normally you will turn the Quick button on This will merely initialize the system management area so formatting will not require very much time If the DiskError message appears frequently turn the Quick button off For example you would turn this off if the D1600mkII failed to recognize the drive even after it was formatted with Quick turned on amp Formatting with the
34. save operation WA If you edit an effect program and want to keep the re sults you must save the effect You will use the data saving operations described here when you want to save important data created on the D1600mkII on a CD R RW or your computer for example when you want to free up additional space by deleting data from the hard disk If you want to save data on your computer first save the data to the USB drive of the D1600mkII s hard disk and then save this data on your computer You can save the following data e Song data e Effect user data e WAV files audio files in WAV format amp The various parameters of the song are not saved on an audio CD you create If you want to save the song in a state in which it can be edited or remixed further you must make a backup of it Data save methods and the types of file that can be saved Data save method File type CD R RW USB drive Backup1Song 1 song all user effects L Oe f O BackupAllSongs All songs all user effects L Er Jk x All user effects Copo BackupUserData Either the Insert Master or Final user effects Le ie Export WAV format files Lo tk Filename extensions of files saved on the USB drive Data save method File type Backup1 Song All user effects BackupUserData Insert User Data Ins001 Ins128 Master User Data Mst001 Mst032 Final User Data Fin033 Fin064 WAV format files WAV 1 Backing up and restoring
35. 11 12 13 14 15 16 can be paired so that changing a value for the odd numbered channel will simultaneously change the value for both channels It is convenient to use mixer pairing for stereo recorded channels Pairing is valid for the following settings e TRACK STATUS keys e EQ channel EQ e EffSnd 1 2 effect send e AuxSend auxiliary send e PAN knobs e CHANNEL faders K With the exception of the TRACK STATUS keys and the CHANNEL faders you can select whether or not pairing will be enabled for a parameter This selection is made simultaneously for both Effect Sends 1 and 2 1 Access the Select Pair screen Press the BA SelChPair button found in the INPUT TUNER EQ PHASE or INSERT EFFECT pages to access the Select ChannelPair screen Ch Ch ich hd Ch Che ich ChS b s68606 2 Select the channels for which you wish to enable pairing Press a 1 2 15 16 button to turn it On high lighted as KA Select ChannelPair 3 Select the functions for which pairing will be enabled Select the functions that will be paired for the chan nels you selected in Select ChannelPair From Eq Send Aux and Pan press the functions that you wish to enable to turn on each func tion To finalize the settings press the OK button 5 Monitor settings In order to monitor the audio from the D1600mkII you will need to con
36. 144 H Pard CIS A rA 159 Available recording time 46 91 EE 82 96 Headphone output e 132 e a 8 Miage Teeni n nE 59 110 o A TON 48 puto velan 37 38 Insert effect 24 26 53 126 137 143 144 148 150 Insert Track 63 101 L Lareesizo elec nati 143 PASET Wari tinwieriani tobe 111 LED Screen isa 8 Adjust the contrast 0 0 0 cece 8 Level meter sarao 133 Locate funca 46 118 Location MOV traca 46 118 RegisterIMg siise 46 118 Loop playback aaa 45 120 Loop recordmeg eee 44 120 M Manual punch in out 40 91 M nuslt mpo cas 72 Marias Add LS Master SEM iia aT 88 92 Master effect 28 55 129 137 Master tapete 60 Master EE 31 e ica 30 IWIGTEONOIIC aian A 115 Miem EE 145 MIDI Global MIDI channel 92 Mixer controlar 89 SE 87 DY CIM ONIZO rro 88 Wiatis MID Lesson 87 MIDI channel 87 92 MIDI clocks ains 73 115 MIDI controller 57 151 MIDI implementation chart 164 MIA dsp 52 MIDI nevasnsitai sia 87 91 REI e 52 MID FSCO UCI COL ninia 11 88 MIKAO Distri 26 58 MIXO earo o 36 48 Mixer channel 15 123 MMC MIDI Machine Control 87 93 lee rte E 139 WI ODIO Riess atcha A ORA 49 Monitor OUEDUE E 132 NONE SON Stan 70 109 MTC MIDI Time Code 87 91 N Normalize Track 69 106 0 Optimize Track s ssseeseeeeeee 64 83 103 Overdubbing ancla 19 40 p SH 49 123 Pa EE 48 134 PAN knoBs
37. 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right S peed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed Manual Manual acia 0 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Depth Das 0 100 Sets the depth ofLFO modulation Reso Resonance een 100 100 Sets the resonance amount HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range Mix Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Resonance Wet Dry The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value is differ ent The harmonics will be emphasized when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you set a positive value for both Reso nance and Wet Dry and if you set a negative value for both Resonance and Wet Dry High Damp This parameter sets the amount of damping of the resonance in the high range Increasing the value will cut high range harmonics 17 MO4 St Vibrato Stereo Vibrato This effect causes the pitch of the input signal to shimmer You can use an expression pedal etc to gradually increase or decrease the shimmering speed LFO LFO Waveform TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 4100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed S peed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed Depth DO scanners 0 100 Se
38. 1a QUICK SW erario On Off Select the type of formatting and press the Yes button to begin formatting EMIS On Select this if you simply want to erase all the data saved on the USB drive Since this will only initial ize the management area of the drive it will not require very much time for execution Off Select this if Disk Error messages appear frequently or if the drive is not recognized even after being formatted with Quick turned on amp Formatting with Quick turned off will require a substantial amount of time USB drive 2 GB approximately 35 minutes Sel O peration Format All This operation formats both the song drive and the USB drive of the hard disk eme 001 01 000 _ Format All 1 1 Exec Execute iaa Executes formatting of the entire hard disk La QUICK SW irio aAa On Off Selects the type of formatting EMIS On Select this if you simply want to erase all songs and all data saved on the USB drive Since this will only initialize the management area of the drives it will not require very much time for execution Off Select this if Disk Error messages appear frequently Ze Formatting with Quick turned off will require a substantial amount of time 40 GB approximately 10 hours and 30 minutes ZA FOTCE ariadna On Off Forces formatting to be performed even if the drive con tains protected songs On The drive will be formatted even if it con tai
39. 4 Make sure that EffAll is selected as the Source 5 Make sure that C CD is selected as the Destina tion 6 Execute the backup Press the Exec button and a confirmation dialog box will appear Here you can specify the writing speed Exe DD Backup UserData Speed ECH Drive Are vouSure Exec Control MOT A Eeer Press the Yes button to begin the backup When execution is finished the display will indicate Completed Press the Yes button WA When backing up to CD R RW the backup is automatically compared with the original data to ensure that the backup CD is valid MS If you press the Cancel button while writing to CD R writing will be stopped and an unusable disc will result If you are writing to CD RW the data that was being written will be erased Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 77 78 Backing up to the USB drive Here s how to back up user area insert effect U055 to the USB drive 1 Select BackupUserData In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to select BackupUserData Alternatively you can press the Y button to open the S
40. 5 Check the backup destination drive and the drive information Make sure that C CD is selected as the Destina tion The number of CD R RW discs is displayed Make ready the appropriate number of discs MS If you are using more than one disc we recom mend that you number them beforehand 6 Execute the backup Press the Exec button to display the confirmation screen Here you can specify the writing speed Backup C i Speed E Drive Are You Sure Exec Control MOT A Sune MMC Eeer Press the Yes button to begin the backup Effect user data will also be backed up at this time Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 75 76 If more than one disc is required the following dialog box will appear when the disc is full requesting you to insert the next disc Insert the next disc and press the Yes button CA A Lh k Backup Insert MextDisk AtterInsert PressQk Control MOT f Sune MMC Eeer When the backup is finished the display will indicate Completed Press the Yes button WA When backing up to CD R RW the backed up data will automatically be compared to the origi nal data to ensure that the backup CD is valid MS If you press the Cancel b
41. Can t synchronize using MTC or MIDI Clock Has the D1600mkII been set as the master and the MIDI sequencer as the slave p 87 92 Does the synchronization signal transmitted by the D1600mkII match the synchronization signal received by the MIDI sequencer Check Select MIDISync Mode p 87 92 155 ces Various Troubleshooting messages Hard disk and CD R RW drive Specifications MIDI implementation chart Effect Program Block diagram List List Rhythm Pattern Index Demo Song I If TempoSource is set to TempoTrack has MIDI clock or tap tempo been recorded on the tempo track p 73 Are the synchronization settings of your MIDI sequencer correct Refer to the owner s manual of your MIDI sequencer The D1600mkIl does not receive MMC In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page is RevMMC turned On In the above listed page does the MMCDevID set ting match the MMC device ID of your MIDI sequencer p 87 93 The settings required on your MIDI sequencer will depend on the one you are using L Has your MIDI sequencer been set to transmit MMC Refer to the owner s manual of your MIDI sequencer Can t control effects scenes via MIDI Do the MIDI channels of the D1600mkII and your MIDI sequencer match In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page check GlobalCh
42. Depth 11 Fdback 5 ENTrim 9s LEQG HH HEQG 6 4 Mode Normal For details on the parameters refer to Effect Parameter List gt p 137 3aa Effect O n QO ff sasassssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnas On Off This On Off setting is linked with Effect On Off 3b Sab NeXt sssssnnsnsennnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnannn Displays the next page Mix 19021 SAC Breu ueeeeeereeEREEEEREEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEERSEEEE Displays the previous page 3b Effect OF Oui On Off Switches each effect on off Off The effect is off 3c Control Device ssssssssssnnnsnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnan Specifies the effect parameter controlled by a control device and its maximum and minimum values WA This will appear if in the SYSTEM USB Control tab page you set Asn to InsEff1 InsEff4 3ca Controlbeyice Parar Wah Speed lax ZS Min B BzHz 3ca Parameter ssssssnnsnnsnnonnnannnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Selects the parameter that will be controlled SCD Max M N sssssssssnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Specifies the maximum and minimum values of the parameter that can be controlled by the controller 3d Control On Off ssassssssssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna On Off Shows the state of effect control On A Parameter is specified as the Control Device Off Off is specified as the Paramet
43. INSERT EFFECT InsAsn InsEff1 and InsEff2 tab pages For details refer to 4 Make insert effect settings gt p 24 Check the recording mode If you have already checked the recording mode there s no need to check it again if so proceed to the next step 1 Access the RECORD RecMode tab page and make sure that Select RecMode is set to Input Select a virtual track 1 Press the TRACK key to access the TRACK Vtr 1 8 tab page 2 In the top line of the screen press a virtual track number 4a in the example shown here and turn the VALUE dial to select 4b The selected virtual track and the already recorded virtual tracks are highlighted For details refer to 2 Recording on virtual tracks p 40 When you turn on the power virtual tracks 1a 2a 3a are selected automatically In other words if you record a track without selecting a virtual track recording will occur on la 2a 3a etc Record 1 Set the recording start position to the beginning of the song For details on the counter dis At the beginning of the song the counter value will be 001 01 000 play and on how to change the or 000 00 000 time location refer to Chang ing the time location p 46 2 Press the REC key and then press the PLAY key to start recording on virtual track 4b 3 When you have
44. In the TRACK Edit Trk tab page set EditType to OptimizeTrack 3 Select the optimize mode Press the Mode button to open the dialog box For this example select Erase Punch Noise and press the Yes button to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page 4 Select the track number that you want to optimize For this example set DestTrack to track 1 5 Execute the operation Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute the operation When the operation is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 6 Check the results Press the IN LOC1 key play back from the IN loca tion and check the result of the operation note You can use Undo to return to the state prior to execution amp This operation will require a longer time for comple tion in proportion to the length of the specified region IN OUT Swapping track data Swap Track This command exchanges swaps the specified region IN OUT of recorded track data with the same region of another track e Data can be swapped not only between single tracks but also between multiple tracks simultaneously Procedure for swapping track data Swap Here s how to exchange the IN OUT regions of track 1 and track 2 1 Register the IN and OUT times 2 Select the Swap command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set
45. Insert Effect 1in1 out e 148 Effects within multi effect programs MM1 MMS33 aiid their Parameters ads 149 Insert Effect Tin10UtX8 e 150 Effect CONTON rasa 151 APPeNdices ccceeeeeeeeees 153 Troubleshooting ENEE EEN 153 Various messages EEN ANEN 157 About the hard disk and CD R RW drive 159 b GE e EE 159 2 About the CD R RW drive 160 3 Playing or recording from an audio CID 161 Specification ais 162 MIDI implementation chat 164 BIOCK A a a aa 165 Effect Program Listas 166 Rhythm Pattern List 215 patterns 168 vil viii Thank you for purchasing the Korg D1600mkII Digital e Three independent effects usable simultaneously Recording Studio To ensure trouble free enjoyment please read this manu al carefully and use the instrument as directed 1 Main features e 16 track digital recorder The D1600mkII delivers studio quality sound with 24 bit internal processing 16 24 bit recording and playback and uncompressed recording at a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz It allows a maximum of 16 tracks of simultaneous playback 16 bit and up to 8 tracks of simultaneous recording The recording time is a maximum of approximately 122 hours 16 bit one track Each track provides eight virtual tracks meaning that you can record 128 tracks per song XLR input jacks with 48V phantom power supply ana log inputs dedicated guitar input jack and digital jacks All anal
46. L R L R Pi arena Normal Up Dwn Determines whether or not the L R pitch shift amount is inverted P itch Pitch Shift 1 2tone 24 24 Sets the pitch shift amount in steps of a semitone Fine Fine cent 100 100c Sets the pitch shift amount in steps of one cent LDly Lch Delay msec 0 1000 Sets the delay time for the left channel RDly Rch Delay msec 0 1000 Sets the delay time for the right channel FPoint Feedback Position Pre Post Switches the feedback connection Fdback Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Spread Spread 100 100 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Mix Wem Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds L R Pitch When you select Up Dwn for this parameter the pitch shift amount for the right channel will be reversed If the pitch shift amount is positive the pitch of the left channel is raised and the pitch of the right channel is lowered If an expression pedal etc is used to control the pitch the pitch of the left channel will be con trolled Mode Fine If Cntrl is controlling Pitch and you change Mode or Fine you must once again use Cntrl to readjust the Max and Min parameters 143 Effect Parameter List In
47. MASTER OUT L R jacks These are analog outputs for the master LR bus which combines the signals from each mixer channel or for the audio source that is selected by the Solo function The Solo selection is made in the SOLO MONITOR Solo tab page Connect your external monitor system or recording device to these jacks They output the same audio sig nal as the S P DIF OUT jacks This is a 1 4 phone jack 10 S P DIF OUT jack This is an optical type S PDIF format IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 digital output jack stereo Use an optical cable to connect this jack to the optical digital input of your DAT or MD This jack digitally outputs the same audio signal as the MASTER OUT L R jacks at a sampling rate of 44 1 kHz 11 S P DIF IN jack This is an optical type S PDIF format IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 digital input jack stereo Use an optical cable to connect this jack to the optical digital output of your DAT or MD A sampling rate converter is built in If the connected source has a sampling rate of 48 kHz or 32 kHz source it will be converted automatically to 44 1 kHz 12 USB connector Use a USB cable to connect this to your computer amp You cannot connect USB peripheral devices such as an external hard disk or CD R RW drive to the D1600mkII 13 LCD CONTRAST knob This adjusts the contrast of the LCD screen The optimal setting will depend on the viewing angle so adjust the contrast as necessary Looking fr
48. MIDI messages used by the D1600mkiIl Note aftertouch velocity pitch bend This data is used by the D1600mkII to control effects Program change This data is used by the D1600mkII to select scenes Control change This data is used by the D1600mkII to control mixer parameters MMC MIDI Machine Control MMC messages can be transmitted to control an external sequencer or recorder MMC messages can also be received to control the D1600mkII from an external sequencer or recorder MTC MIDI Time Code MTC messages can be transmitted to make an external sequencer or recorder operate in synchronization with the D1600mkII MTC messages can also be received to synchronize the D1600mkII with another device About the MIDI implementation chart The owner s manual of each MIDI device contains a MIDI implementation chart This chart makes it easy for you to verify the MIDI messages that the device can transmit and receive When using two MIDI devices together compare their MIDI implementation charts to verify the types of MIDI message that they are able to exchange e For more details on the MIDI specifications refer to the separate MIDI implementation To obtain the MIDI implementation please contact your Korg distributor 3 Using MIDI Controlling the D1600mkil from a MIDI sequencer Here s how the MMC messages transmitted from a MIDI sequencer can be used to stop play fast forward rewind record locate the D1600mkII
49. PLAY key to play back 2 Record a keyboard Here s how to record a keyboard in stereo Connect your keyboard 1 Use the top panel TRIM knobs to set INPUT 5 and INPUT 6 to the minimum setting 4 dB 2 Lower the MASTER fader and connect your keyboard to the INPUT 5 and INPUT 6 jacks Assign the inputs to mixer channels 1 Press the INPUT TUNER key to access the INPUT TUNER Ch 1 8 tab page az input 151000 00 000 5105 Chi ithe Cha Cha iChS ChE ich chs iHesodea Chi 8 2 Select the Ch 5 icon and use the VALUE dial to select INPUT 5 In the same way select the Ch 6 icon and use the VALUE dial to select INPUT 6 For details on the counter dis play and moving the time loca tion refer to Changing the time location p 46 When using stereo input you will be able to edit tracks and effects most efficiently if you select an odd numbered and even numbered pair of inputs 1 2 3 4 and assign them to adjacent mixer channels Check the level Assign the audio from your keyboard to tracks and check the levels 1 Press the track 5 and 6 TRACK STATUS keys to select INPUT LEDs lit orange 2 Press the METER TRACK VIEW key In the screen that appears press the E button to open the dialog box Quick Start Select DisplayMode Cancel SO TrkVieni 2 Tel OT rkViews 16 CT rkview1 16 3 In the Select DisplayMode dial
50. PLAY key to start playback the external MIDI sequencer will begin recording in synchronization Now when you operate the mixer parameters fader pan EQ etc the corresponding control change will be transmitted from the D1600mkIl and recorded on the external MIDI sequencer 5 Stop the D1600mkKII When you press the D1600mkII s STOP key to stop playback the external MIDI sequencer will also stop recording The mixer operations of the D1600mkII have been recorded on the external MIDI sequencer Using MIDI to control the D1600mkil mixer Here s how the mixer control data recorded in Recording D1600mkII mixer control operations can be transmitted back to the D1600mkII to control its mixer Make the same connections as in Controlling the D1600mkII from a MIDI sequencer 1 Make synchronization settings for the D1600mkII and the external MIDI sequencer Make the settings in step 1 of Recording D1600mkII mixer control operations 2 Enable control change reception on the D1600mkKII In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page turn the Mixer Control parameter Control Change Recv to ON 3 Put the external MIDI sequencer in playback ready mode 4 Begin playback on the D1600mkII When you press the D1600mkII s PLAY key to begin playback the external MIDI sequencer will also begin playback in synchronization The previously recorded mixer control data will be transmitted from the MIDI
51. STORE key and OUT LOC2 key or use Wave s ROMO is Specifies the pre roll and post roll times for auto punch in out SetkollTime PreRoll Az Unit Meas PostrRoll A Aa Preboll ex keeeESREEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEESEEEEESEEEE 00 10 Specifies the time before punch in during which you can prepare to record Ab PostRoll sssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 00 10 Specifies the time after punch out during which you can hear the transition to the existing material AAA Second Meas Measure Select the units for the pre roll post roll times You can select either seconds or measures Press the OK button and the specified pre post roll times will take effect If you press the Cancel button the times you set will be cancelled OUT LOC 2 PostRoll Stop recording Begin recording Auto punch in out recording Loop recording this region will be repeated You can view the waveform as you set IN and OUT which allows you to specify time locations with greater precision MS You can use the Play From function Play To func tion and Slow Play function For details on using these functions to play the track data refer to 15 SCRUB p 122 5 elas eege 000 00 000 vir Bu israel 000 00 000 Set IN and OUT When you place the cursor at In or Out the track selected by TrackSelect will automatically be set to Solo and Scrub
52. Select the virtual track of the copy destination track DestTrack to which the data will be copied 5 Exec Execute nina Execute the track editing operation Edit Type Swap W hole Track This operation exchanges swaps the track data from the beginning to the end of the swap source track SourceTrack the currently selected virtual track with the specified virtual track of the swap destination track DestTrack Use this operation when you wish to reorder the recorded tracks When you have finished recording a song this opera tion also provides a useful way to move the final data so that virtual track a is used for all tracks When this is executed Exec all data of the SourceTrack and Dest Track will be exchanged Source Track DestVTrack a h l SourceTrack DestVTrack a h sourceTrack 5 001 01 000 H Swap WholeTrack_ 2 tr 1 8 Hutri 1 H EditTrk H Import H Export 2 SourceTrack 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the swap source track WA In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available 3 DestTrack o 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the swap destination track Ki In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available 4 Deep Track cocos a h Select the virtual track of the swap destination track DestTrack to which the data will be swapped 5 Exec Execute iaa daa Execute
53. Shows the loop start time To set this time use the STORE key and IN LOC1 key or Wave 3 Dll 000 00 000 Shows the loop end time To set this time use the STORE key and OUT LOC2 key or Wave Loop n This displays the waveform You can view the waveform as you set IN and OUT which allows you to specify time locations with greater precision For details refer to AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page Wave p 119 120 13 UNDO After executing the following operations you can use Undo to return to the state prior to execution and then use Redo to return to the results of executing the operation e Recording e Track editing CopyTrack InsertTrack EraseTrack DeleteTrack Swap Track ReverseTrack OptimizeTrack Exp CompTrack Copy WholeTrack SwapWholeTrack FadeTrack NormalizeTrack e WAV file import Current Level gi 1 Current Level sssssasssnnnnnnnnnnunonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnn 00 99 Shows how many previous operations you have undone Current 00 the most recent state Current Level 01 99 the state of 1 99 operation s ago Ze Undo Usario Level01 99 Shows the undo level and the operation history Press the New button to select a state earlier than the current state Press the Old button to select a state later than the current state Returns to the page you were in prior to pressing the UNDO key 4 LOVED ssssscstessesscns
54. Son DL AAA Hot 5 641 081 006 toredTime Using the Scrub function 1 Press the TRACK STATUS key of the track that you wish to search setting its track status to PLAY LED lit green o eee you seat 2 Press the SCRUB key to turn the Scrub function Press the MARK key to register the captured time On key lit location as a mark The registration will be completed iis at the moment you press the key Marks will be Use TrackSelect to select the track that you wish renumbered in order of time to play 4 Select Loc and rotate the VALUE dial to find the location while listening to the audio The audio will play back in correspondence with the rotation of the VALUE dial i Even if you perform steps 2 and following dur ing playback or recording the time location at the moment you pressed the STORE key will be captured and can be registered in a mark Moving to a mark location 1 Access the MARK Mark tab page MarkNumber JI 000 00 000 SI MarkNameaaat Do oo 000 2 Use MarkNumber to select the desired mark 3 Press the Recall button to recall the mark You will move to the time location of that mark Deleting a mark amp Undo is not available after deleting a mark 1 Access the MARK Mark tab page 2 Use MarkNumber to select the mark that you wish to delete 3 Press the Delete button to access the dialog box 4 Verify the mar
55. This parameter selects no level control delay output control effect balance or feedback amount control Polarity Threshold Offset Attack Release The Offset parameter specifies the value for the Control Target parameter when level control is not being applied expressed as a ratio relative to the parameter setting The parameter setting will be the Wet Dry value if Control Target Out or the Feedback value if Control Target FB This parameter sets the output level of Tap1 Setting a different level from Tap2 will add a unique touch to a monotonous delay and feed back 138 When Polarity is the Control Target value is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset value if the input level is below Threshold or will equal the parameter value if the input level exceeds the threshold When Polarity is the Control Target value will equal the parameter value if the input level is below Threshold or is obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset value if the input level exceeds Threshold The Attack and Release parameters specify attack time and release time of delay level control 13 DL6 St Auto Panning Delay Stereo Auto Panning Delay This stereo delay effect pans the delay sound left and right using the LFO LTime L Delay Time msec 0 680 Set
56. dial to select the desired master effect For this example select M003 ReverbRoom Adjust the master effect 2 send and return settings as described in Master effect 1 send and return settings 29 Quick Start Step 1 Quick Recording Step 2 Overdubbing Step 4 Mastering 30 Step 4 Mastering Mastering is the process of applying a final effect and EQ to the mixed down song in order to make the overall volume and tone consistent Well also explain how you can use the CD R RW drive to create an au dio CD of your song 1 Apply an effect to the entire song We ll check the panning and volume for each track of the completed song and apply a final effect to the entire song As the final effect you will normally use a dynamics type effect program such as compression to make the overall level consistent By applying a multi band limiter or similar effect you can give the sound a finishing touch of quality TRACK STATUS key settings Make settings for the playback tracks 1 Press the TRACK STATUS keys for the playback tracks to select PLAY LED lit green Song adjustments 1 Play back the song from the beginning 2 While you listen to the song turn the PAN knob of each playback track to adjust its stereo position Use the CHANNEL faders to adjust the levels If you want to see the meter for each fader in the LCD screen press the METER TRACK VIEW key press the
57. may damage your equipment INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 jacks Mic line e g keyboard sources can be input here These are balanced 1 4 TRS phone jacks Unbalanced phone jacks can also be connected amp If you connect a plug to the GUITAR IN jack no input signal will be received from the INPUT 8 jack If you wish to use the INPUT 8 jack dis connect the plug from the GUITAR IN jack FOOT SW jack When your hands are occupied with playing an instrument you can use a foot switch to control basic operations of the D1600mkII recorder A foot switch can be used to start stop the playback start end manual punch in recording register a mark or to record tap tempo Connect the foot switch optional PS 1 to this jack EXPRESSION PEDAL jack You can use a pedal to control a specified parameter of an insert effect You can control the parameter in realtime while you play or record Connect an expression pedal separately sold option EXP 2 XVP 10 etc to this jack 7 AUX OUT jack Connect this to the input jack of an external effect device This jack outputs the external send signal from each mixer channel This is a 1 4 phone jack 8 MONITOR OUT LR jacks Connect your external monitor system to these jacks The bus that is sent to the monitor output is selected in the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page These jacks output the same audio signal as PHONES This is a 1 4 phone jack 9
58. preview button to audi tion the first two seconds of the selected WAV file Select the desired WAV file and press the Yes button 5 Select the import destination track number For DestTrack select track 1 6 Execute the import Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure If you want to execute press the Yes button The display will indicate Completed when the operation is finished Press the Yes button amp This operation will take a longer time in proportion to the length of the file you are importing 7 Move to the beginning of the song and verify that the data was imported correctly Importing a WAV file into the middle of a track Here s how to import a stereo WAV file from the USB drive and copy it once to the TO location the time loca tion stored in the TO LOC3 key of the tracks 1 and 2 1 Select the Import operation Access the TRACK Import tab page execute 000 00 000 Ti Import File Ed Exec co e Diepp GTwAM Trk Clip RT fopra ENESTE Import f export ES WavFileList DriveList DestTrack 2 Select the import source drive Press the DriveList button to open the dialog box Select U USB DOS and press the Yes button 3 Select the WAV file that you want to import Press the WavFileList button to open the dialog box D IGpp DZ w Select a stereo WAV file and press the
59. quarter notes per minute GW 01 04 16 16 Specifies the time signature 2e Rhythm aaa Rhythm Pattern List Specifies the rhythm If you want to specify a region of silence select a silent rhythm You can also press the le button and make your selec tion from a dialog box The rhythms you can choose will depend on the Beat Elank Cancel abt Rock PAA INSEE iaa na On Off On When you create a new tempo map event it will be inserted Turn this on if you want to add a pat tern to the specified measure s Off When you create a new tempo map event it will overwrite the existing tempo map event Turn this off if you want to replace the pattern for the specified measure s Here you can edit the settings of a tempo map Select this when you wish to modify an existing map Use TempoMap to select the map that you wish to modify and then press this button The Select TempoMap Param dialog box will appear and you can set the desired values 2 New This deletes a tempo map Delete Teropokiapn pp Arevyousure E PR On Off All tempo maps will be subject to deletion EDESA On All tempo maps will be subject to dele tion The tempo map number will be shown as Off The single tempo map selected by TempoMap will be subject to deletion amp All tempo maps following the deleted tempo map will be moved forward 5 Pattern Length P
60. tab page assign E rell DOT 01 000 SelectEffType InsertTo 3 VW 3 por 2 kon a E tint outed fe om 3 pote cote port HinsEffifInskff2 HInsk tts A Ins Era E ois 2 Press the E button at the right of Assign to open the Select EffectAssign dialog box 3 In the dialog box press the PlayTrack radio button and then press the OK button Select the Play Track radio button when you want to apply the insert effect to the output of the track channel during mixdown 4 Press the E button below SelectEffType to open the Select EffectType dialog box 5 In the dialog box select an effect type and press the OK button For this example select linlout x 4 linlout x 4 means you can use four monaural in monaural out effects Specify the destination of the processed sound Here s how to apply the insert effect to the recorded vocal 1 Press the E button below InsertIo to open the Select Insert Effect AssignChannel dialog box Insert Effect Select InsertEffect AssignChannel Select Tr In this dialog box you can specify the track channel to which the insert effect will be applied For example the dialog box shown above portrays the following set tings Quick Start The upper left indicates track channel 3 effect 1 mixer channel 3 This means that the track 3 audio signal will be processed by effect 1 and
61. tempo map and turn the rhythm function on off This key will light when the Rhythm function is on 26 IN LOC1 key OUT LO C2 key TO LO C3 key EN D LOC4 key These keys are used to register a desired time location within a song or to instantly jump to a registered time location The time locations registered here are used as the punch in out locations and the editing range for track editing operations such as copy or delete By holding down the IN LOC1 key and pressing the OUT LOC2 key you can listen to the audio between the IN OUT points 27 AUTO PUNCH key This key is used to turn the Auto Punch in out func tion on off to set the pre post roll time and to verify the start end locations This key will light when the Auto Punch in out func tion is on 28 LOOP key This key is used to turn the Loop function on off for playback or recording and to verify the start end locations This key will light when the Loop function is on 29 UNDO key After recording or editing a track you can use the Undo function to return the data to its prior state and then if desired use the Redo function to cancel the Undo and go back to the edited data Up to 99 prior recording or editing operations can be undone You can select from 1 8 or 99 levels of undo This key will light when Undo or Redo is available 30 TRIGGER key This is the on off key for the Trigger Recording func tion which causes
62. 01 12 will be added automatically monaural files Input the date and time for the WAV file you are export ing Press the Date button to open the dialog box and specify the timestamp date and time for the WAV file Select the field you want to edit and use the VALUE dial to edit the date or time File Date ea ai 81 LS Cancel Press the OK button to finalize the change or press the Cancel button to cancel ME The Difference from Greenwich Mean Time GMT setting is not supported Depending on your computer or operating system this may mean that the timestamp of the WAV file will not be displayed correctly Lets you make various settings for exporting the WAV file to CD R RW Ba CD WINGS PGC siii You can specify the writing speed when writing to CD R RW The display will show only writing speeds that are supported by the CD R RW drive and the media you are using pa TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO FF IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH JEND LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB 108 II geg NERAN On Off You can export successive WAV files to CD R RW but if this export will be the last and you do not intend to export any more files you can turn this item on Some drives such as early CD ROM driv
63. 1 and 2 Play back the DAT and press the TRACK STATUS keys of tracks 1 and 2 to set them to INPUT LED lit orange 5 Check the recording mode and input level and audition the sound Refer to steps 3 4 and 5 of Connect a guitar to the GUITAR IN jack and assign it to mixer channel 8 p 36 000000000000000000000000009090 3 Using the tuner The D1600mkII has a built in tuner function To tune an instrument Connect the instrument you want to tune to the INPUT 8 GUITAR IN jack 1 Use SelectSource to select the audio source you want to tune In the INPUT TUNER Tuner tab page set SelectSource to Input8 bed 001 01 000 al 440 Hz Calib 2 Set Calib to the reference frequency you want to use Normally you will use 440 Hz 3 Input sound from your instrument and tune it The display shows the note name closest to the pitch you input Tune your instrument so that the O symbol is located below the triangle W in the middle 50 20 Y 20 50 aaa Tala lala L NS The pitch difference is displayed in units of cents 100 cents semitone 1200 cents 1 octave NS You cannot select this page while recording or playing Nor can you record while in this page MS So that the tuner can detect the pitch accurately effects will be automatically turned off while this page is displayed To check the pitch of an already recorded sound To check the
64. 2 Gently remove the disc from the disc tray 3 Manually press the disc tray in until it is completely closed Emergency removal of the disc Normally you can use the above procedure to remove and insert the disc However if a problem such as power failure occurs and the disc cannot be removed you can use the following method to remove the disc amp Please be aware that excessive use of this method may cause the CD R RW drive to malfunction amp This procedure must be performed with the power off RA To use this method you will need a pin like object of less than 2 mm diameter such as a straightened paper clip Insert this pin straight into the manual eject hole and press The disc tray will be forced open 3 Playing or recording from an audio CD To play an audio CD 1 Set the PHONES LEVEL knob and MONITOR OUT knob to 0 2 Press the eject button of the CD R RW drive to open the disc tray and insert the audio CD 3 Access the SONG CD CDR RW tab page and CO Monitor press CD Monitor to set it to 4 Inthe SONG CD CDR RW tab page press MM yy a 5 Gradually raise the PHONES LEVEL knob or the MONITOR OUT knob 6 To stop the audio CD press the Oo e To record the sound of an audio CD As an example here s how to assign the L channel of an audio CD to mixer channel 1 the R channel to mixer chan nel 2 and record the sound of the audio CD a
65. 3 Play back the song from the beginning amp The final effect will be applied to the song in duplicate when you play back here This is because the final effect was applied to the bounce recorded data and is also being applied to the playback you are hearing Set the final effect to NO EFFECT so that you can hear the actual state of the song De as it was actually bounce recorded 3 Write your song to a CD Here s how to create an original CD by writing your song to CD R amp Since CD RW discs may sometimes not be playable in an audio CD player we recommend that you use CD R discs when creat ing audio CDs Creating an audio CD will require the same amount of free space on the hard disk as occupied by your song the total of the two tracks For example in order to write a five minute stereo song to an audio CD there must be at least five minutes of stereo ten minutes of monaural orden ion howto dede worth of recordable free space on the hard disk free space on the hard disk refer amp If there is no region of silence at the beginning of your song the to 1 GE ype zero time location the beginning of your song may drop out E COUNTER when you write it to a CD and play back You can prevent this by inserting a region of about 0 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of the song For details on how to do this refer to Inserting blank data Insert Track p 63 Write to CD R When creating
66. CD R RW drive Specifications MIDI implementation chart Effect Program Block diagram List List Rhythm Pattern Index Demo Song I 158 Illegal Fat Number Some of the data in the hard disk has been damaged for some reason Delete all songs for which this message appears If the message still appears format the hard disk p 70 82 97 When you turn off the power be sure to use the cor rect procedure p 11 Illegal Mark Point When using Disc At Once to write an audio CD leave at least four seconds between marks You must also leave at least four seconds between the following points e From the beginning of the track to the first mark e From the mark immediately before the end time of the track you are writing to CD until the end of the track Illegal To End Time When using the track editing command Exp Comp Track the TO and END region cannot be executed for the specified IN OUT region You must set the TO END region to be within 50 200 of the IN OUT region InTime gt 0 utTime The IN and OUT settings you made for track editing auto punch in out recording or looping are incorrect and cannot be executed This message will appear if IN is later than OUT or if they are at the same time location Set the IN and OUT times correctly Memory Full There is insufficient memory for recording or track editing Dele
67. EE 20Hz 1 0k QT Q rc 0 5 10 0 G1 Gain dB ciscccsriteimtinsticionaaes 18 18 Fc2 Band2 Cutoff Has ege 50Hz 5 0k 02 0 EE 0 5 10 0 G2 GaIMdO Daria 18 18 Fc3 Band3 Cutoff Hz 300Hz 10 0k 03 E 0 5 10 0 G3 RECH EE 18 18 Fc4 Band4 Cutoff Hz 500Hz 20 0k O A e 0 5 10 0 Gain4 Gain dB 18 18 A tie es 0 100 Excitl Exciter1 Blend Exciter Blend 100 100 Empha Emphatic Point 0 140 Excit2 Exciter2 Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 Sets the gain of Band 1 Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 Sets the gain of Band 2 Sets the center frequency of Band 3 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Sets the gain of Band 3 Sets the center frequency of Band 4 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 Sets the gain of Band 4 Sets the parametric EQ input level Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Sets the frequency range to be empha sized This adds Pre LEO and Pre HEO to Exciter 1 Blend Exciter Blend 100 100 Empha Emphatic Point 0 140 Trim EQ TriM asa 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15 HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15 Wah Wah Auto Wah FcBtm Frequency Bottom 0 100 Sets the lower limit of the wah center fre quency FcTop Frequency Top 0 100 Sets th
68. EditType to Swap Track Surcerrax E 001 DI 000 Source Track DestTrack 3 Select the swap source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 4 Select the swap destination track number Set DestTrack to track 2 5 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 6 Verify that the data was exchanged correctly Press the IN LOC1 key to play back from the IN location and verify that the data was exchanged correctly MS You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location Mixdown Using Using the effects mixer y MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song the system settings editing e2 Ul 66 Expanding or compressing a track Expansion Compression Track This command expands or compresses the specified region IN OUT of recorded track data into the specified region TO END of a specified track e The original data is left unchanged and the time expanded compressed result is created on another track e You can select whether or not the pitch will be converted e Not only a single track but multiple adjacent tracks of
69. FF STOP PLAY REC dE ki gt SCRUB ON 3 Press the PLAY key Playback will begin and the PLAY LED will light Use the MAS TER fader to adjust the volume You can use the front panel PHONES knob to adjust the volume of your headphones or the top panel MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob to adjust the volume of your monitor speakers REW FF STOP PLAY REC LD gt l E ES e gt gt a 4 To stop playback press the STOP key The PLAY LED will go dark REW FF STOP PLAY REC ie inet te Pi I gt A SCRUB ON To stop the rhythm access the TEMPO RHYTHM Setup tab page and press the Rhythm button to turn it Off For details on the counter dis play and how to change the time location refer to Chang ing the time location p 46 Step 2 Overdubbing Overdubbing is the process of recording additional performances on other tracks while you listen to the previously recorded performance or rhythm Quick Start For this example we ll overdub an additional performance on guitar or keyboard while listening to the performance you recorded in Step 1 We ll also explain how to record your keyboard in stereo and how to record on a virtual track
70. For this example select Manual You can select the tempo source in the dialog box that appears when you press the amp button Use the radio buttons to make your selec tion and press the OK button 2 Select Tempo and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the tempo 3 Select Beat and turn the VALUE dial to specify the time signature 4 Select SelRhythm and turn the VALUE dial to select the rhythm pattern you want to use You can select the rhythm pattern in the dialog box that appears when you press the E button Use the radio buttons to make your lu you want the tempo time sig selection and press the OK button nature and or rhythm pattern 5 Select Vol and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the volume of the to change during the song cre rhythm ate a Tempo Map p 72 E y 5 Assign the input to a mixer channel Step 2 Overdubbing Assign the input to a mixer channel 1 Press the INPUT TUNER key to access the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page az input 151000 00 000 A Chi he Che Cha hh Ch Ch IBTA Ewin Ca E Tuner EE 2 Select the Ch 8 icon and turn the VALUE dial to select INPUT 8 Since the front panel GUITAR IN jack is INPUT 8 the input from the GUITAR IN jack has been assigned to track channel 8 Step 3 Mixdown R e tt Adjust the level of the input signal while you watch the LCD screen TRACK ST
71. Protect Song This operation protects the selected song so that it can not be rewritten or deleted It will not be possible to write any parameters of that song For example if you attempt to record into a song for which Protect is turned on an error message will appear and recording will stop You can use this setting to prevent a completed song from being accidentally overwritten or deleted 1 2 Select the song you want to protect DestSong Select the Protect Song operation In the SONG CD EditSong tab page select ProtectSong as the EditType EditTupe E000 00 000 Te e GEES B61 Demosonq461 i DestSong Make sure that the song you want to protect is selected as the DestSong Turn the protect setting on or off Press the Exec button A lock symbol is displayed to indicate a song for which Protect is turned on The setting will alternate on off each time you press the Exec button Rhythm tempo settings The D1600mkII contains numerous rhythm patterns for a variety of time signatures p 168 Rhythm Pattern List When you have a sudden idea for a song you can record your performance immediately using the built in rhythms as a guide By joining various rhythm patterns you can also create drum patterns for an entire song 1 Specifying and playinga rhythm Access the TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp tab page The settings described below are
72. Recall the mark selected by MarkNumber and move the current time to that location 8 SCENE Mixer settings you edit can be stored as a scene at the desired time location so that these mixer settings will be recalled automatically when playback reaches that time location You can also store frequently used settings as a scene and recall them whenever desired NS Up to 100 scenes can be registered in each song The following settings can be registered in a scene e MixerChannel EQ EffectSend1 2 AuxSend Pan Balance ChFader PairOn Off e InsertEffect only when Assign is Trk EffectType InsertTo EffectNumber e MasterEffect EffectNumber EffectReturn e FinalEffect EffectNumber 000000000000000000000000009090 P1 ReadDel Scene playback on off and editing BOLINEW SCENE op Di pae Rename EditLoc Tast t 411 58 3 1 SceneRead iaa On Off Turn scene playback on off SceneReadsOn On Scene playback is enabled During playback each scene will be recalled when its registered time is reached and the mixer settings will change automatically When this is On the SCENE key will light Off Scene playback is disabled You can freely recall scenes as general purpose settings without regard to their time location For details refer to Recalling a scene p 51 You can filter specified mixer parameters so that they will not be modified when a scene is recal
73. The Horn Acceleration parameter sets the speed at which the rotation is accelerated or decelerated Mic Distance Mic Spread This is a simulation of stereo microphone settings 38 LS7 Center Canceller When a stereo music source is input to this effect parts that are panned to the center such as vocals and lead guitar will be erased In addition you can control the pitch Pitch Pitch ecscesscscesssessevseees 12 0 12 Adjust Adjust L50 CNT R50 Himix Center Hi min 0 100 Lomix Center Lomp 0 100 144 Sets the amount of pitch shift in steps of a semitone Sets the cancelling position Sets the mixing amount of the high fre quency portion of the center position Sets the mixing amount of the low fre quency portion of the center position Insert Effect lin2outx2 These algorithms can be selected for an insert effect if Select Eff Type is set to lin2outx2 Effects GT1 VO2 are multi effects for guitar bass vocal and contain three to five effects connected in series Example Algorithm number Category number Algorithm name Name of effect in the chain 39 GT1 Guitar Multi Dist NR Cho Fl S Dly The chain structure of each multi effect is shown below For an explanation of the parameters of each effect in the chain refer to Effects within multi effect programs GT1 VO2 and their parameters on the following page GT1 GT6
74. Using Using the settings editing editing effects mixer 87 88 5 Operate your external MIDI sequencer When you perform stop play fast forward rewind record locate operations on your MIDI sequencer the D1600mkII will be controlled accordingly For details refer to the owner s manual for your MIDI sequencer At this time you can also make the D1600mkII transmit MTC MIDI Time Code or MIDI Clock messages to synchronize the MIDI sequencer so that the two devices will be synchronized as the sequencer controls stop play fast forward rewind record locate operations on the D1600mkKII Synchronizing two D1600mkIl units Here s how you can synchronize two D1600mkII units One D1600mkII will be the master and the other will be the slave Make connections as follows MTC MTC Slave MMC Receive MTC MTC Mstr MMC Transmit E EJ NE CC ate Ge H Ge er SE B Ea e ir Ei esooale NT cbuooje D1600mkil Master D1600mkIl Slave 1 Make settings on t
75. We will also apply an effect to your keyboard 1 Record a guitar While listening to the performance you recorded in Step 1 you can play a guitar phrases riffs or solos and record them In this example wel overdub on track 7 Step 1 Quick Recording Assign the input to a mixer channel Assign the input of the guitar connected to INPUT 8 to mixer channel 7 1 Press the INPUT TUNER key to access the INPUT TUNER Ch 1 8 tab page 2 Select the Ch 7 icon and use the VALUE dial to select INPUT 8 Check the level When recording on more than one track you don t have to readjust the level each time if you are playing the same instrument in the same state if so proceed to the next step Adjust the level only if you have switched sounds or instruments 1 Press the track 7 TRACK STATUS key to select INPUT LED lit orange 2 In the METER TRACK VIEW page select PreFaderLev 3 Turn the INPUT 8 TRIM knob while watching the level meter Check the sound 1 Set the CHANNEL 7 fader to unity gain 0 dB G 2 In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page make sure that the 3 MasterLR button is On E 3 While playing your guitar slowly raise the MASTER fader and S check the sound in your headphones etc 9 D TRACK STATUS key settings You ll need to select the appropriate status for the recording track play back track and other tracks 1 Press the track 7 TRACK S
76. all or part of the data Manufacturer SANYO on hard disk to be lost or may cause malfunctions such Laser output Operation condition 37 5mW as hard disk damage Maximum condition 76 3mW If the hard disk has been damaged due to incorrect Wavelength 783 3nm operation power failure or accidental interruption of the power supply a fee may be charged for replacement even if this device is still within its warranty period DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM VORSICHT Pha nto m Pow er UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET To prevent hazard or damage ensure that only micro phone cables and microphones designed to IEC 268 15A NICHT MIT OPTISCHEN INSTRUMENTEN are connected l l ADVARSEL l LASERSTRALING N R DEKSEL PNES STIRR IKKE INN STAR LEN ADVARSEL NICHT IN DEN STRAHL BLICKEN AUCH LASERSTR LING VED BNING SE IKKE IND I STR LEN Data ha ndling VARNING LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R PPNAD Incorrect operation or malfunction may cause the contents of IA IN VARO memory to be lost so we recommend that you save AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERSATEILYLLE important data on a CD or other media Please be aware that ALA TUIJOTA SATEESEEN Korg will accept no responsibility for any damages which may result from loss of data COPYRIGHT WARNING This professional device is intended only for use with works for which you yourself own the copyright
77. amp You cannot Undo song editing operations 1 Song editing operation The D1600mkII provides the following song editing operations e Copy song copy a song e Move song move a song e Delete song delete a song e Protect song protect a song Basic song editing procedure 1 Select the song that you want to edit 2 Access the SONG CD EditSong tab page EditTupe e000 00 000 W HEETE Haz 3 Select the desired type of song editing operation e g copy or delete Select EditType Select the field at the right of the E button and turn the VALUE dial to select the type of editing operation Alternatively you can press the E button to open the Select EditSong Type dialog box and select the editing operation Select EditSong Type 4 Select the song that you want to edit The LCD screen display will differ depending on the EditType The screen shown above is for when you select CopySong as the EditType For the CopySong operation the song you selected in step 1 will appear as Source Song Use the DestSong field to specify the copy destination song EditTupe 5 000 00 000 Te e TEC Hp SourceSong DestSong 69 Basic operation Creating selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using th
78. an expression pedal such as the EXP 2 foot controller or 4001 01 000 an external MIDI controller SS SEA For the effect parameters that can be controlled refer to SEH Se Effect Parameter List gt p 137 SR KR E E 1 Connect an expression pedal separately sold option EXP 2 foot controller or external MIDI controller gt p 10 Select the external device that will control the effect Access the SYSTEM USB Control tab page In Device CtrlChgDevice select Pedal if you wish to use an expression pedal or select a MIDI message if you wish to control via MIDI gt p 91 Fancontrat J001 01 000 Fune Punehreo Eantontrol CCR Dev Pedal Asn Expo control TIO Eno AMC a If you set Device CtrlChgDevice to be controlled by a MIDI message other than Pedal you must set the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page GlobalCh GlobalChannel setting to match the MIDI channel of the external MIDI device that is transmitting the control messages Select the insert effect that you wish to control Use Asn CtrlChgAssign to select the insert effect that will be controlled Press the Cntrl Icon button to access the Con trolDevice dialog box Controlbewice Param Chr l Speed Min DDAHs Max ELAHz Select Param and rotate the VALUE dial to select the parameter that you wish to control Rotate the VALUE dial to specify th
79. and RetBal return balance For this example set RetLev to 100 and RetBal to CNT The return level is the volume sent from master effect 1 to the master bus Raising this value will produce a deeper effect The return balance is the left right volume balance of the sound returned from master effect 1 to the master LR bus 2 Access the MASTER EFFECT AUX MstEff1 tab page CEST 001 01 000 WER SG M tE112 eet SO Gee Ge 3 Set the CHANNEL faders to unity gain 0 dB for the mixer chan nels to which you want to apply the effect and press the PLAY key to play back the song 4 In the screen select the Send icon for each channel and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the send level of that channel Watch the level meter in the screen and make adjustments so that CLP does not appear The send level is the amount of volume sent to master effect 1 6 While you listen to the song access the MASTER EFFECT AUX MstEff1 tab page Watch the level meter in the screen and adjust the return level so that CLP does not appear ES EA IB 001 01 000 Ewe gt FUENBrightRoom Rename or our eier Gp RetBal CO a EDGE WE GELS When you have finished making adjustments press the STOP key Select master effect 2 and make send and return settings iP 2 Access the MASTER EFFECT AUX MstEff2 tab page Press EffectNumber and use the VALUE
80. area number and press the Exec button to store the effect To cancel press the Cancel button amp Effects are always overwritten P2 MstEff2 Selection and settings for master effect 2 Here you can select and make settings for master effect 2 For details refer to P1 MstEff1 Selection and settings for master effect fi The send amount from each channel the input level to the effect is adjusted in the EffSnd2 tab page P3 EffSnd1 Send settings for effect 1 Here you can set the send amount from each mixer channel to effect 1 TR 001 01 000 WER 3 1 Lt fee GS ME GED 1 SendLevelMeter SND 1 CLP 8 18 42dB This shows the send level to effect 1 The vertical axis shows the level Ze So Ch1 16 000 100 Adjust the send amount from each mixer channel to effect 1 Specify pairing for adjacent mixer channels For details refer to P1 Ch1 8 Select the inputs for mixer channels 1 8 Pair gt p 123 129 TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS METER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO NI LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR MID FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB P4 EffSnd2 Send settings for effect 2 Here you can set the send level from each mixer channel to effect 2 For details refer to P3 EffSnd1 Send settings for
81. at a point slightly ahead of the silent areas you want to erase and OUT at a location after the end of the silent areas 2 Select the Optimize command In the TRACK EditIrk tab page set EditType to OptimizeTrack 3 Select the optimize mode Press the Mode button to open the dialog box For this example select Erase Silence and press the Yes button to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page 4 Select the track number that you want to optimize For this example set DestTrack to track 1 5 Execute the operation Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute the operation When the operation is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 6 Check the results Press the IN LOC1 key play back from the IN loca tion and check the result of the operation note You can use Undo to return to the state prior to execution amp This operation will require a longer time for comple tion in proportion to the length of the specified region IN OUT Erasing punch noise Here s how you can erase punch noise from the IN OUT region of track 1 1 Store the IN and OUT locations Set IN at a point slightly ahead of the noise and OUT at a location after the end of the noise amp You cannot edit this to other than a transition between events 2 Select the Optimize command
82. at pre specified times 1 Access the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page Select the signal that you wish to monitor p 132 Turn the Autoln button On WA If the Autoln button is Off you will always hear the input signal that is assigned to the recording track If it is On the sound recorded on that track will be heard during playback and the assigned input signal will automatically be heard during recording Move the current time to a location earlier than the point where you wish to begin re recording Press the PLAY key to begin playback The song will play back and you will hear the sound of the playback tracks and the track selected for recording At the point where you wish to begin re recording press the REC key Recording will begin manual punch in and you will begin hearing the external input signal At the point where you wish to stop re recording press the REC key or PLAY key Recording will stop and the track will switch back to playback manual punch out You will begin hear ing the track playback Press the STOP key to stop After recording move the current time to a point earlier than where you began recording and check that the recording was satisfactory Manual punch in out using a foot switch You can switch between playback and recording by pressing a PS 1 foot switch separately sold option This allows you to switch between playbac
83. bass guitar can be plugged in here This is an unbalanced 1 4 6 3 mm input jack with 1 MQ impedance PHONES jack A set of headphones can be connected here This is a 1 4 stereo phone jack This outputs the same signal as the MONITOR OUT L R jacks 4 PHONES LEVEL knob 0 10 This knob sets the volume level of the headphones The volume will increase in correspondence to the printed grid CD R RW drive bay Use this to backup restore data and to play or write audio CDs For details on handling and inserting a disc refer to 2 About the CD R RW drive p 160 E e E E d f y SS un C a 5 O Ye y F 5 5 EE y E ae Y O O c O D D 0 el O U f UI C O D Q O Y Listening to the demo song 3 Rear panel KorG D1600mkII SC Recording Studio WARNING ISK OF FIRE ECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT PEDAL FOOT SW EXPRESSION AUX OUT R 1 AC connector Connect the included power supply cable here 2 Main power switch This turns the main power on off When the Main power switch is turned on the D1600mkII will be in standby mode In standby mode you can press the POWER key to turn on the power of the D1600mkII While the D1600mkII is operating you can use the POWER key to shut down and then turn the main power off to turn the power off completely amp To turn off the power you must first press the POWER key to perform the shutdow
84. beginning of the pre roll time Listen to the performance that you recorded 41 Basic operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer ee po teem Assign audio inputs yX U Q gt E a Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 42 5 Combining multiple tracks into two Bounce You can combine the performances of multiple tracks into two tracks thus freeing up the original tracks for additional recording This procedure is called bouncing You can use this when you wish to play back the perfor mances of more than 16 tracks simultaneously You can use bounce recording to do the following things e Combine 16 tracks of audio and overwrite record them onto two tracks e Combine 16 tracks of audio and record them onto two unused virtual tracks e Record 14 tracks of audio and two external input signals onto the remaining two tracks e Combine multiple external input sources and record them on two tracks When you use a CD R RW drive to create an audio CD the data of tracks 1 and 2 will be written to the CD so you must combine your completed song into tracks 1 and 2 You can also mix down your completed song to two tracks of the D1600mkII instead of mixing down to an external two channel recorder Combining 16 tracks of audio and overwriting them onto 2 tracks As
85. degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed LDly L Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0 Sets the delay time for the left channel RDly R Pre Delay msec 0 0 50 0 Sets the delay time for the right channel Depth Depth sereen 0 100 Sets the depth ofLFO modulation EQTrim EQ Trim rs 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of High EQ Mix Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds L Pre Delay msec R Pre Delay msec Setting the left and right delay time individually allows you to con trol the stereo image 15 MO2 St Flanger Stereo Flanger This effect gives a significant swell and movement of pitch to the sound It is more effective when applied to a sound with a lot of harmonics This is a stereo flanger You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other Time Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0 Sets the delay time from the original sound LFO LFO Waveionm TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape secs 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Phase LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between th
86. drive Copy source track ECH Intro A BY S Shared data y Ke data Intro a B no a B Copy destination track Shared data Copy destination track However if new audio data is created because you execute Optimize Track on the copy destination or copy source the data will no longer be shared Be aware that this will cause more drive space to be occupied than before execution For example suppose you record take 1 and copy it to another track Even if you record a second take on the copy source the copy source and copy destina tion will still share the same audio data Copy source track moj a B Record a y second take Copy destination track intropa B wo A B Second Ap Shared data take Copy If you then execute Optimize Track on the copy source new audio data will be created for the copy source This means that data will no longer be shared with the copy destination In other words executing Optimize Track in this situation will cause a larger amount of drive space to be occupied Copy source track Record a second tae Y IN A OUT Copy i SC destination track Le Jel Shared data USB W hat is USB USB stands for Universal Serial Bus and is an interface for transferring data between a computer and peripheral devices amp Youcannot connect USB peripherals such as external hard disks or CD R RW drives to the D1600mklII By connecting the D1600mkII s USB
87. each channel will be output to the stereo signal of the master LR bus For channels 1 16 whose pair setting is Off this is the pan setting to the masterLR bus These settings can be paired and registered in a scene amp When recording to tracks whose channels have a bal ance setting be sure to set the knob at CNT 25 FADER Adjusts the volume levels The faders that adjust the recording level will differ depend ing on whether you are recording an external input or per forming bounce recording When recording an external input when Input is selected for the RECORD RecMode tab page item Select Rec Mode the channel faders will adjust the recording level When using bounce recording when Bounce is selected for SelectRec Mode in the RECORD RecMode tab page the master fader will adjust the recording level CHANN EL fa ders nisinsin a 1 16 These adjust the volume level of each channel For a channel whose TRACK STATUS is PLAY the fader adjusts the playback volume For a channel whose TRACK STATUS is REC the fader adjusts the recording level of the external input or the rhythm For a channel whose TRACK STATUS is INPUT the fader adjusts the recording level of the external input MASTER fader ii aaa MASTER This adjusts the volume level of the master LR bus The signal from the MASTER OUT L R jacks and S P DIF OUT jack will be output at the specified
88. effects mixer 2 Track editing examples Copying track data Copy Track The Copy Track command copies recorded track data from the specified region IN OUT to another location TO e You can copy the IN OUT data not only once but multiple times in succession e You can copy not only a single track but multiple tracks simultaneously e By using the clipboard you can copy track data to another song This command can be used in the following ways e Aphrase of several measures such as a drum pattern can be copied repeatedly to create track data for the entire song e The first verse of a song can be copied and used to create the second verse e A favorite phrase can be recorded on a track and copied for use on another track or song Procedure for copying a track within the same song Here s how to copy the IN OUT region of track 1 to the TO location of track 2 three times 1 Register the IN OUT and TO times 2 Select the Copy command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to Copy Track Saroetras SI 001 01 000 EI CopyT rack iri e Teel Source Track peace tin Times 3 Select the copy source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 4 Select the copy destination track number Set DestTrack to track 2 If you specify multiple tracks for the copy source you must specify the same number of tracks for the copy destination 5 Specify the number of time
89. erase region start time DeleteTrack delete region start time Swap Track swap source and swap destination start times ReverseTrack reverse source start time Exp CompTrack expansion compression source start time OptimizeTrack start time FadeTrack start time NormalizeTrack start time O UT LO C2 key The time location stored in the OUT LOC2 key is used in the following ways e Locate point 2 e Punch out time for auto punch recording e Playback end time for loop playback e Playback end time for in out playback e The following time locations for track editing operations CopyTrack copy source end time InsertTrack blank insertion end time EraseTrack erase region end time Delete Track delete region end time SwapTrack swap source and swap destination end times Reverse Track reverse source end time Exp CompTrack expansion compression source end time OptimizeTrack end time FadeTrack end time NormalizeTrack end time TO LOC3 key The time location stored in the TIO LOC3 key is used in the following ways e Locate point 3 e The following time locations for track editing operations CopyTrack copy destination time ReverseTrack reverse copy destination time Exp ComplTrack expansion compression destination start time copy destination time EN D LO C4 key The time location stored in the END LOCA
90. fade out command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to FadeTrack 3 Select the fade out curve Press the Mode button to access the dialog box For this example select the D curve press the OK button to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page 4 Select the fade out destination track number Set DestTrack to track 1 5 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 6 Verify that the data was faded correctly Press the IN LOC1 key to play back from the IN location and verify that the data was faded out cor rectly K You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command amp The longer the specified range IN OUT the longer this command will take to process until the Com pleted display appears Boosting to the optimal level Normalize Track This command boosts the specified region IN OUT of track data that was recorded at a lower than optimal level so that the level is raised to the maximum volume without clipping e The peak of the audio data in the IN OUT region is detected and the audio level of the IN OUT region is boosted so that the peak reaches the maximum allowa ble level e You can normalize either a single track o
91. filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed on the apparatus e Clean only with dry cloth e Do not block any ventilation openings install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions e Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat e Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet for U S A and Canada e Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus e Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer e Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time e Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped e Do not install this equipment on the far position from wall o
92. finished recording press the STOP key 4 Select another virtual track as described in Select a virtual track above and continue recording additional takes on other virtual tracks 23 Quick Start Step 1 Quick Recording Step 3 Mixdown Step 4 Mastering 24 Play back a virtual track iF Hold down the STOP key and press the REW key to return to the beginning of the song 2 Press the TRACK STATUS key to set the recorded tracks to PLAY 3 Press the PLAY key to play back At this time the virtual tracks selected in the TRACK Vtr 1 8 tab page will play You can select different virtual tracks in the TRACK Vtr 1 8 tab page while you play back and compare the different takes When you have finished listening press the STOP key 4 Make insert effect settings If you want to apply effects while you record make insert effect settings as follows Select an insert effect 1 Press the INSERT EFFECT key to access the INSERT EFFECT InsAsn tab page 2 Off 18 Ind HOT d DAMME E Press the E button located at the right of Assign to open the Select EffectAssign dialog box Here you will select whether the insert effect will apply to input or to playback SelectEffect s ign Input PlayTrack Select the Input radio button and press the OK button Select the Input radio button when you want to a
93. input level the playback level is fixed at unity Set the TRACK STATUS to PLAY and you will be able to adjust the level of the playback EQ does not work For an input signal the input EQ can be used and the channel EO cannot be used Adjust the input EQ in the INPUT TUNER InEq1 4 or InEq5 S tab page For a playback signal the channel EQ can be used and the input EQ cannot be used Adjust the channel EQ in the EQ PHASE Eq1 4 Eq5 8 Eq9 12 or Eq13 16 tab page The input EQ cannot be used on the digital input or on the rhythm The input EQ can be used only on the analog inputs Can t record Is the CHANNEL fader of the D1600mkII lowered When the RECORD RecMode tab page item Select RecMode is set to Input Is the MASTER fader of the D1600mkII lowered When the RECORD RecMode tab page item Select RecMode is set to Bounce Is the TRACK STATUS of the recording destination track not set to REC Could the drive space be insufficient Set the counter display to FreeTime and check the time available for recording p 91 Delete unneeded songs to create more free space on the drive p 70 110 Is the input source that you wish to record being correctly input to a mixer channel In t
94. into a location other than the beginning of the song The D1600mkII can import WAV files of the following formats e Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz e Bit depth 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit e Number of channels 1 monaural 2 stereo If you want to import a WAV file from your computer connect your computer via a USB cable save the WAV file on the D1600mkII s USB drive and then import the file from the USB drive A WAV files saved on an ISO9660 level 1 format CD ROM CD R or CD RW are supported amp When you execute this operation the import destination track will be overwritten amp Importing or exporting a WAV file will require a certain amount of time Examples of importing and exporting a five minute 16 bit 44 1 kHz monaural WAV file are shown below Export dx 5min 20sec min 20 sec CSC The processing time will depend on the format of the WAV file and on the type of disc you are using execute 6001 01 000 __ Import File L DEV CUS ran S C U Selects the drive For more about drives refer to Drive p 93 STE ERC EN Selects the WAV file Press the OK button to confirm your selection or press the Cancel button to cancel it LS Cancel PERC_44k In the WavFileList screen folders are displayed as folder name amp Long filenames are not supported To see the contents of a folder Select folder name and press the OK button NR BS
95. jack If you 2 are using monitor speakers connect them to the rear panel MONI R TOR OUT L R jacks o H D Ge e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Before you turn off the power 2 Turnon the power refer to 2 Turning the power 1 Connect the power cable to the D1600mkII and then plug it into an DIER Ee AC outlet 2 Set the top panel MASTER fader to o 3 Press the rear panel POWER ON key The D1600mkII will enter standby mode and the STANDBY LED will light is 4 Press the top panel POWER key i The power will turn on and the following display will appear 2 E y D KO RG Wersion 1 00 D7600 mk if Digital Recording Studio 13 3 Create a new song Before you can record a new composition you must first create a new song on the D1600mkIL 1 Press the SONG CD key Then press the SelSong tab to access the SONG CD SelSong tab page You can also access the SelSong tab page by pressing the SONG CD key several times setectTimebisp E 001 01 000 E 881 DemoSongBB 1 EJ Tempo Manu 126 64 04 Metrod 2 Press the New button The MakeNewSong dialog box will appear MakeMewSong or Hst Song Type Mixertiet Cancel Gi 16Bit 1ETrack 2dBit STrack PrevSona 3 Use Song Type to specify the bit depth and number of tracks for the song you want to create and use Mixer Set to specify the mixer
96. key is used in the following ways e Locate point 4 e The following time location for track editing operations Exp ComptTrack expansion compression destination end time 11 AUTO PUNCH P1 AtPunch Settings for auto punch in out recording Auto punch in out recording is a function that automati cally starts recording punch in and stops recording punch out at the time locations you specify beforehand If you record when AutoPunch is On punch in out recording will occur automatically NS By turning the RHSL key On you can rehearse auto punch in out recording i e practice without actually recording anything E AUTO Te aiii On Off Set the auto punch in out recording function on off AutoPunch n On When you record auto punch recording will occur When On the AUTO PUNCH key will light When you begin recording the song will start at the pre roll time before the registered time IN recording will occur for the recording region IN OUT and playback will stop after the post roll time AutoPunch Ott Off When you record recording will occur normally Mania 000 00 000 This shows the auto punch in time where recording will begin To set this time location use the STORE key and IN LOC1 key or use Wave A eege 000 00 000 This shows the auto punch out time where recording will end To set this time location use the
97. keyboard and St Comp to the rhythm machine as you record Other examples are shown below INPUT REG Tr L we d Stereo Source 33 Basic operation Creating selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 34 1 in 1 out x 4 mono in mono out x 4 While recording four vocals simultaneously you could apply Exciter Comp to voices that lack impact and apply Limiter P4EQ to loud voices as you record Other examples are shown below INPUT REG Tr Chorus E INPUT REG Tr 1 in lout x 8 mono in mono out x 8 For example when using eight mics to simultane ously record each instrument of a drum set you can apply a separate effect program to each instrument such as a Limiter to the bass drum a Gate to the snare drum and an Exciter to the tom while you record INPUT REC Ir When using eight mics to record multiple instru ments simultaneously you could apply Gate to each instrument to reduce crosstalk between the mics or apply Limiter to adjust the dynamics INPUT REC Ir During track playback 2 in 2 out x 2 stereo in stereo out x 2 Two tracks containing stereo recorded drums etc could be processed by St Comp or St Limiter to adjust the dynamics or Reverb could be applied to create a broader sense of space
98. made in this page Temposource 001 01 000 1 1 Tempo Turning the rhythm on off O Press the Rhythm button to turn it On high lighted The TEMPO RHYTHM key will light and the rhythm will sound during playback or recording If you do not want to hear the rhythm during play back or recording turn the Rhythm button Off Adjusting the rhythm volume O Select the RhythmVol Vol and rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the volume Setting the tempo and time signature 1 Select the TempoSource and select the tempo source For this example we will select Manual which will use a single tempo time signature and rhythm pat tern K You can also press the button and select from a list If you wish to change the tempo time signature and rhythm pattern during the song you must create a Tempo Map p 72 2 Select the Tempo and rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the tempo 3 Select the Beat and rotate the VALUE dial to set the time signature 71 Basic operation Creating selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 72 Selecting the rhythm pattern Select SelRhythm and rotate the VALUE dial to select the rhythm pattern that you wish to use Yo
99. mic giving it the character of a sound that was recorded on an expensive con denser mic special studio mic or vintage mic InMic Input Mic Type Vo Dy MIt Dy Line Selects the mic that was used for record ing OutMic Output Mic Type VntDy MItCn Selects the mic to be simulated Pc Cn Whale Vo Cn Vo Tb BDr Dy Set Setting e Close On Off Far Mic setting A 0 100 Sets the adjustment level Input Mic Type Vo Dy A dynamic mic frequently used for vocals that brings the sound to the forefront and is also resistant to popping and feedback MIt Dy A dynamic mic usable for a wide range of applications including most instruments and vocals with a crisp and well defined character Output Mic Type Vnt Dy A simulation of a vintage mic known for its warm and rich tone and is ideal for vocals MIt Cn A simulation of a general purpose studio condenser mic with a wide range from low to high that is ideal for most instru ments Pc Cn A simulation of a small condenser mic for instruments It has a distinctive high range and is ideal for drum overdubs and for acoustic guitar Whale A simulation of a dynamic mic with clarity and a sense of power Ideal for drum sounds Vo Cn A simulation of a standard studio condenser mic that is ideal for vocals acoustic instruments and narrations Vo Tb A simulation of a vintage tube mic that is ideal for vocals BDr Dy A simulation of a fairly large dynamic mic that is ide
100. moves the time back ward rewind If you hold down the STOP key and press the FF key you will move to the end of the current song If you are already at the end of the song you will move to the beginning of the next song When the Scrub function is on you can press this key to perform Slow Play For details refer to 15 SCRUB p 122 3 STOP key This key ends recording or playback and stops the recorder 4 PLAY key When you press this key tracks whose TRACK STATUS is PLAY will play back For tracks whose TRACK STATUS is REC pressing the REC key and then pressing this key will begin record ing While the recorder is recording or playing the LED will light When the Scrub function is on you can press this key to use Play From or hold down the STOP key and press this key to use Play To For details refer to 15 SCRUB p 122 5 REC key When you press this key the D1600mkII will enter record ready mode the LED will blink In order to enter record ready mode TRACK STATUS must be set to REC for at least one track When you press the PLAY key the LED will light and recording will begin If the foot switch function has been set to PunchI O the foot switch will act as a substitute for the REC key For details refer to 2 SYSTEM USB p 91 TRANSPORT FADER VLC METER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCEN
101. name to each mark you can use them to indicate sections within your song For details refer to Registering a mark p 47 When you use the Disc At Once method to create an audio CD the marks you stored in the song will specify the divi sions between songs tracks JS A maximum of 100 marks can be registered in each song 000000000000000000000000009090 P1 Mark Editing marks MarkNumber E 000 00 000 MarkNamebB6 1 AGE DD HAH 1 L MarkNUMDeF iris 001 100 Select the mark number Beside the mark number the display shows the name of the mark and the registered time location KZ Mark numbers are updated in order of their time location 2 Rename ssssensonnnnnnonnonnnnnnannnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Modify the name of the mark Select the mark whose name you wish to modify press the Rename button to access the dialog box and modify the name You can input a name of up to sixteen characters For details refer to 2 Naming a song gt p 35 Renametark_ MEW MARK Delete a mark amp The Undo function is not available after deleting a mark DeletebMark 081 li Selecta Ce Ce Arevyousure CA a TE On Off Select all marks for deletion Scale On All marks will be subject to deletion The mark number will be displayed as Off The single mark selected by Mark Number will be selected for deletion A Recall iocinncicorrrrrrrrrrrrrns
102. number Set SourceTrack to Clip 1 The number indicates the number of tracks in the clipboard 11 Select the copy destination track num Set DestTrack to track 2 12 Specify the number of times that the data will be copied Set Times to 1 13 Execute the copy Refer to step 6 of Procedure for copying a track within the same song amp The data will be overwritten onto the copy desti nation track 14 Verify that the data was copied correctly Press the TO LOC3 key to play back from the TO location and verify that the copy was performed correctly WA You can use Undo to return to the state before executing the command amp If you are using an external drive the data in the clipboard will be erased when you switch drives Inserting blank data Insert Track The Insert Track command inserts blank space into the specified region IN OUT of the recorded track Track data located after the inserted blank will be moved toward the end of the song e You can insert a blank into not only a single track but into multiple tracks simultaneously This command can be used in ways such as the follow ing e This command can be used to add a phrase in the middle of previously recorded data by inserting blank space and recording your new data Inserting a blank Insert Here s how to insert a blank space into the IN OUT region of track 1 1 Register the IN and OUT times 2 Select the Insert
103. of silence the silences will be erased and the data will be divided into events that only contain actual sound WA Sound below 36 dB will be considered as silence IN OUT Before execution After execution Erase Punch Noise This operation erases the pop noise that occurs between audio events due to recording e g punch in out or track editing Set the IN and OUT times slightly before and after the area where the pops occur IN OUT Before f WN execution w Mey ay 1 Wu WE After A d Al execution pa LA TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO FF IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB 104 Displays the waveform of the track audio This lets you set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track p 100 5 Exec Execute Executes the track editing operation Edit Type Exp Comp Track This operation expands or compresses the track data of the IN OUT range of the expansion compression source track SourceTrack places it in the TO END range of the expansion compression destination track DestTrack and copies it the specified number of times beginning at the TO location 2 When this is executed Exec th
104. panning of each track and play back the song to check it K If you want to enable the scenes you stored go to the SCENE ReadDel tab page and turn SceneRead on 2 Bounce record your song to two tracks Bounce the song to two tracks as described in 5 Combining multiple tracks into two Bounce p 42 K If the song you write to CD contains no silence at the beginning zero time the beginning of the song may drop out when you play back from the CD To avoid this you can insert approximately 0 5 seconds of silence at the beginning of the audio data you mixed down to tracks 1 and 2 For details refer to Inserting blank data Insert Track p 63 3 Insert a disc into the CD R RW drive Use a blank disc or a disc that has not yet been finalized fe Since CD RW discs will not play in some audio CD players we recommend that you use CD R media 4 Select the SONG CD CDR RW tab page Press the S button and in the screen that appears press the OK button Make sure that CD R RW Information shows BlankDisc or song number The free space on the disc is shown below ElankDise C Monitor Hei Freer g Usedgpapb Make sure that the DAO Disc At Once button is off Execute writing Press the WriteCD button and the Obey Copy right Rules message will appear W writeToCDTrack tOnce Al Obey Copyright Rules Speed Ar
105. press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indi cate Completed Press the OK button 8 Verify that the data was processed correctly Press the TO LOC3 key to play back from the TO location and verify that the data was expanded compressed correctly K You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command amp The longer the specified range IN OUT the longer this command will take to process until the Completed display appears Copying an entire track Copying to a virtual track Copy Whole Track This command copies an entire recorded track from beginning to end to a different entire track e You can copy not only one track but multiple tracks simultaneously e The currently selected virtual track can be copied to multiple virtual tracks This command can be used in ways such as the follow ing e The same track can be copied to multiple virtual tracks and used to create multiple takes that are partially dif ferent Procedure for copying an entire track Here s how track 1 can be copied to virtual track a currently selected of track 2 1 Select the Copy Whole command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to CopyWholeTrack sourceTrack 5 001 01 000 GR CopyWholeTrack_ US o rere Import Export Source Track Destlrack DestVTrack 2 Select the copy source tr
106. press this button the Effect Algorithm dialog box will appear Here you can view the structure of the program and check the on off status HALL On It 000 00 000 Cor 30 Cer ie Midas 3b Effect O n O Mirian On Off Refer to Effectlcon and Effect On Off for insert effects p 127 E ROL oa 000 100 Adjust the return level from the master effect to the master bus Higher settings will cause the effect to become more apparent D ReWg lionia L63 CNT R63 Adjust the return balance from the master effect to the master LR bus L and R indicate L left and R right of the master bus Refer to Bypass for the insert effects gt p 127 7 RENAME ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Here you can modify the name of the effect program Select the effect program whose name you wish to modify press the Rename button to access the dialog box and modify the name A name of up to 16 characters can be used For details refer to 2 Naming a song p 35 A After modifying the program name use Store to store it The effect program name you modified will be discarded unless you use Store to store it The effect program whose name or parameters you modified can be stored in user areas u001 u032 The D1600mkII provides 32 user areas for master effects In the StoreEffect dialog box specify the user
107. priate level In each song you can assign 100 named Mark points and four Locate points letting you move immedi ately to the song location where you want to edit e Hard disk drive built in e Hard disk USB drive and USB connector The D1600mkII contains a high capacity 40 GB hard disk drive Of the total capacity 2 GB are allocated as a USB drive that can be connected to your compu ter via the USB connector for sharing of data and the remaining capacity is used as a song drive for hold ing your songs WAV files can be imported or exported making it easy to transfer audio data to or from your computer FAT 16 is supported e Create audio CDs using the CD R RW drive You can use the CD R RW drive to backup restore songs and effect data import export WAV files and create audio CDs You can also insert an audio CD in the drive patch the sound to a mixer channel and record or play it An audio CD can be written in two ways you can write one song at a time using Track At Once or you can insert markers in a single song e g recorded from a live performance and write each section as a track of an audio CD by using the Disc At Once method Basic operation Objects in the LCD screen Parts and their function and their functions Preparations Listening to the demo song e Auto Save function automatically preserves your data at power off The D1600mkII features an Auto Save function that automatica
108. range and positive gain settings will boost it Increasing the center frequency value will raise the center frequency and decreasing this value will lower the center frequency 3 Adjust the EQ while the song plays back Step 4 Mastering 4 When you have finished making adjustments press the STOP key 27 28 WE ala E Here s how you can apply master effects to the desired track channels The D1600mkII contains two master effects letting you apply two differ ent effects simultaneously This means that you can simulate complex acoustic spaces that could not be created by a single effect To regulate the amount of the master effects adjust the send and return controls In this example we ll apply the master effects ReverbHall and Reverb Room and adjust the depth of the effects by adjusting the send level from each mixer channel the return level and the return balance Select master 1 1 Press the MASTER EFFECT AUX key to access the MASTER EFFECT AUX MstEff1 tab page Esrecuuraser 5 000 00 000 LEO arrecife RetLey Ej RetBal CH Mote ff LaMste tte tradi RE ttSnd2 RAusSend Finale tt 2 Press EffectNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select a master Effect Program List p 166 effect For this example select M001 ReverbHall Master effect 1 send and return settings 1 In the MASTER EFFECT AUX MstEff1 tab page adjust the RetLev return level
109. sequencer causing the D1600mkII mixer settings to change Basic operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer CO w 90 1 COUNTER 000000000000000000000000009090 Counter Counter display The counter located in the upper right of each page shows the current location of the recorder SelectTimeDisp H OD 881 HEWSONG E Tempo Manu 120 04 04 Metrod Selong Edo gph aPlay AERA L Select TIMEDISD Ty PO vvcssisccivnicssniscstiiiesscduadarnnsesencecaneiss This switches the counter display When you press the 14 button at the left of the counter the Select Time Disp Type dialog box will appear Select the desired type of display and press the OK button Select Timebisp Type 5 ex q HHH DOE 5 GaAp D tree MSF Free Time __ MBT The current location will be shown in measures from the beginning of the song From the left the numbers indicate the Measure Beat and Tick 1 96 beat __ MSM The current location will be shown as an absolute time from the beginning of the song From the left the numbers are Minutes Seconds Milli seconds 1 1000 second __F MSF The current location will be displayed as the absolute time and the number of frames from the beginning
110. song ends press the STOP key to stop playback a Ae else l l EII KK nfr Y Weil H Sen HA W Gey Quick Start The Quick Start section consists of the following four steps We ll begin our explanation by telling how to connect your equipment and take you all the way through to the final step of writing your per formance to CD R Please take some time to work through this Quick Start so that you can become familiar with the process of recording on the D1600mkI Step 1 Quick Recording Connect your guitar record your performance on a track and then play it back Step 2 Overdubbing While listening to the performance you recorded record an additional guitar performance We ll also explain how you can record a keyboard in stereo or record vocals using the virtual tracks E y Step 3 Mixdown Apply effects to each track and adjust the volume and EQ Then use the master effect to apply finishing touches to the entire song D Step 4 Mastering Q Create a two track master from the song you mixed down in Step 3 Then 5 write this stereo master track to CD R to create your own original CD 5 Ki Q a Step 1 Quick Recording A AEREA eee ee Connection diagram p 10 1 Make connections 1 Turn the top panel TRIM knob to set the INPUT 8 input level to the minimum position G 2 Connect your guitar to the front panel GUITAR IN jack 3 jo 3 Connect your headphones to the front panel PHONES
111. the CD Write to new CD media Disc Full _ Failed while writing to the disk drive In the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page execute CheckDrive S If the message still appears delete that song If the message still appears even after you have done so re format the drive with the Quick button turned off amp The hard disk drive CheckDrive S Full and Format operations require a substantial length of time for completion Disk Busy The speed at which data can be read from the drive may be decreased if punch in out recording or track editing results in numerous small fragments of data In the TRACK EditTrk tab page execute OptimizeTrack with Mode set to Normal If an error message still appears even after you execute OptimizeTrack execute CheckDrive MS Ultra low frequency sound in a studio etc may cause Disk Busy messages to occur In this case you can avoid the problem by relocating the D1600mkII before you execute Check Drive MS If Disk Busy appears during playback execute CheckDrive with CurSong selected If Disk Busy appears during recording select Cur Song Remain Alternatively you could select Full if you don t mind waiting a long time for execution Disk Repaired 1 Disk Repairedl1 indicates that the hard disk inspection found errors in the drive but was able to fix the errors T
112. the LFO speed Depth Depth al 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Fdback Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount Trim EQ Trim sesser 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 415 Sets the gain of High EQ Mode Output Mode Normal Invert Selects the output mode for the chorus flanger Mix Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Output Mode When this is set to Invert the phase will be inverted for the right channel of the chorus flanger to create a simulated stereo effect pro ducing a more spacious feeling Treml Tremolo LFO LFO Waveform TRI SIN Vintage Selects LFO Waveform Up Down Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed Depth De 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Phaser LFO LFO Waveform vce TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed Manual Manual cscsscsssesseeeseeeees 0 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Depth TEE 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Reso RESONANCE seen 100 100 Set
113. the feedback amount for the right channel Sets the damping amount in the high range Sets the damping amount in the low range Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds 10 DL3 St Multitap Delay Stereo Multitap Delay The left and right Multitap Delays have two taps respectively Changing the routing of feedback and tap output allows you to create various patterns of complex effect sounds Mode Mode Normal X Fback Switches the left and right delay routing X Panl X Pan2 T1Time Tap1 Time msec 0 680 Sets the Tapl delay time T2Time Tap2 Time msec 0 680 Sets the Tap2 delay time T1Lvl Tap1 Level aa 0 100 Sets the Tap1 output level Fdback Feedback 100 100 HiDamp High Damp 0 100 LoDamp Low Damp 0 100 Spread Spread ee 100 100 Mix WMetifnd Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Mode Sets the Tap2 feedback amount Sets the damping amount in the high range Sets the damping amount in the low range Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds The left right panning of the delay can be modified by changing the connections of the left and right delay Be aware that different sounds must be input to the left and right channels in order for this para
114. the gate input Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds With Envelope Select L R Mix the left and right channel sig nal mixture will trigger the gate on off When L Only or R Only is selected the gate is controlled by either of the channel sig nals Polarity This parameter reverses the Gate on off operation With a negative value the gate is closed when the input signal level exceeds the Threshold Attack Release The Attack and Release parameters set the Gate attack time and release time Delay Time This parameter sets the delay time of the Gate input If the sound has a very fast attack increase the delay time so that the signal will be input after the Gate is opened 25 DY5 St Exciter Enhancer Stereo Exciter Enhancer This effect is a combination of the Exciter which adds a punch to the sound and the Enhancer which adds spread and presence Blend Exciter Blend 100 100 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Empha Emphatic Point 0 140 Sets the frequency to be emphasized LDly Enhancer Dly L msec 0 0 50 0 Sets the delay time for the Enhancer left channel R Dly Enhancer Div R msec 0 0 50 0 Sets the delay time for the Enhancer right channel Depth Enhancer Depth 0 100 Sets the determines to what degree th
115. the track editing operation Edit Type Fade Track This operation fades in or fades out the track data in the IN OUT range of the fade in destination track DestTrack When this operation is executed the audio data in the IN OUT range will be smoothly faded to the level of the OUT time location amp When this is executed Exec the fade in fade out destination track will be overwritten IN OUT IN OUT DestTrack II OO OI 000 Te 2 Destfrack mmm 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the track to be edited E In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available 3 Exec Execute oia ao Execute the track editing operation This displays the audio data of the track as a waveform Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track gt p 100 Select the fader curve for the fade in or fade out Select adeMode ep d COP A S15 E Cancel CoC al CF ik COE Me SelectFadeM Ode sssssnssannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnannn A F A type This curve is ideal for conventional fade in B type This curve is ideal for creating cross fades where two tracks are faded in out at the identical time loca tion C type This curve inverts the A curve lengthening the sound that is heard D type Fade out using the A type curve E type Fade out using the B type curve F type Fade out u
116. them to MUTE LED dark This will silence the tracks that are not being recorded or played 4 Adjust the recording level of the input device and record Refer to 1 Analog inputs and 1 Adjust the recording level and record p 36 39 amp In the RECORD RecMode tab page set Select Rec Mode to Input 4 Re record partof a performance Punch in out If you make a mistake during part of your recorded performance or are not completely satisfied with your performance you can re record just the unsatisfactory portion without having to record from the beginning of the song Punch in is when you switch the song from playback to record and punch out is when you switch the song from record back into playback Manual punch in out Manual punch in out is when you manually switch between punch in and punch out On the D1600mkI manual punch in out can be per formed by pressing the REC key or a PS 1 foot switch separately sold option during playback to begin record ing and pressing the REC key PLAY key or foot switch to end recording 1 Connect the input device and adjust the recording level Refer to 1 Analog inputs and 1 Adjust the record ing level and record p 36 39 2 Make monitor output settings Access the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page Auto punch in out Auto punch in out is when punch in and punch out occur automatically
117. to select the type of erasure If this button is turned on the CD RW disc will be erased at high speed Normally you will select this method If this button is turned off the CD RW disc will be erased completely Use this method if the disc is not recognized even after being erased with the Quick button turned on Press the Yes button to begin erasing the disc The display will indicate Completed when the erasure is finished Press the Yes button E You can also erase data from a CD RW in the SONG CD CDR RW tab page 4 Using the drive capacity efficiently You can use the following three operations or techniques to make efficient use of the D1600mkII s drive capacity e Execute the Optimize Track operation e Erase the Undo data e Share audio data Executing the Optimize Track command Here are three examples of executing the Optimize Track operation As you will see there are some situations in which this operation will recover additional drive capacity and other situations in which it will not Read this section and execute the Optimize Track operation if it will be useful in your situation MS There is no need for you to execute this Optimize Track operation frequently Execute it if the Disk Busy message appears or if you want to recover hard disk space after you have completed a song Example 1 You recorded an intro solo and ending on a track When you record an intro s
118. will be written and automatically finalized 2 Recording to a master tape 1 Check the completed song Use the faders and knobs to adjust the volume and pan etc of each track and play back the song to check it 2 Connect the D1600mkII to your external recording device Connect your MD or DAT to the S P DIF OUT jack or to the MASTER OUTPUT jacks 3 Record on your external recording device Play back the song on the D1600mkIl and adjust the recording level on your external recorder Start recording on your external recorder and play back the D1600mkII MS By using the Program Play function you can consecutively play back multiple songs in the desired order For details refer to 2 Program play p 45 3 Using the sub inputs You can use any of the analog inputs INPUT 1 INPUT 8 GUITAR IN as a sub input to send the audio directly to the master bus e If you have synchronized a sequencer to the completed song you can use this to input the sequenced sounds via the sub inputs e You can use this to add the return audio from an exter nal effect processor connected to the AUX OUT jack 1 Connect the external audio source to the analog inputs Input the external source to INPUT 1 INPUT 8 GUITAR IN 2 Make sub input settings Select the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page Chi Ch2 Ch3 Chd Ch5iCh6 Chr Cher bp LILI Gs Press the SubIn button to access the sub
119. 0000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000 EE c i a Es 25 ge F T H e D O c O 9 de d O O 5 6 y a LCD screen 4 CHANNEL faders Chl 16 The D1600mkII uses a TouchView system based on a These faders adjust the recording playback volume touch panel screen By pressing objects that are of each channel shown in the LCD screen you can select pages tabs WA These settings can be paired and registered in a and parameters and set their values scene Also displayed are the volume level meters time locations locate during recording or playback and 5 MASTER fader various other parameters This adjusts the volume of all channels During bounce recording this sets the recording level of the z TRACK STATUS keys bounce destination track T These keys are used to put each track into playback o record or to mute silence status Each time you 6 TRANSPORT keys press a key the track setting will alternate REC key RHSL key PLAY key STOP key e Green PLAY REW key FF key e Orange INPUT These are used to perform recording operations such e Red REC as playback and record e D
120. 1 67 Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location Mixdown Using Using the effects mixer y MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song the system settings editing 68 5 Select the swap destination virtual track Set DestV Track to virtual track b 6 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indi cate Completed Press the OK button 7 In the TRACK Vtr1 8 tab page select virtual track b for track 1 8 Verify that the data was exchanged correctly Play back from the beginning of the song and verify that the data was exchanged correctly You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command In this case you must return track 1 to virtual track Ml yy a Fading in fading out Fade Track This command fades in or fades out the specified region IN OUT of recorded track data By using fade in and fade out in conjunction with each other you can create cross fades e You can fade in or fade out the IN OUT region e Not only a single track but multiple tracks of data can be faded in or out simultaneously Procedure for fading in Here s how to fade in the IN OUT region of track 1 1 Register the IN and
121. 1 3 130 HipHop 7 2 90 ISamba1 4 95 E Shuff 2 5 130 HipHop 1 3 90 F Samba1 1 95 E Shuff 3 4 130 HipHop 2 5 90 E Sambat 3 95 HalfTime 8 150 HipHop 3 2 90 Samba2 4 111 I HalfTime 5 150 F HipHop 1 1 90 l Samba2 4 111 F HalfTime 1 150 F HipHop 2 1 90 F Samba2 1 111 E HalfTime 6 150 FJHipHop 3 2 90 E JSamba2 5 111 E HipHop 1 4 90 E HipHop 2 7 90 168 Demo Song List Let The Sister Dance The song is written by Mumbo Jumbo Band 1997 Mumbo Jumbo Band all rights reserved Index Numerics 16 bit recording playback 35 109 24 bit recording playback 35 109 A Adjusts the volume CHANNEL fader 3 134 MASTER fader 3 134 MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob 5 PHONES LEVEL knob 5 Analog EE 36 48 124 Audio CD LIVE recording ios 59 Ee 161 RECO AA 161 Wriitea SONG isicnicimscie sisi 02 00 Audio data AA aaa 84 Auto punch in out 41 119 B Baca 93 Effect user data 77 94 SE 75 93 94 Bass Multiscan oian N 145 Bink ASC aaa 33 Block diagram ormsins 165 Boumnce recordimg cee 31 42 99 Bypass Finale ctas asas 130 Ee d GE 127 Master effect ias 129 C CD eet 161 E EE 161 RECO 161 Removing a disc 161 CD Monto rra ee 111 161 CD R LIE TEC Earl 59 VEO A SON idea 32 98 CODER RW nacio 75 Free me 111 CD R RW dree 160 CD RW Erasing the data 83 97 111 Check Sa 97 Compatibili ss waters senor ied west 81 COMPU srt as
122. 1 in 1 out x 4 mono in mono out x 4 Exciter Comp or Limiter P4EQ could be applied to individual recorded tracks to adjust the dynamics or P4EQ Cho Fln could be applied to add modulation 1 in 1 out x 8 mono in mono out x 8 Comp Limiter Gate or Expander could be applied to individual recorded tracks to adjust the dynamics or Chorus Phaser or Delay could be applied Applying the insert effects while you record analog rhythm only While you record effects can be applied to the input from an instrument connected to the INPUT 1 INPUT 8 GUITAR IN analog inputs or to the built in rhythm sound that is input to a mixer channel so that the sound processed by the effect is recorded Ki You can also apply effects to the sound of an audio CD played back in the CD R RW drive As an example here s how to connect a guitar to the INPUT 8 GUITAR IN jack apply effects and record the sound on track 8 1 Make connections and select the track for record ing Refer to Connect a guitar to the GUITAR IN jack and assign it to mixer channel 8 p 36 2 Access the INSERT EFFECT InsAsn tab page assign EJ in ISL 000 00 000 al SelectEffType InsertTo Int VW Off In2 Vi Org Le tint out Ei Ina 3 k tt 7 Int InsAsn H InsEtf E Insette K InsEff3H Insta feeb 3 Press the Assign button and select Input In 4 Press the SelectEffType m button and select the effect type In t
123. 100 Using effects 1 Overview of the effects On the D1600mkII you can use up to eight insert effects that can be inserted into an analog input or mixer chan nel two master effects that can be applied to the send from each channel and a final effect that can be applied to master LR as the last stage Each of these effects are independent meaning that you can use a maximum of eleven effect programs simultaneously e Effect algorithms total of 98 e Effect programs RH Presets 192 User 192 Insert effects 1000 1001 1128 U001 U128 Master effects M000 M001 M032 u001 u032 Final effects F000 FO01 F032 u033 u064 Preset effects contain effect programs created by profes sional musicians and studio engineers User effects can store your own effect programs that you created by editing a preset effect K It is not possible to rewrite a preset effect program 2 Insert effects o 7 The insert effects can be inserted into an analog input or mixer channel to apply an effect to the analog input signal or playback track Effects can also be applied to a built in rhythm sound that is input to a mixer channel There are four types of insert effects as described below The available effect programs will depend on the effect type you select NS The effect type selection is made in INSERT EF FECT InsAsn tab page SelectEffType 1 in 2 outx 2 These are mono in stereo out or mono out effect cha
124. 100 Sets the degree of distortion Treble Treble 15 0 15 0 Sets the high frequency tone Level Level scans 0 100 Sets the output level Drive This effect models a compact effect unit or amp head Type DriveType rescata 1 Drive type Drive Drivetz am 1 100 Depth of distortion Level Level rad ose 0 100 Output level Tube TubeType SS 1 99 Burn Vacuum tube characteristics Bias TubeBias naaa 0 100 Vacuum tube bias level 1 TubeOD Classic FatDist Metal Seattle BigFuzz TopBst US HIG B Stack Direct TubeType This parameter lets you vary the way in which the sound is distorted by vacuum tubes It simulates the way that distortion is influenced by the amplitude number of vacuum tubes and their age As you increase the value of this parameter non linear distortion will increase and the overtone structure will change It is best to raise the Drive value and then adjust the Tube value TubeBias This parameter adjusts the bias point of the vacuum tubes that dis tort the sound In conjunction with the Tube parameter this will vary the overtone structure The Bias parameter will have a greater effect when the Tube setting is high NR Noise Reduction This effect suppresses noise TOPS A T PES e esse zucnisinndess 40 0 1 0 Sets the level at which the effect begins to apply NR2 Noise Reduction2 This effect reduces the noise It is optimized specifically for use in a pre amp
125. 2out x 2 Insert FX Linlout x 8 Effect Control Master FX Final FX Final FX LinLout x 4 150 Phaser LFO LFO Waveform wc TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform S peed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed Manual Manual daa 0 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Depth Depth a 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Reso Resonance 100 100 Sets the resonance amount Mix Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry Sets the phaser effect balance 1 99 Wet Trml Tremolo LFO LFO Waveform scree TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Vintage Up Down Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave S peed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Depth Depth sima 0 100 Mt Dly Multitap Delay form is changed Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation T1Time Tap1 Time msec 0 680 Sets the Tap1 delay time T2Time Tap2 Time msec 0 680 Sets the Tap2 delay time T1Lvl Tapa 0 100 Sets the Tap1 output level Fdback Feedback 100 100 Sets the Tap2 feedback amount HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the effect balance of the multi tap Reverb Mono Reverb Time Reverb Time eech 0 1 10 0 HiDamp High Damp 0 100 delay S
126. 3 16H EditTrk E Import E Export ss SourceTrack Destlrack DestVTrack 2 Select the swap source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 3 Select the swap destination track number Set DestTrack to track 2 4 Select the swap destination virtual track Set DestV Track to virtual track a 5 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 6 Verify that the data was exchanged correctly Play back from the beginning of the song and verify that the data was exchanged correctly MS You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command Procedure for exchanging with a virtual track Here s how currently selected virtual track a of track 1 can be exchanged with virtual track b of track 1 1 Verify the copy destination In the TRACK Vtr1 8 tab page make sure that track 1 virtual track b is the track that you wish to exchange After you verify this you must return the Ml yy setting to a 2 Select the Swap Whole command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to SwapWholeTrack 3 Select the swap source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 4 Select the swap destination track number Set DestTrack to track
127. 6 39 Make monitor output settings Refer to Manual punch in out step 2 Specify the pre roll the length of playback that will occur before the recording start location In the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page press the Rol Time button to access the SetRoll Time dialog box Set PreRoll to the desired length of playback before the beginning of recording Set PostRoll to the desired length of playback after the end of recording Set Unit to the desired unit of pre post roll time When you have finished making settings press the OK button to return to the previous page Turn on the auto punch in out function In the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page press the AutoPunch button to turn it On The AUTO PUNCH key will light Begin recording When you press the REC key the location will move back from the specified record start time by the length of the pre roll time specified by PreRoll and the D1600mkII will enter record ready mode LED blinking When you press the PLAY key playback will begin The track will play back during the pre roll time and will switch to recording at the specified point IN The REC LED will light When the specified end of recording is reached recording will end The REC LED will blink Press the STOP key to stop fe After the post roll time has elapsed the D1600mkII will stop and return to the
128. ASTER EFFECT AUX MstEff1 or MstEff2 tab page Esrecuumaser 5 000 00 000 O Est JE Bell eu ZE RetBal 0 Mei HHG Heen di ge ttond2 D vucend Finale tt 2 Select an effect program Select EffectNumber and rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired effect program 3 Set the return level from the master effect to the master LR and set the return balance For this example set RetLev return level to 100 and set RetBal return balance to CNT 4 Adjust the send levels Adjustments for Master Effect 1 are made in the EffSnd1 tab page and for Master Effect 2 in the EffSnd2 tab page Senai 043l 001 01 000 Mste ttl fMstette A Select the appropriate Send icon knob and rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the send amount Play back to hear the output from master LR and audition the resulting effect Adjust the return level and send level so that CLP does not appear in the master effect level meter 95 Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 56 A Final effect 060000000000009090 One stereo in stereo out effect is provided as the final effect It applies to the master LR output diagram on preceding page The final effect is u
129. ATUS key setting Set the TRACK STATUS key to INPUT for the track you are using 1 Press the front panel TRACK STATUS key of track 8 to select the INPUT setting LED lit orange Step 4 Mastering 15 16 Pre fader level display 2 Press the METER TRACK VIEW key From the screen that appears press the P button to open the dialog box Select DisplayMode Cancel Fei O TrkVieui 2 FE OT rkViews 16 CT rk view 1 16 3 From the Select DisplayMode dialog box press the PreFaderLev radio button and press the OK button the pre fader screen will appear EH PostFdr FkHold 5 07 03 52 OO The ch 8 level meter will move when you play your guitar 4 While watching the level meter adjust the INPUT 8 TRIM knob so that the level meter goes as high as possible without reaching CLP when you play your guitar most loudly Use the TRIM knob to set the input level so that the peak indicator the LED near the TRIM knob lights when the volume is loudest 7 Check the sound Make settings so that you can hear the sound through your headphones or monitor speakers 1 Raise the front panel CHANNEL 8 fader to unity gain 0 dB 2 Press the SOLO MONITOR key to access the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page 3 Press the MasterLR button to select EEMI 4 While you play your guitar gradually raise the MASTER fader You will hear the sound of the guit
130. Amplifier Type SS EL84 6L6 MicSim Mic Simulator Refer to p 147 Decima Decimator LPF eege Off On Fs Sampling Frequency Hz 1 0k 44 1k Bit Besolupon 4 24 HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Level Output Level sesser 0 100 Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the output level of the compressor Sets the signal compression ratio Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Sets the attack time Sets the release time Sets the limiter output gain Selects the type of guitar amplifier Selects whether the harmonic noise caused by a decrease in sampling fre quency is generated Sets the sampling frequency Sets the data bit length Sets the ratio at which the high range is cut Sets the decimator output level ODHIG OverDrive HighGain Mode Drive Mode E OD Overdrive HiG Hi Gain Drive Drive esco 1 100 Level Output Level serrr 0 50 LoFc Low Cutoff Hz 20Hz 1 0k LoG Gamble 18 18 Md1Fc Mid1 Cutoff Hz ERS RTE TNT eRe THT en 300Hz 10 0k MAIO Ae 0 5 10 0 Md1G Gain dB Dase 18 18 Md2Fc Mid2 Cutoff Hz a 500Hz 20 0k 20 A 0 5 10 0 Md2G Gain OB Discute 18 18 ChFI1 Chorus Flanger1 DTime Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0 LFO LFO Wave maria TRI SIN S peed Frequency HZ 0 02 20 0 Depth Depth 0 100 Fdback Feedback 100 100 MI
131. CUE aria 000 100 Sets the volume at which each channel cue signal is sent to the monitor output AU IN tias On Off For mixer channels whose TRACK STATUS is REC this specifies whether the audio sent to the monitor out put will be the external input that is assigned in the Input tab page or the sound from the playback track On For mixer channels whose TRACK STA TUS is REC you will hear the sound of the track during playback and the sound of the external input while recording or stopped Off For mixer channels whose TRACK STATUS is REC you will always hear the sound of the external input 22 METER TRACK VIEW Here you can view the pre fader level meter and post fader level meter You can also use the track view display to check whether a track contains audio events 1 Select DisplayMode PreFaderLev PostFaderLev TrkView 1 8 TrkView9 16 TrkView1 16 Select the signals that you wish to display Press the I button to access the dialog box and make a selection Press the OK button to activate your selec tion or press the Cancel button to cancel Select DisplayMode Cancel E C Trkviewi 8 C TrkYiewl 1 O TrkViem9 16 PreFaderLev Display the pre fader level of each mixer channel PostFaderLev Display the post fader level of each mixer channel TrkView1 8 TrkView9 16 TrkView1 16 The selected range of tracks will be displayed The curren
132. Category Guitar mult 39 GT1 Guitar Multil Dist NR Cho Fl S Dly 40 GT2 Guitar Multi2 Wah Dist NR Delay 41 GT3 Guitar Multi3 Dist NR AmpSim CabRes Delay 42 GT4 Guitar Multi4 Comp P4EQ AmpSim Cho Fl S Dly 43 GT5 Guitar Multi5 Wah Comp P4EQ Cho FI S Dly 44 GT6 Guitar Multi6 Comp P4EQ Pitch Delay AS1 AS3 Category Guitar amp simulator 45 AS1 Amp Simulatorl NR AmpSim CabRes Cho Fl S Dly 46 AS2 Amp Simulator2 NR AmpSim CabRes Tremi Delay 47 AS3 Amp Simulator3 NR AmpSim CabRes Phaser Delay PA1 Category Pre amp simulator 48 PA1 Pre Amp Simulator Drive NR2 Tone Cabinet EB1 EB3 Category Bass mult 49 EB1 Bass Multil CompT Exctr P4EQ Cho Fl S DLY 50 EB2 Bass Multi2 Dist NR Filter Delay 51 EB3 Bass Mult3 Comp P4EQ Gate MS1 Category Mic multi 52 MS1 Mic Multi CabRes MicSim Comp VO1 VO2 Category Vocal multi 53 VO 1 Vocal Multil Comp Exctr Pitch S Dly 54 VO2 Vocal Multi2 NR DeEss P4EQ Cho FI S Dly Effects within multi effect programs GT1 VO2 and their parameters Here are explanations of the parameters of each effect in the multi effect chains listed above Dist Distortion This effect distorts the input sound Type DriveType Tube Crunch Scream Selects the drive type HotBox Higain Valve Crush Scoop Fuzz Drive Drive oscanasstasisaa 1
133. Cue Level function is provided so that you can adjust the monitoring volume and pan for your convenience while you record independently of the mas ter LR volume 1 Select cue as the monitoring source In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page turn On the Cue button WA If Solo is selected solo will be given priority Defeat Solo before you make your selection 49 Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location y MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythn tempo Song Track Mixdown Using the system settings editing editing effects 50 2 Adjust the cue level Press the Level button to access the cue level adjustment screen Select the icons for each channel and rotate the VALUE dial to adjust the volume level and pan displayed in the upper left 6 Solo setings 7 Only the signals whose Solo button is On will be sent to the monitor bus Use this function when you wish to hear a specific channel out of numerous sources or to audition the send audio etc The solo signal is output from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and the PHONES jack Select the signal for soloing 1 Select the signal for soloing and turn Solo On Access the SOLO MONITOR Solo tab page Press the desired Solo button s to turn Solo On for that signal it will be highlighted If even one selection is b
134. D with no gap between tracks An audio CD created using Disc At Once can also be used as a master CD for pressing amp When you write a disc using Disc At Once it will be finalized automatically you will not be able to add any further songs 1 Check the song you want to record Use the faders and knobs to adjust the volume and pan etc of each track and play back the song to check it 2 Register a mark at each time location where you want to create a track division p 46 3 Select the SONG CD CDR RW tab page ElankDise C Monitor Hei Freer 9 5 Usedgpapb Turn on the DAO Disc At Once button 4 Insert a disc into the CD R RW drive You must use a blank disc 5 In the SONG CD CDR RW tab page press the Lorn button In the screen that appears press the OK button Make sure that the CD R RW Information field shows BlankDisc Basic operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 59 60 6 Execute writing Press the WriteCD button and the Obey Copy right Rules message will appear Carefully read the COPYRIGHT WARNING section of the manual gt p iii If you accept the terms select the writing speed and press the Yes button The disc
135. D1600mkII Digital Recording Studio Owner s Manual PHANTOM PHANTOM PHANTOM PHANTOM TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM O O O O iv 20 O 30 O 4 O 4 TRIM TRIM TRIM TRIM MONITOR 50 O 6u Q a QO 8 O 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 super Q SYSTEM SONG Geet KORG TEMPO Oo HDD CD KlTouchView RHYTHM 16000841 JEMS Digital 600r Studio E x FE TRACK STATUS SOLO MONITOR PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN GOGO O OO 66 O66 HO 66666 METER L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R TRACK VIEW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J LJ OJ LL OoJ LL Ou OA OAU L i L JI CURSOR 16 MASTER 2 6 D H 0 0 0 1 ke 2 A REW FF En ae a KR T HIE _ ba L 1 SCRUB ON a K 0 R P Graphical User Interface CD RW FEMS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS e Read these instructions e Keep these instructions e Heed all warnings e Follow all instructions e Do not use this apparatus near water e Mains powered apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects
136. Delete button A message will ask you Are YouSure Press the OK button to delete the tempo map event you selected in step 1 By turning the SelectAll but ton on highlighted you can delete all tempo map events except for tempo map event 001 amp You cannot Undo this operation If you want to modify the tempo map event press the Edit button to open the dialog box Edit the parameters as desired Tempo track The tempo track records MIDI clock data from an external device such as a MIDI sequencer or records tap tempo Recording MIDI clock data from an external MIDI sequencer and using it as the tempo track Here s how MIDI clock tempo data from an external MIDI sequencer can be recorded on the tempo track Use this when you wish to synchronize the D1600mkII song with song data created on a MIDI sequencer in which the tempo changes continuously 1 Specify the time signature of the song If the time signature of the MIDI sequencer song data changes during the song you should create tempo maps at the locations where the time signature changes Tempo map amp If the time signature changes during the song it will be detected as an incorrect tempo unless you have created a tempo map that matches the changes in time signature There is no need to specify the tempo 2 Connect the MIDI OUT of your MIDI sequencer to the MIDI IN connector of the D1600mkII 3 Make settings on yo
137. E MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR FX AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB pa LA Ul 136 Example Algorithm number Category number Algorithm name 1 RV1 Reverb Hall Parameter name shown on screen Range of parameter Explanation parameter name Time Reverb Time eech 01 10 0s Sets the reverberation time URI Parameters marked by an in front of the screen parameter name can be controlled by an external device such as an expression pedal p 91 Device Insert Effect 2in2outx2 Master Effect Final Effect These algorithms can be selected for an insert effect if 2in2outx2 is selected for SelectEffType They can also be selected for a master effect or a final effect amp When these effects are used as an insert effect or final effect they are stereo in stereo out However when these effects are used as a master effect they are mono in stereo out Reverb RV1 RV7 Category Reverb type effects 1 RV1 Reverb Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of mid size concert halls or ensemble halls 2 RV2 Smooth Hall This hall type reverb simulates the reverberation of larger halls and stadiums and creates a smooth release 3 RV3 Reverb Wet Plate This plate reverb simulates warm dense reverberation 4 RV4 Reverb Dry Plate This plate reverb simulates dry light reverberation
138. EE 9 Taek ine LEE 9 e Selecta a tab pagesi oa a A 9 3 Selecting and setting a parameter cee 9 Prepara ON 10 t Connec hon S erea ious 10 2 Turning the power on off esssssesssesesesererseseresess 11 Listening to the demo SONG EN 12 Quick Start 19 Step 1 Quick Recording a 13 1 Make connechon sida 13 Ze UN on he DOWN 13 P Create a MEW SONG ia pia EA 14 A Ed de te E E tase aos E act 14 5 Assign the input to a mixer channel 15 O ajuste TEVE E 15 7 NCCK ENS EE 16 EE 16 Ds TNO A te upistieas 18 Step 2 OVerUDDING ME 19 b Record A CULAR ae 19 2 R cord a Key DOAT AA temo 20 3 Record vocals on virtual tracks un 22 4 Make insert effect senos ninia 24 SID 3 MIXGOWN iii 26 L Apply CHECIS cenna 26 2 APP EQ eguazen EE SE 3 Apply e 28 Step 4 Mastering asia 30 1 Apply an effect to the entire somg 30 2 Create the master Tack das 31 3 Write your song to a CDi bicis 32 Basic operati0N 99 Creating selecting a song 35 Ll Creating a new song sas 35 Ze AN AMINE a SON Poda aaa 35 3 Selecting another SOME inicias 36 Assign audio inputs to the mixer EN 36 b Analog e DUS Ao 36 Zo Digital UU dada 38 2 Usine the KEE 39 Recording ici 39 1 Adjust the recording level and record 39 2 Recording on virtual tracks ue 40 3 Playback while recording addition tracks ON CRO UDS seers ON ens 40 4 Re record part of a performance Punch in out 40 5 Combining multiple tracks into two B
139. EditSong Song eos 109 P3 PrgPlay Program playback of songs coccccoonons 110 P4CDR RW Creating and playing CD R RW discs 110 TOR Ellas 112 Ta MARK cia ines 113 PiMark Editing Marks osea 113 0 ENE eli 113 P1 ReadDel Scene playback on off and editing 113 P2 MixView Pan fader scene dieplay 114 9 TEMPO RHYTHM an 115 P1SetUp Tempo and rhythm settings cooconcco o 115 P2 TmpMap Editing the tempo map 116 P3 TmpTrk Create a tempo track eee 117 10 IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 END LOC4 118 Locate Ee 118 11 AUTO PUNCH geet dee anane 119 P1 AtPunch Settings for auto punch in out EEN 119 12 COOP daa 120 P1 Loop Loop playback recording settings 120 vi TS UNDO E 120 14 TRIGGER a msc 121 P1 Trigger Settings to start trigger recording 121 15 SCRUB ciar 122 TO ENTER iia 122 17 INRBUTTUNER e 123 P1 Ch1 8 Select the inputs for mixer channels 1 8 123 P2 Ch9 16 Select the inputs for mixer channels 9 16 124 P3 InEq14 EQ settings for inputs ln 124 P4 InEq5 8 EQ settings for inputs DH 124 Po Turner Unid 124 EE 125 P1 Eq1 4 EQ settings for mixer channels 1 4 125 P2 Eq5 8 EQ settings for mixer channels 5 8 125 P3 Eq9 12 EQ settings for mixer channels 9 12 125 P4 Eq13 16 EQ settings for mixer channels 13 16 125 P5 Phase Phase settings for mixer channels 125 19 INSERT EFFECT osasuna teca 126 P1 InsAsn Insert effect insertion l
140. IN and OUT locations Set IN at a point slightly ahead of where the Disk Busy messages begin appearing and OUT to a point at which these messages no longer appear 2 Select the Optimize command In the TRACK EditTIrk tab page set EditType to OptimizeTrack bestTrack 2J0071 01 000 KE OptimizeTrack__ 1 KEE Edit Tek US Enport DestTrack 3 Select the track number that you want to optimize Find the track where you suspect that the data is frag mented here we will assume that track 1 is the prob lem and specify DestTrack as track 1 4 Execute the operation Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute the operation When the operation is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 5 Check the results Press the IN LOC1 key and play back from the IN location If playback occurs correctly without the Disk Busy message appearing the optimization was successful MS You can use Undo to return to the state prior to execution amp This operation will require a longer time for comple tion in proportion to the length of the specified region IN OUT Erasing audio events from silent areas Here s how you can erase audio events from silent areas of the IN OUT region of track 1 These areas will be come blank 1 Store the IN and OUT locations Set IN
141. INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD REDEE Mesa Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END OAI RHYTHM CD USB 92 CC Control Change 000 119 MIDI control change messages can be used to control the effect Connect the MIDI OUT of your external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector on the D1600mkII and transmit the selected MIDI control change message from the external MIDI device to control the effect ASN CtrICHGASSIQN sccscsseeeessneeeas ExpO ff InsEff1 4 Select the insertion effect that will be controlled The insertion effect that you select here will be controlled by the selected Device ExpOff The insertion effect will not be controlled InsEff1 InsEff2 InsEff3 InsEff4 Insertion effect 1 2 3 or 4 will be controlled respectively A If the effect program that you are using does not pro vide control capability it cannot be controlled Fan CON WO iris O n Rec amp PlayO ff O ff Control the operation of the internal fan On The fan will operate constantly Rec amp PlayOff The fan will stop during recording and playback Off The fan will stop K If the internal temperature rises the fan will begin operating automatically even if this setting is Off When the temperature falls to an acceptable level the fan will stop automatically P2 MIDI MIDI settings CG w 001 01 TER ahs
142. In 2Tr 16Tr 2Tr Select the type of bounce recording 14 Tr 2In 2Tr Select this when recording 14 tracks of playback 2 inputs onto two tracks The input sound selected in the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page and Ch9 16 tab page will be valid for the channel s whose TRACK STATUS key is set to REC LED lit red and will be recorded together with the other playback tracks 16Tr 2Tr Select this when recording 16 tracks of play back onto two tracks The track playback will be valid for the channel s whose TRACK STATUS key is set to REC LED lit red and will be recorded together with the other playback tracks amp Be aware that if Rhythm is set to On during bounce recording the rhythm will also be recorded together with the other sounds 2 RecordVirtualTrack mmmmococccoroncororonos Current a h Select the recording destination virtual track Select the virtual track of the recording track selected by the TRACK STATUS key on which bounce recording will occur By selecting a virtual track a h other than Cur rent you can combine tracks 1 16 into two tracks with out erasing any of the tracks 1 16 Current The currently selected track a h The specified virtual track However if the same virtual track is selected both here and for TRACK Vtr1 8 or Vtr9 16 tab page the result will be the same as if Current were selected am
143. Is the TRACK STATUS set to REC or INPUT p 3 134 _ Has the TRIM knob been raised to an appropriate level L If the input sound is no longer heard when you play back a track whose TRACK STATUS is set to REC has the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page set ting AutoIn been turned Off C When cue is selected has the cue level of each channel been turned down In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page press the Level button and raise the level C In some cases the sound of the digital input may not be input for two or three seconds If the sampling frequency changes on the digital input device that is connected for example from 48 kHz to 44 1 kHz the sampling rate converter inside the D1600mkII will require two or three seconds to register the frequency change Please wait until the sound can be heard once again Is the format of the digital input inappropriate gt Connect an instrument or digital audio device that conforms to CP 1201 or S P DIF No sound from an audio CD inserted in the CD R RW drive Is the output from the CD R RW drive correctly assigned to a mixer channel Assign the output to a mixer channel in the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page and set the TRACK STATUS to INPUT orange Did you subject the D1600mkII to vibration or impact The CD R RW drive in the D1600mkI is a removable unit Check that the CD R RW driv
144. LFO to cre ate subtle shimmering and gives three dimensional depth and spread to the sound because the signal is output from the left right and center S peed SP aia 1 100 Sets the LFO speed Depth Depth supera 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Shimmr IS hummer en 0 100 Sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO waveform Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Shimmer This parameter sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO wave form Increasing this value adds more shimmering making the cho rus effect more complex and richer Dynamics DY1 DY7 Category Dynamics type effects 21 DY1 St Compressor Stereo Compressor This effect compresses the input signal to regulate the level and give a punchy effect It is useful for guitar piano and drum sounds This is a stereo compressor You can link left and right channels or use each channel separately Envelp Envelope Select L RMix Indivi Determines whether the left and right channels are linked or used separately Sens Usenet EEN 1 100 Sets the sensitivity Attack dir cCle VE 1 100 Sets the attack level EQTrim EQ TiM rastras 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of High EQ Level Output Level veces 0 100 Sets the output level of the compressor Mi
145. Mode lb everb 7 Flanger Phaser Vibrato Reverb Hall Smooth Hall Reverb Wet Plate Reverb Dry Plate Reverb Room ROOM Bright Room BrRoom Early Reflection ER HALL SmtHall WPlate DPlate LCRDly St Chorus St Flanger t Chorus t t Phaser t t Flangr Phaser Vibrat StTrml AutPan Ensmbl St Vibrato St Tremolo St Auto Pan Ensemble St Compressor StComp St Limiter StLimit Multiband Limiter BnLimit St Gate StGate St Exciter Enhancer StExctr St Decimator Decim St Pitch Shifter StPitch RotSP Canclr Rotary Speaker Center Canceller it it it it uitar Multi it t e ar Mul 2 CabRes CabRes Amp Simulator Amp Simulator2 Amp Simulator3 Amp Simulator Pre Amp Simulator Dis Pre Amp Simulator Dis Pre Amp Simulator Dis Pre Amp Simulator Di Pre Amp Simulator Dis ti1 ti2 ti3 Effect Program List RockVocal VocalDouble P4EQ Exciter P4EQ Wah P4EQ Cho An P4EQ Phaser P4EQ MtDelay Comp Wah Comp AmpSim Comp OD HiG 1086 MM18 Limitr P4EQ 1087 MM19 Limtr Ch F 1088 MM20 Limtr Phasr 1089 MM21 Limtr MtDly 1090 MM22 0D HG Ch F 1091 MM23 0D HG Phasr 1097 MM29 Ch FI MtDly 1100 MM32 Reverb Gate 1101 MM33 MicSim Lmtr 1102 MM33 MicSim57 87 1103 MM33 MicSim57 47 1104 MM33 MicSm57 451 1105 MM33 MicSm57 414 1106 MM33 MicSim57 20 1107 MM33 MicSm57 421 1108 MicSim57 55 PualiCateg ProgramName Jang Ton EFF2 EFFS EFF4 EFFS Mode Mic
146. Multi CabiRes MicSim Vocal Multi1 Vocal Multi2 Bass Multi Bass Multi P4EQ Exciter P4EQ Wah P4EQ Cho Fing P4EQ Phaser P4EQ Mt Delay Comp Wah Comp AmpSim Comp OD HiG Comp P4EQ Comp Cho Fing Comp Phaser Comp Mt Delay qu P4EQ Limiter Cho Fing Limiter Phaser Limiter Mt Delay OD HiG Cho Fing OD HiG Phaser OD HiG Mt Delay OD HiG AmpSim Wah AmpSim Reverb Gate MicSim Limi MicSim Limi MicSim Limi MicSim Limi MicSim Limi MicSim Limi MicSim Limi MicSim Limi er er er er er er er t t t t t t t t OverDrive HighGain JODHIG Compressor2 Limiter Gate Exciter2 Parametric 4band EQ P4EQ AmpSimulator Multitap Delay Chorus Flanger2 Phaser Compressor2 Compressor2 MASTER EFFECT Preset32 User32 Progto Categ ProgramName Algorithm Ter everb 15 FINAL EFFECT Preset32 User32 Prglo Categ Programlame Algorithm EF1 o Dynamics 10 ReverbHall SmoothHall WetPlate DryPlate ReverbRoom BrightRoom ER DarkPlate BrightPlate ARENA Cathedral Club ListeningRoom NeoAcoustic St DynaDelay AutoPanDelay St Chorus St Flanger St Phaser St Vibrato St Tremolo St AutoPan t t t t Reverb Hall Smooth Hall Reverb Wet Plate Reverb Dry Plate Reverb Room Bright Room Early Reflections Reverb Wet Plate Reverb Dry Plate Reverb Hall Smooth Hall Reverb Room Bright Room Early Reflections Bright Room L C R Delay St Cross Delay St Multitap Delay St Modulation Delay
147. OOP AUTO FF IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH UND LOC4 RHYTHM OD USB Edit Type Delete Song This operation deletes the selected song Fotoe 5 000 00 000 Te Ea deleteSong DI CemoSonqHb 1 3 2 2 IDESISONG casan 001 100 Shows the number and name of the song that will be deleted To change this make your selection in the SONG CD SelSong tab page 3 Exec Execute Executes the Delete Song operation When you execute the DestSong song will be deleted and subsequent songs will move forward amp You cannot Undo this operation Edit Type Protect Song Here you can protect the selected song so that it cannot be written or deleted This lets you prevent a completed song from being accidentally modified or deleted A If Protect is turned on all writing and deletion will be disabled you will not be able to record edit tracks or store scenes etc Turning Protect on will also protect the settings of the song You will be able to edit the fader and EQ settings but not store them EditTupe 5J000 00 000 W s KING a 861 Demoonofpi i 3 soma ditsongf PraPlau CORR 2 4 Zi DESISONG comiera 001 100 Shows the number and name of the song to be protected To change this make your selection in the SONG CD SelSong tab page 3 Exec Execute ssssssesnnunn
148. OR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOCI BEM emi SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH JEND LOCA lA CD USB 118 10 IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 END LOC4 You can store the desired time locations in IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 and END LOC4 and use these keys in the following ways e Locate points press a key to move to the stored location e Loop playback in out points e Auto punch recording in out points e Track editing points e In Out playback In Out Playback is a function that lets you hold down the IN LOC1 key and press the OUT LOC2 key to play from the IN time stored in the IN LOC1 key to the OUT time stored in the OUT LOC2 key This is a convenient way to play back the IN OUT region of the song so you can check the contents For details on how to store a location in each key refer to Using the locate keys to move gt p 46 Locate functions IN LOC1 key The time location stored in the IN LOC1 key is used in the following ways e Locate point 1 e Punch in time for auto punch recording Playback start time for loop playback Playback start time for in out playback The following time locations for track editing operations CopyTrack copy source start time InsertTrack blank insertion start time Erase Track
149. ORE key and then the SCENE key Editing a scene and overwriting it Here s how you can modify part of a scene and over write the settings back onto that scene 1 Recall a scene As described in Recalling a scene select the scene that you wish to modify 2 Modify the settings of the scene Adjust the CHANNEL faders PAN knobs EQ and effects as desired 3 Overwrite the scene In the SCENE ReadDel tab page make sure that the number of the scene you modified is selected Press the OvrWrt button A dialog box will ask you for confirmation When you press the Yes button the scene will be over written onto that number Overwrite Scenei arerouSsure Deleting a scene Here s how to delete an unwanted scene amp Undo is not available for this operation 1 Recall the scene As described in Recalling a scene recall the scene that you wish to delete If you wish to delete all scenes select any of the scenes 2 Delete the scene s In the SCENE ReadDel tab page press the Delete button Verify the Delete scene number in the upper left and if you wish to delete the scene press the Yes button to delete the scene If you press the No button the scene will not be deleted If you wish to delete all scenes press the SelectAll button to turn it On Then press the Yes button to delete all the scenes Moving a registered scene to ano
150. OUT times Register the start and end times of the desired fade in 2 Select the fade in command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to FadeTrack DestTrack II OO OI 000 Te FadeTrack TEE eaere ies E DestTrack 3 Select the fade in curve Press the Mode button to access the dialog box Select adeMlode oO d CE A CUE Me LS Cancel CC al CIF ik A Du ha For this example select the A curve press the OK button to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page 4 Select the fade in destination track number Set DestTrack to track 1 5 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 6 Verify that the data was faded correctly Press the IN LOC1 key to play back from the IN location and verify that the data was faded in cor rectly K You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command amp The longer the specified range IN OUT the longer this command will take to process until the Com pleted display appears Procedure for fading out Here s how to fade out the IN OUT region of track 1 1 Register the IN and OUT times Register the start and end times of the desired fade out 2 Select the
151. On so that you can rotate the VALUE dial to hear only the sound of that track 5c TrackSelect ainda Track1 16 Select the track whose waveform will be shown and which will be played Press the button and select from the list 5d Zoom In Out Up Down Adjust the size of the waveform display and the play back speed Expand the waveform display vertically Shrink the waveform display vertically dH Expand the waveform display horizontally H Shrink the waveform display horizontally When you press the OK button the times you speci fied for In and Out will be overwritten onto the respective keys IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 If you press the Cancel button the times you selected will be can celled 119 TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP Alo ef TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER e RHYTHM CD USB 12 LOOP P1 Loop Loop playback recording settings This function repeatedly plays records over the range of time specified by IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 Log 121000 00 000 1 Int 600 op 800 Out opp 68 aoe 4 Ly OO ii ii On Off Turn loop playback on off On Playback will occur repeatedly over the IN OUT range When On the LOOP key will light Off Playback will be normal la Minas 000 00 000
152. Quick button turned off will require a substantial length of time for completion For example to format 40 GB the time required will differ as follows depending on whether the Quick button is on or off Off approximately 10 hours and 30 minutes On approximately 7 seconds If you turn on the Force button formatting will be executed even if the hard disk contains protected songs If you execute formatting with the Force button turned off and the hard disk contains a protected song the SongProtect message will appear and the operation will be aborted Press the Yes button to begin formatting The display will indicate Completed when the operation is finished Press the Yes button 3 Erasing the data from a CD RW Here s how you can erase the data from a CD RW disc When you erase the data that disc can again be used as a blank disk amp When you execute EraseCD RW all data on that CD RW disc will be erased amp Youcannot execute EraseCD RW on any drive oth er than the CD RW peme lE 001 01 000 EraseCD RYW Hee USB Mode SelOperation 1 Insert a CD RW disc into the CD R RW drive 2 Select EraseCD RW Access the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page and use the VALUE dial to choose SelOperation 3 Execute the Erase operation Press the Exec button to open the dialog box EL E KEEN Use the Quick button
153. RI 0 100 Sets the input level of EQ applied to the effect sound LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of High EQ Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Type This parameter selects the decay curve for the early reflection Delay DL1 DL6 Category Delay type effects 8 DLI L C R Delay This multitap delay outputs three Tap signals to the left right and center respectively You can also adjust the left and right spread of the delay sound LTime L Delay Time msec 0 1360 Sets the delay time of TapL LLevel Level NENNEN 0 50 Sets the output level of TapL CTime C Delay Time msec 0 1360 Sets the delay time of TapC CLevel Level E 0 50 Sets the output level of TapC RTime R Delay Time msec 0 1360 Sets the delay time of TapR RLevel Level NENNEN 0 50 Sets the output level of TapR Fdback Feedback C Delay 100 100 Sets the feedback amountof TapC 137 Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX 2in2out x 2 Insert FX 2in2out x 2 1imlout x 4 1in2out x 2 Linlout x 8 Effect Control Master FX Final PX Final FX HiDamp High Damp 0 100 LoDamp Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Sets the
154. RW drive Specifications MIDI implementation chart Block diagram Effect Program S Index Demo Song i Rhythm Pattern List 215 patterns For Beat settings other than 3 4 4 4 or 6 8 only Blank Metro or Hihat can be selected For Beat settings of 3 4 4 4 or 6 8 the following rhythm patterns can be selected in addition to Blank Metro or Hihat I F and E indicate Intro Fill and Ending pattern marks In this list Length and Tempo values are the number of measures in each rhythm and the recommended tempo 3 4 13 pattern RhythmName Length Tempo RhythmName Length Tempo RhythmName Length Tempo RhythmName Length Tempo 8beat 1 4 120 RockBld 1 8 90 Rap A oe 34 44 In 8beat2 4 120 RockBld 2 8 90 I Rap 4 95 1 3 4 7 150 8beat 3 4 120 RockBld 1 4 90 F Rap 1 95 F 3 4 1 150 8beat 4 2 120 I RockBlid 2 4 90 E Rap 5 95 E 3 4 4 150 8beat 5 8 120 F RockBld 1 1 90 Ho
155. Rhythm and the measure that is currently playing Example L4 1 measure pattern currently playing measure 1 of a four P2 TmpMap Editing the tempo map By creating a tempo map you can cause the tempo time signature and rhythm pattern to change while the song is recorded or played back For details on creating a tempo map refer to Tempo map p 72 JS Changes in tempo time signature or rhythm can be made only at the beginning of a measure Temportap fe 001 01 000 ta 1 Mapil Meas B01 002 J 128 t t Metrod L EDOM Peia 001 200 This is the number of the selected tempo map The starting measure ending measure tempo time signature and rhythm pattern of this tempo map are shown at the right Press the ie button and select a tempo map from a dialog box A When TempoSource is Manual it is not possible to select TempoMap Creates a new tempo map event and adds it When you press this button the Select Tempo Map Param dialog box will appear Select TempoMlaphes Parar HIR Jose OK Za StartMeaS ssssssusssnunnsnunsnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnn 001 999 Specifies the starting location in measures of the tempo map event that will be created 2D ENAM EAS ii 001 999 Specifies the ending location in measures of the tempo map event that will be created 2C TEMDO ici 40 240 Specifies the tempo This value has a range of 40 240
156. S OER CET CIERTO InsAsn E InsEff A InsEtfE A InsErf3H InsErf4H Ins5 e 7 SelectEffects 8 wsccccsesecceeusseseeas Eff5 Eff6 Eff7 Eff8 Of insert effects 5 8 select the effect that will be displayed in this page Editing bypass and rename operations will affect the effect that is displayed 20 MASTER EFFECT AUX The master effects are used by sending an adjustable send amount from each channel to the effect They can be used to adjust the overall depth and balance The D1600mkII pro vides two master effects The final effect is used to adjust the final stage of the master LR bus The D1600mkII provides one stereo final effect The AUX send is used when you wish to apply an external effect to the sound P1 MstEff1 Selection and settings for master effect 1 EffectNumber IS 000 00 O00 le 1 E ffs Heem DEn SEET SEE ES GE 2 4 5 3 1 OutputlevelMeter OUTL R CLP 8 18 42dB This indicates the output level of the effect The horizontal axis indicates the effect output and the vertical axis indicates the level i The send amount from each channel i e the level that is input to the effect is adjusted in the EffSnd1 tab page 2 EffectNumber M000 M001 032 u001 032 Select the effect program u001 u032 is the user area where effect programs that you edit can be stored 3 EffectProgramN ame ssssescssssseeseees Effect Program List When you
157. S ni 3 Pan E 114 Peak Old AA ee 133 Phantom POW EL sist 6 Elteren 125 Play From fumncton 122 Play From To functton 47 Play LO MUNCH ON iii 122 Playback of ong eee 18 45 110 Program pla ct 45 110 Playpack tic 45 Loop pGlavback un 45 120 Popup buttons 8 9 Rostlader level usa iiala 133 Power op oft 11 Pre amp simulator ees 145 Pre fader eye 16 133 Preset effect program s s s 53 Progra DIAY vda 45 110 Protect DONG ana 70 110 Punch in OUt oocccccnnccnnnnnoncncnononininnnos 40 R Radio DUO ein cda 8 9 Recording level scene 39 Recording mode eee 39 99 Recorde Taka 16 Auto punch in OUt 41 119 Bounce recording 31 42 99 Loop recordimg eee 44 120 Manual punch in out 40 91 OVEr UDI Sito 40 Trigger recording ee e 43 121 TA ARNA 120 Rehearsal E 135 Rename Effect program sueri 56 iti ener EE 130 Insert effect 127 Master effect c cccccssseccceesseees 129 DONE ege iio 35 108 RES CONC iaa 95 Effect user data 78 DOM Cala EE 76 Restore the data 93 Return balance 28 55 129 Return level 28 55 129 Kai A e ee 137 Reverse Track 64 103 Rp 115 123 Rhythm patterns 72 116 e A 14 71 S Sampling rate Copverter cee 7 REN 50 113 SCONE CISDIAY iodo 114 Scroll Dutti tds 8 Scrub function cocnccnncnnnonono 47 122 A res Teer een errr 129 130 Send Jee 28 55 129 Slave DOING dial 88 92 Slow Play funct
158. Select the playback track Press the TRACK STATUS key of the playback track s to select PLAY LED lit green 2 Register the desired region IN OUT for loop play back p 46 You can also set this by using Wave in LOOP Loop or AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page 3 Access the LOOP Loop tab page and turn the Loop button On 4 Begin loop playback When you press the PLAY key playback will begin from the IN location and repeat over the IN OUT region 5 Press the STOP key to stop In addition to the playback methods described above the following playback methods are also available on the D1600mkIL For details refer to the page given e Apply EQ to the playback audio p 48 e Adjust the level and pan of the playback audio p 48 e Apply effects to the playback audio p 55 e Play the built in rhythms together with the playback p 71 Ul Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer m EN Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 46 Changing the time location This section explains how you can move the counter that shows the current location within the song 1 Switching the counter display You can switch the time display type shown by the counter SetectTimebisp E 001 01 000 KR t 881 HEWSONG
159. Sets the depth of LFO modulation for the oscillator frequency Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Pre LPF This parameter enables you to set the damping amount of the high range sound input to the ring modulator If the input sound contains lots of harmonics the effect may sound dirty In this case cut a cer tain amount of high range Fixed Frequency Hz This parameter sets the oscillator frequency 29 SE2 Doppler This effect simulates the Doppler effect of a moving sound with a changing pitch similar to the siren of an passing ambu lance Mixing the effect sound with the dry sound will create a unique chorus effect Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed P itch Pitch DS E 0 100 Sets the pitch variation of the moving sound Pan Pan Depth eds 100 100 Sets the panning of the moving sound Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Pitch Depth With the Doppler effect the pitch is raised when the sound approaches and the pitch is lowered when the sound goes away This parameter sets this pitch variation Pan Depth This parameter sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound With larger values the sound seems to come and go from much fur ther away With positive values the sound moves from left to right with negative values the so
160. Sets the low range gain of trigger signal MdOfst Mid Offset dB 40 0 Sets the mid range gain of trigger signal HiOfst High Offset dB 40 0 Sets the high range gain of trigger signal GLevel Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24 Sets the output gain Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds 34 LS3 Vocoder This effect applies the character of the right channel signal Modulator to the left channel signal input Carrier A com mon use of this effect is to produce the sound of various instru ments by inputting a voice to the Modulator via a microphone A special effect is also achieved by using rhythm or effect sounds Strings or distortion guitar sounds with a lot of harmon ics are suitable as a Carrier Carri L Carrier Trim cnn 0 100 Sets the input level of left channel Car rier Modul R Modulator Trim 0 100 Sets the input level of right channel Modulator Formnt Formant Shift 2 2 Sets the height of the frequency for the vocoder effect Respo RESPONSE ccoccinocononosmomm 0 100 Sets the speed of the response to the modulator input NLevel Noise Level 0 100 Sets the noise mix level to the Carrier LoGain Low Gain dB 12 12 Sets the low range output level of the vocoder HiGain High Gain dB
161. St Dynamic Delay HALL SmtHall LCRDIy StDly MtDly ModDly DyDly St Auto Panning Delay PanDly St Chorus St Flanger St Phaser St Vibrato St Tremolo St AutoPan Ensemble St Ring Modulator Doppler St Analog Record Talking Modulator Chorus Flangr Phaser Vibrat StTrml AutPan Ensmbl RingMd Dopplr Record TalkMd St Comp StudioComp TwoMix 60 s TwoMix 70 s St Limiter ReMSTR POP ReMSTR DANCE StudioLimitr St Gate St P4EQ LargeSizeEffect 10 St G7EQ St MBLimiter ReMasterL A GrooveBeat Digital Rock TwoMix 80 s ER_Large ReverbHall SmoothHall WetPlate DryPlate ReverbRoom BrightRoom L C R Delay X Delay MtapDelay ModDelay St DynaDelay AutoPanDelay t t t St Compressor St Compressor St Compressor St Compressor St Limiter St Limiter St Limiter St Limiter St Gate St Parametric 4band EQIP4EQ St Graphic 7band EQ St Multiband Limite St Multiband Limite St Multiband Limite St Multiband Limite St Multiband Limite St Multiband Limite St Multiband Limite St Multiband Limite Early Reflections L j j j j j j j j Reverb Hall Smooth Hall Reverb Wet Plate Reverb Dry Plate Reverb Room Bright Room L C R Delay St Cross Delay St Multitap Delay St Modulation Delay St Dynamic Delay t SmtHall WPlate DPlate ROOM BrRoom LCRDly StDly MtDly ModDly DyDly St Auto Panning Delay PanDly 167 Various Troubleshooting messages Hard disk and CD R
162. Start Step 2 Overdubbing Step 1 Quick Recording Step 3 Mixdown 32 3 Access the RECORD Bounce tab page and set BounceMode to 16Ir 2Tr 16Tr 2Tr means that sixteen tracks will be bounced to two tracks 4 Press the field at the right of RecordVirtualTrack and turn the If tracks 1h and 2h already VALUE dial to select h contain data and you select h The bounced data will be placed in the virtual track you selected here the data in 1h and 2h here In other words you will be bounce recording on virtual track will play back during bounce 1h of track 1 and virtual track 2h of track 2 recording If you want to keep the data of tracks 1h and 2h If tracks 1h and 2h already contain data choose different virtual sosa tacke tracks Bounce record 1 Goto the beginning of the song 2 Press the REC key and then the PLAY key to begin resampling 3 When you are finished recording press the STOP key Play back 1 Use the TRACK STATUS keys to set tracks 1 and 2 to PLAY For all tracks other than tracks 1 and 2 either lower the faders or set their TRACK STATUS to MUTE 2 Inthe TRACK Vtr1 8 tab page select virtual tracks 1h and 2h for tracks 1 and 2 If you selected virtual tracks other than h in Preparations for bounce recording select those virtual tracks instead
163. TATUS key to select REC LED lit red 2 Press the track 8 TRACK STATUS key to select PLAY LED lit green 3 Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the other tracks to select MUTE LED dark Y O 2 y Y D 19 20 Check the recording mode If you ve already checked the recording mode there s no need to check it again if so proceed to the next step 1 Access the RECORD RecMode tab page and make sure that Select RecMode is set to Input Record 1 Set the recording start location to the beginning of the song At the beginning of the song the counter value will be 001 01 000 or 000 00 000 To move to the beginning of the song press the counter value and turn the VALUE dial to the beginning of the song 001 01 000 or 000 00 000 Alternatively you can hold down the STOP key and press the REW key to move to the beginning of the song However if you are already at the beginning of the song holding down the STOP key and pressing the REW key will take you to the preceding song so check the current location before you use this method 2 Hold down the REC key and press the PLAY key to begin record ing 3 When you have finished recording press the STOP key Play back 1 Hold down the STOP key and press the REW key to return to the beginning of the song 2 Press the TRACK STATUS key to select PLAY for the track you just recorded 3 Press the
164. TOP key to stop 11 Listen to the recording Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the recording tracks 1 and 2 to set them to PLAY LED lit green Either lower the faders of the other channels or turn the SOLO MONITOR Solo tab page 1 and 2 settings On Press the PLAY key to listen to the playback and then press the STOP key to stop Recording 16 tracks of audio to 2 virtual tracks that are not currently selected As an example here s how the audio of tracks 1 16 virtual track a selected for all tracks can be recorded to virtual track b of tracks 1 and 2 Perform bounce recording as described in Com bining 16 tracks of audio and overwriting them onto 2 tracks However in step 3 change the Record Virtual Track setting to b so that the recording will occur on virtual track b To listen to the result of the recording select virtual track b Access the TRACK Vtr1 8 tab page and set SelectVirtualTrack to 1b and 2b for tracks 1 and 2 Recording 14 tracks of audio and 2 external input sources on the remaining 2 tracks Here s how the audio of tracks 1 14 and the audio inputs from INPUT 1 and 2 can be recorded on tracks 15 and 16 1 Specify the input channels Access the INPUT TUNER Ch9 16 tab page Set Ch15 to INPUTI and set Ch16 to INPUT2 2 Set the recording mode to bounce recording Acce
165. The pan knob is between 21 50 steps to the right of the internal value The pan knob is more than 51 steps to the right of the internal value SceneN umber ssssssssnnunuennnunnnannnnnnnnannnnanan 001 100 This recalls the mixer settings of a scene to the current time location 9 TEMPO RHYTHM Here you can make tempo time signature and rhythm metronome settings for a song When the counter is dis playing MBT measures beats and 1 96th of a beat it will operate according to the specified tempo For details on the counter display refer to 1 COUNTER p 91 IS You can also check the tempo rhythm settings in the SONG CD SelSong tab page P1 SetUp Tempo and rhythm settings Temposouree EJ 001 01 000 11 4 Tempo 4 52 1 TempoSource Manual TempoMap TempoTrack Specify the tempo source Press the Ie button and you can select from a dialog box Select TempoSource O Tempoblap Cancel C3 TempoTrack Manual The tempo will follow the Tempo and Beat settings It will not be possible to change the tempo time signature and rhythm pattern automatically as the song progresses TempoMap The tempo time signature and rhythm pattern will change automatically as the song progresses as directed by the tempo map The tempo map can be created in the ImpMap tab page TempoTrack The recorded tap tempo or MIDI Clock will be used Use the
166. UB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD IOC COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END OAI RHYTHM CD USB 96 4 Destination 001 100 Effect Ins001 128 Mst001 032 Fin033 064 Specifies the restore destination song number or effect number The data will be restored to the song number or effect number you select here If you want to restore all songs select 5 Exec Execute EEN Executes the restore The Source song or user data will be restored to the Destination song or user data When you restore a single song the Source song will be input as the Destination song number Any songs existing at numbers following the Destination number will be moved backward they will not be overwritten When you restore all songs all of the Source songs will be placed after the last song existing in the Destination song drive no songs will be overwritten When you restore effect user data the Source user data will overwrite the user data on the song drive Festore UserData A Overwrite AreYouSure You can choose whether to restore the effect user data If you press the OK button the effect user data will be restored overwriting the effect user data on the song drive If you press the No button the effect user data will not be restored Effect user data is a
167. X Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet ChFl2 Chorus Flanger2 DTime Delay Time msec 0 0 50 0 LFO LFO Wavefom TRI SIN S peed Frequency HZ 0 02 20 0 Depth Dadas 0 100 Fdback Feedback 100 100 EQTrim EQ TM acotados 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15 HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15 Mix DW et Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Switching between overdrive and hyper gain mode Sets the degree of distortion Sets the overdrive output level Sets the center frequency for Low EQ shelving type Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 1 peaking type Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 1 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 1 Sets the center frequency for Mid High EQ 2 peaking type Sets the band width of Mid High EQ 2 Sets the gain of Mid High EQ 2 Sets the delay time Selects LFO Waveform Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the feedback amount Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger Sets the delay time Selects LFO Waveform Sets the LFO speed Sets the depth of LFO modulation Sets the feedback amount Sets the EQ input level Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ Sets the effect balance of the chorus flanger 149 Effect Parameter List Insert FX 2in2out x 2 Insert FX 2in2o0ut x 2 Insert FX 1in
168. Yes button 4 Select the clipboard as the import destination track number Select Clip2 as the DestTrack IS The number indicates the number of tracks in the clipboard In the case of monaural data this will be Clip 1 5 Execute the import Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute The display will indicate Completed when the operation is finished Press the Yes button amp This operation will take a longer time in propor tion to the length of the file you are importing 6 Store the TO location 79 Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 80 7 10 11 12 Select the Copy operation In the TRACK EditTrk tab page select Copy Track for EditType Destra Te 001 01 000 D SE rack Clip2 2 a EE Maer Tmport port DestTrack Source Track Times Select the clipboard as the copy source track number Select Clip2 for SourceTrack Select tracks 1 and 2 as the copy destination track numbers Select 1 2 for DestTrack Specify the number of times the data will be copied In the Times field select 1 as the number of cop ies Execute the co
169. a On Off 100 P3 EditTrk Track editing sourceTrack 5 001 01 000 1 e CopuTrack __ x 93 Erec A The tracks affected by your editing will be the currently selected virtual tracks for tracks 1 16 Virtual tracks that are not currently selected will not be affected However CopyWholeTrack and SwapWholeTrack are exceptions to this NS The regions time locations used for editing will be the times that are stored in the IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 and END LOCA keys For details refer to Using the locate keys to move p 46 IN time the time stored in the IN LOC1 key OUT time the time stored in the OUT LOC2 key TO time the time stored in the TO LOC3 key END time the time stored in the END LOC4 key You can store the desired time in each key beforehand or use the Wave button in the TRACK EditTrk tab page to specify the time WA The undo operation is available after you execute an editing operation L BGI 0G asirios CopyTrack InsertTrack EraseTrack DeleteTrack SwapTrack ReverseTrack OptimizeTrack Exp CompTrack CopyW holeTrack SwapW holeTrack FadeTrack NormalizeTrack Select the type of editing operation Press the IF button and select an editing operation from the dialog box Select EditTrack Type Copy Insert Erase Delete Swap CC iBeuerze Optimize Ep Comp CC pg hole Sup whale Fade O Hormalize Each editing operation you se
170. a 11 75 85 CONNEC CON sidad 10 A a Pe 11 58 ViDa ee 87 88 89 ces Various Troubleshooting messages Hard disk and CD R RW drive Specifications MIDI implementation chart Effect Program Block diagram List fe SE 169 CODY SON erica 70 109 COBY Mac 62 100 Copy Whole Track 66 104 Copy 111 Counter display cece 46 91 A A A 49 132 Cue LO Vel E 49 Current parameter display 8 D IR 137 Delste SONS talas 70 110 Delete Tracia tad 63 102 DEMO ses 12 Demo SONG Listeners 169 Dial g DO 8 9 Dig italinput runc 38 123 Digital source CONE CH ON EE 11 DISCAL E 59 110 111 Downloading the system file 86 98 Ren E Te 140 E Se COU castrate o sears 8 Editing e tecnica 56 Effect Control 57 151 Effect Parameter List 137 Effect program o A eines 53 ee ee 53 Effect Program St eeeissstgeer rtueetg 166 Effect user daa 85 PACKUP E 77 94 RESTO 78 95 EO uriia 27 48 124 125 Erase Tracia 63 102 Error EE 157 Expansion Compression Track 66 104 Expression pedal 57 91 151 F Fade Tracks urea 68 105 Faded iN0 OUt ocooconcnocononananananananes 68 105 Fader dis plans 114 Final effect 30 56 129 130 137 143 PUNT Css o 34 111 POO ES Witt 41 Ee 91 Polar EE 91 170 Format DOS format USB dive e 98 Etage eege 82 98 DONE AV doin 82 97 L 82 G Guitar amp simulator oo o 144 Guitar Micaela
171. a solo part you can switch between several virtual tracks to record different performances on each and select the best performance later Or when using bounce ping pong recording you can specify an unrecorded virtual track as the recording destination so that you can mixdown into two tracks without erasing any of the sixteen tracks Recorded tracks Selected track Recording on a virtual track 1 Select the virtual track In the TRACK Vtr1 8 or Vtr9 16 tab page select the track that you wish to record and use the VALUE dial to select an open virtual track 2 Adjust the recording level of the input device and record Refer to 1 Analog inputs and 1 Adjust the record ing level and record p 36 39 3 Playback while recording addition tracks O verdubbing The process of listening to previously recorded tracks while you record additional tracks is called overdub bing For example this can be used to record a solo while you listen to previously recorded backing tracks 1 Select the playback tracks Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the tracks that you wish to play back to set them to PLAY mode LED lit green 2 Select the recording track Press the TRACK STATUS key of the track that you wish to record to set it to REC mode LED blinking red 3 Lower the faders of tracks you are not using Press the TRACK STATUS key of the tracks that are not being recorded or played to set
172. a song you can press tap the PLAY key at the beginning of each measure or beat to record a tempo Alternatively you can use a foot switch separately sold option instead of the PLAY key Tap tempo can be used to record the tempo after you have recorded a song By recording the tempo afterward for a song that contains no tempo settings you can do the following things e Edit tracks in units of a measure e Synchronize external MIDI devices 1 Prepare the audio for which you wish to record the tempo First the audio for which you wish to record tempo data must be recorded from the beginning of the song Trigger recording is a convenient way to record from the beginning of the song p 43 2 Specify the time signature of the song If the time signature changes during the song create a tempo map event at each location where the time signature changes gt p 72 Tempo map You will not be able to set the tempo of the tempo map event in this case 3 If you wish to use a foot switch to input the tap tempo connect a foot switch such as the PS 1 separately sold option to the FOOT SW jack of the D1600mkII 4 Select the tempo recording method In the TEMPO RHYTHM TmpTrk tab page select either MeasTap tap at the beginning of each measure or BeatTap tap at the beginning of each beat Remick 000 00 000 Select RecTempolrack Type RecStart Get ATmpraps TmpTrk e Record
173. a to the right of the E button and rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired editing operation Alternatively you can press the le button to dis play Select EditTrack Type and select the type of editing Select EditTrack Type Copy Insert Reverse Delete Exp Comp G Hormalize Erase Optimize Sap ICpywhole CiSupwhole Fade Select the track s that you wish to edit The LCD screen will differ depending on the Edit Type The screen shown in step 2 is when Edit Type is set to CopyTrack For CopyTrack use SourceTrack to specify the copy source track DestTrack to specify the copy destination track and Times to specify the number of copies E You can use Wave to view the waveform as you specify the editing region sourceTrack 5 001 01 000 CopyTrack a trie AY tra 164 Edif Trk A Import H Export E SourceTrack DestTrack Times Execute the selected track editing command Press the Exec button to execute the selected track editing command In the example shown in step 4 the data in the IN OUT region of track 1 will be copied three times start ing at the TO location of track 2 61 Basic operation Creating selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Tak Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing
174. ac cias 65 102 Swap Whole Track 67 105 Exchanging an entire track 67 Exchanging with a virtual EE 67 Track View 17 133 Trigger recordimg eee 43 121 WINE EE 39 124 ces Updating the system User effect program Various Troubleshooting messages Hard disk and CD R RW drive Specifications chart MIDI implementation Block diagram Effect Program List Rhythm Pattern List oo 9 I IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty KORG INC 15 12 Shimotakaido 1 chome Suginami ku Tokyo Japan 2003 KORG INC Printed in China
175. access the SelSong tab page songtumber E 000 00 000 D GEAR SISTER DANCE e Scene ae i DEMO SONG SelSona 2 Select highlight SongNumber and turn the VALUE dial to select the desired song number To select from the song list 1 Press the SONG CD key to access the SelSong tab page Songilumber E 000 00 000 G D EAR SISTER DANCE TEE e Scene agi DEMO SONG SelSon 2 Press the F button at the left of the song number The song list will appear HE Demosonga1 Da Demotongae4 3 In the song list turn the VALUE dial to select the desired song and press the OK button Assign audio inputs to the mixer The D1600mkII has eight analog inputs and one two channel digital input jack Audio signals from devices connected to these jacks can be assigned to the various mixer channels and recorded The D1600mkII s rhythm sounds or the sound from an audio CD played by the CD R RW drive can also be assigned to the mixer channels Input 1 Input 2 O ao A Input 5 O Z Input 6 O 9 Input 7 Se Geet Digian A m Z HE ME E 2 TH EN In this section we will explain how to assign each type of input source to mixer channels and audition the source 1 Analog inputs Use the connections and settings most applicable to your situation e Connect a guitar to the GUITAR IN jack and assign it to mixer channel 8 e Connect a condenser mic aud
176. ack Select Clip2 as the DestTrack K The number indicates the number of tracks in the clipboard Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute The display will indicate Completed when the operation is finished Press the Yes button Choose the Export operation Access the TRACK Export tab page Execute J O01 91 0 000 A DriveList Select the export destination drive Press the DriveTrack button to open the dialog box Select U USB DOS and press the Yes button Edit the name of the WAV file Press the Rename button and edit the name in the RenameFile dialog box p 35 RO When you export a stereo WAV file the seventh and eighth characters of the filename will auto matically be ST For a monaural file this will be MN MS You cannot save the data if an identically named file already exists on the USB drive Specify the date and time of the WAV file Press the Date button to open the dialog box select the field you want to edit and use the VALUE dial to specify the date and time File Date ea ai 81 E Cancel Execute the Export operation Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute The display will indicate Completed when the operation is finished Press the Yes button
177. ack insert effect 2 mixer channel Off This means that the audio signal from the INPUT 3 jack is processed by insert effect 2 but not sent to a mixer channel In other words insert effect 2 is not used 2 Press the SelectCh field for insert effect 1 and use the VALUE dial to select the destination For this example select 5 Below it INPUT 6 jack insert effect 1 6 will be selected auto matically 3 Press the OK button in the dialog box Select an effect program E 1 Press the INSERT EFFECT key to access the INSERT EFFECT 3 InsEff1 tab page E 2 Erfectiiumber Je 001 01 000 kees 2 EffectNumber 2 Press the EffectNumber button and turn the VALUE dial to select Effect Program List gt p 166 the effect program you want to use D 7 0 2 y Y D 25 26 Step 3 Mixdown Mixdown is the process of applying insert effects master effects and EQ etc to the sound of each track to adjust the overall balance and combining everything into two track stereo data 1 Apply effects Here s how to assign an insert effect to a mixer channel so that the effect is applied to the playback of the track TRACK STATUS key settings Specify the tracks that you want to play back 1 Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the playback tracks to select PLAY LED lit green Make insert effect settings 1 Access the INSERT EFFECT InsAsn
178. ack number Set SourceTrack to track 1 3 Select the copy destination track number Set DestTrack to track 2 4 Select the copy destination virtual track Set DestV Track to virtual track a 5 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 6 Verify that the data was copied correctly Play back from the beginning of the song and verify that the data was copied correctly MS You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command Procedure for copying to a virtual track Here s how virtual track a currently selected of track 1 can be copied to virtual track b of track 1 1 Verify the copy destination In the TRACK Vtr1 8 tab page make sure that track 1 virtual track b is blank or is a track that may be erased overwritten After you verify this you must return the setting to a 2 Select the Copy Whole command In the TRACK Edit Trk tab page set EditType to CopyWholeTrack 3 Select the copy source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 4 Select the copy destination track number Set DestTrack to track 1 5 Select the copy destination virtual track Set DestV Track to virtual track b
179. acks 2 Select the input channels Access the INPUT TUNER Ch9 16 page tab Select the Ch9 icon and rotate the VALUE dial to select INPUT 3 Select the Ch10 icon and rotate the VALUE dial to select INPUT 4 The input from the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 jacks has now been assigned to mixer channels 9 and 10 as mus 1001 01 000 RE Ch CAID Chil Chie Child Ch Chis ChB SEO 3 Assign the input sound to mixer channels 9 and 10 Press the track 9 10 TRACK STATUS keys to set each of them to INPUT LED lit orange 4 Use the trim to adjust the input level Press the METER TRACK VIEW key Press the button to access the dialog box Choose PreFaderLev and press the OK button Play your keyboard to input sound and the level meters of Ch 9 and Ch 10 will move accordingly Adjust the INPUT 3 and 4 TRIM knobs while watching the level meter Raise the TRIM level as high as possible don t allow the level to reach CLP when you play your keyboard with maximum veloc ity 5 Audition the sound Set the MASTER CHANNEL 9 and CHANNEL 10 faders to unity gain 0 dB Access the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page Press the MasterLR button to turn it On high lighted Gradually raise the PHONES LEVEL knob or MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob and listen to the sound in your headphones or monitor system 2 Digital Input The D1600mkII can record a digit
180. al audio signal that is input via the S P DIF jack Aa 1f you are using the digital input you will not be able to use the input from an audio CD played in the CD R RW drive The S P DIF input has a built in sampling rate converter Sources with sampling rates of 48 kHz or 32 kHz can be connected directly and will automatically be converted to 44 1 kHz Inputting audio from a DAT connected to the S P DIF jack to mixer channels 1 and 2 1 Connect the digital output device Lower the MASTER fader of the D1600mkII and use an optical digital cable to connect the digital out put of your DAT to the S P DIF IN jack 2 Enable the digital input Access the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page When you press the Digiln button a message of Obey Copyright Rules will appear Obey Copyright Rulez Are You Sure Carefully read the owner s manual section COPY RIGHT WARNING p iii If you accept the terms press the Yes button for the AreYouSure prompt Digital input will be enabled a2 sor 151000 00 000 am Chi Ch Ch ith iChSiCh Chiche oa ae chi g Aena 1e fintai aineas Tuner E 3 Specify the input channels Select the Ch1 icon and rotate the VALUE dial to select S PDIF L In the same way select S PDIF R for Ch2 The input from the S P DIF IN jack has now been assigned to channels 1 and 2 4 Assign the input sound to mixer channels
181. al for bass drum sounds etc that include the sense of air pressure charac teristic of a close mic recording Set This switches the location of the mic Close or On settings will simulate the proximity effect that boosts the low range so you will need to use Trim to adjust the overall level 147 Effect Parameter List Insert FX 2in20Ut x 2 Insert FX 2in20Ut x 2 Insert FX Linlout x 4 Insert FX Linlout x 8 Effect Control Master FX Final FX Final FX Lin2out x 2 148 Insert Effect 1in1outx4 These algorithms can be selected for an insert effect when linloutx4 is selected as Select Eff Type Different effects can be used simultaneously on four channels tracks Effects MM1 MM33 connect two mono effects in series Example Algorithm number Category number Algorithm name Names of effects in the chain 55 MM1 P4EQ Exciter P4EQ Excitl The chain structure of each multi effect is shown below For an explanation of the parameters of each effect in the chain refer to Effects within multi effect programs MM1 MM33 and their parameters beginning on the following page 55 MM1 P4EQ Exciter P4EQ Excit1 56 MM2 P4EQ Wah P4EQ Wah 57 MM3 P4EQ Cho Eng P4EQ ChFI1 58 MM4 P4EQ Phaser P4EQ Phaser 59 MM5 P4EQ Mt Delay P4EQ MtDly 60 MM6 Comp Wah Comp2 Wah 61 MM7 Comp AmpSim Comp2 A
182. alize the disc amp You cannot write any more songs to a disc that has been finalized If you want to write more than one song to a CD you must write all of the songs to the disc before pressing the Final button to finalize it O O Met Finalize MoPurthert riti ngToDisc AreYouSure el Song BE donc PrgPlay SCH 8 If you are sure you want to finalize the disc press the OK button When finalization is finished a message of Completed will appear and the CD R RW tray will open y 2 Ta de EE Completed Co 9 Remove the CD and press the OK button The original CD of your own performance is now completed Check the audio CD 1 Play back the CD in an audio CD player Creating selecting a song Here s how to create a song assign a name to it and se lect songs 000000000000000000000000009090 1 Creating a new song 1 Press the SONG CD key to access the SelSong tab page songhumber 5J000 00 000 W ELIS SISTER DANCE e Scene 0081 DEM0 SONG Selsong fe ditsongll PraPlay AEN 2 Press the New button The MakeNewSong dialog box will appear 3 Select the bit depth number of tracks and mixer settings for the song you want to create Use the SongType radio buttons to select the bit depth and number of tracks 16Bit 16Track Create a song for 16 bit recording playback Tracks 1 16 will be available 24Bit 8Track Create a son
183. an audio CD the virtual tracks that are currently selected for tracks 1 and 2 will be used To verify that the virtual tracks you intend to write are selected play back the song or access the TRACK Vtr1 8 tab page 1 Insert a blank disc into the CD R RW drive By blank disc we mean an unused CD R or CD RW A CD RW that has been used can also be completely erased and used as a blank disc Quick Start However since CD RW discs may sometimes not be playable in an audio CD player we recommend that you use CD R discs 2 Access the SONG CD CDR RW tab page Press the TS button and in the screen that appears press the OK button Make sure that CD R RW Information indicates BlankDisc or song number The free space on the disc is displayed below this minis 2 GD Monito EE Je Step 1 Quick Recording 3 Press the WriteCD button A message of Obey Copyright Rules will appear WWwriteToCD TrackatOnce 3 Obey Copyright Rules Speed Step 2 Overdubbing in dre vou Sure 4 Select the writing speed Select the writing speed that is appropriate for the disc you are using For example if the disc you are using is marked as supports 8x writ ing you can select the 8x writing speed 8x means that the disc will be written at eight times the conventional playback speed amp Depending on your system it may not be possible to write at the se
184. an example here s how to combine the audio of tracks 1 16 and overwrite record the result onto tracks 1 and 2 1 Select bounce recording as the recording mode Access the RECORD RecMode tab page Select Bounce bounce recording 2 Select the bounce mode Access the RECORD Bounce tab page Set BounceMode to 16 Tr 2Tr 3 Choose the currently selected tracks for recording Set RecordVirtualTrack to Current 4 Select the tracks that you wish to record Set the status of the tracks to be recorded tracks 1 and 2 to REC LED lit red Set the remaining tracks 3 16 to PLAY LED lit green 5 Adjust the stereo positions of the playback tracks Press the PLAY key and rotate the PAN knob to adjust the stereo positions of channels 1 16 6 Adjust the playback recording levels Use the CHANNEL faders to adjust the playback level Press the METER TRACK VIEW key Press the button to access the dialog box Select PostFaderLev so that you can view the meter dis play for each fader 7 Use the MASTER fader to adjust the recording level When you are finished making adjustments press the STOP key 8 Move the current location to the beginning of the song 9 Begin bounce recording Press the REC key to enter record ready mode LED blinking and then press the PLAY key to begin recording LED lit 10 When recording is finished press the S
185. annel to which the audio signal from each input jack will be sent This is also used when adjusting the EQ for record ing that is applied to the analog inputs In addition this key is used to access the tuner 13 EQ PHASE key This key is used to specify the EQ for track playback and phase of each channel NS These settings can be paired and registered in a scene 14 INSERT EFFECT key This key is used to select the location of an insert effect to select the effect type and to select and edit effect programs WA These settings can be registered in a scene 15 MASTER EFFECT AUX key This key is used to select and edit effect programs for master effects 1 and 2 and to set the send levels from each channel to the master effects In addition it is used to set the send amount to an external effect and to select and edit effect programs for the final effects WA These settings can be registered in a scene The send settings can be paired 16 SOLO MONITOR key This key is used to solo an individual channel send or return It is also used to select an audio source for monitoring When solo is on the LED will blink 17 METER TRACK VIEW key This key is used to display volume data level meters during recording and playback and to view audio event data in each track track view 18 SYSTEM USB key This lets you make settings for the foot switch and MIDI functions manage the disk drive and backup resto
186. annels that are too soft This will reduce the possi bility of clipping at the final stage and is the most ef fective way to mix e When Pairing is on use the odd numbered channel fader to make adjustments p 49 e Volume settings can be registered in a scene p 50 2 Adjusting the stereo position Rotate the PAN knob to adjust the stereo position of each channel Channel 1 16 PAN knobs Rotating the knob toward the L position will place the sound toward the left and rotating it toward the R posi tion will place the sound toward the right Normally vocals and bass are located in the center guitar at the left or right and piano at the opposite side from guitar e When Pairing is on use the odd numbered channel knob to make adjustments p 49 e These settings can be registered in a scene p 50 AR If the pan is paired Balance for channels 1 2 15 16 set the odd numbered PAN of the paired chan nels to the center when you wish to input to tracks 1 2 15 16 and record in stereo 3 Using EQ to adjust the tone The tone of each channel can be adjusted by a three band equalizer EQ e To adjust the input sound analog use the Input EQ INPUT TUNER InEql1 4 InEq5 8 tab pages This will affect the sound that is recorded e To adjust the track playback sound use the EQ EQ PHASE Eql1 4 Eq5 8 Eq9 12 Eq13 16 tab pages EQ can be used to cut a frequ
187. ar from your headphones or mon itor speakers 8 Record Next you will record your guitar performance on track 8 while watching the status of the recording track on the track view screen Let s start by recording a backing guitar part TRACK STATUS key setting Specify the track on which you will record 1 Press the front panel track 8 TRACK STATUS key to choose REC LED lit red Check the record mode 2 Press the RECORD key to access the RECORD RecMode tab page Verify that Select RecMode is set to Input inputcn 151001 01 000 B Select a Track View settings 3 Press the METER TRACK VIEW key 4 Press the E button to open the Select DisplayMode dialog box Select ei Cancel GE 8 CUT rkMviewS 16 oT review1 16 5 Press the TrkView1 16 radio button and then press the OK but ton to display the track view screen E Trki amp 001 01000 E F PEE BE 5 ec dE 1 2L EL R Start recording For details on the counter dis 6 Make sure that the counter display is at the beginning of the song play and how to move to a dif At the beginning of the song the counter value will be 001 01 000 ferent time refer to Changing or 000 00 000 the time location p 46 7 Press the REC key The D1600mkII will be in record ready mode and the REC and If you want to record the rhythm refer to 3 Recording
188. ark MUTE When recording from analog digital input you can 1 VA LU E dial l S arm up to eight recording tracks This is used to modify parameter values and to move RA These settings can be paired ee S 5 P l When the Scrub function is on rotating the dial will po PAN knobs Ch1 16 cause the track to play at the corresponding speed These knobs adjust the stereo location of each chan 8 CURSOR key e nel e gt This key moves the cursor Z RA These settings can be paired and registered in a g scene 2 E e E E d f 9 POWER key This turns the power of the D1600mkII on off When the D1600mkII is in standby mode pressing the POWER key will turn on the power If the D1600mkII is operating pressing and holding the POWER key for a while will cause it to shut down and enter standby mode 10 HDD CD access indicator This indicator will light when the internal hard disk is being accessed for recording or playback or when the internal CD R RW drive is operating amp Never move the D1600mkII or apply physical shock to it when this HDD CD access indicator is lit MIDI indicator This indicator will light when MIDI messages are received from the MIDI IN connector 1 18 19 20 21 meur TUNER D L insert EFFECT DE MASTER EFFECT aux D soro II Ly 1 7 i hack TRACK view Y 12 IN PUT TUN ER key This key is used to select the mixer ch
189. aster LR bus AC Fader sssssstessenscnseesenscnseuscnscnneuscnssneeneas 000 100 Adjust the amount of sub input signal that is sent to the master LR bus 3de MUE iras On Off E On The sub input will be muted it will not be sent to the master LR bus M Off The sub input will not be muted it will be sent to the master LR bus This lets you pair adjacent mixer channels Press the J button to access the following screen Off Select this if you want to use audio CD output i e select CD L and CD R for Ch1 Ch16 amp Channels that are paired will be controlled by the knobs and fader of the odd numbered channel Operating the knobs or fader of the even numbered channel will not control anything pa N LA TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER CS Um TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END OAI RHYTHM CD USB 4a Select ChannelPalr ssccsscssssesssseseeees 1 2 15 16 Press the 1 2 15 16 button for the channels that you wish to pair When pairing is On the heart icon will be displayed 4b Select Function sasasi Eq Send Aux Pan Select the functions that will be paired for the channels selected by Select ChannelPair For the functions EQ Pan that you wish to
190. attern You cannot change the starting location Start Measure of tempo map event 001 You can only specify the ending location End Measure When you have finished making settings press the OK button 3 Add tempo map events to change the tempo time signature and rhythm pattern during the song Press the New button to display Select TempoMap 002 Param Use Meas to specify the beginning Start Measure and end End Measure of the tempo map event you want to create Use Tempo to specify the desired tempo Beat to specify the time signature and Rhythm to select a rhythm pattern If you want to overwrite the existing tempo map event press the Insert button to turn it off Press the OK button to add the tempo map event The tempo map events are renumbered from beginning to end NS By adding tempo map events and using Rhythm to change rhythm patterns you can create drum patterns for an entire song including intro fill in and ending To delete or modify a tempo map event You can delete an unwanted tempo map event or modify its measure location or tempo settings etc 1 Select the tempo map event that you want to delete or modify Access the TEMPO RHYTHM TmpMap tab page Select TempoMap and turn the VALUE dial to select the appropriate tempo map event 2 Delete or modify the tempo map event If you want to delete it press the
191. attern POSItION ccccscssessseesseeesseessees This shows the number of measures length of the pat tern selected by SelRhythm and the measure number that is currently playing P3 TmpTrk Create a tempo track You can record the tempo track in either of the following two ways e Record MIDI clock You can record MIDI clock messages to synchronize the D1600mkII with data created on an external sequencer e Record tap tempo If you do not know the tempo of the audio recorded on the D1600mkII you can record tap tempo so that you will be able to manage the data and perform track editing in units of measures For the procedure of creating the tempo track refer to Tempo track p 73 A Since these two types of tempo tracks are recorded in the same area itis not possible for both tempo tracks to exist simultaneously If memory becomes full during recording recording will end Micek e 000 00 000 Select RecTempolrack Type 1 Select ReclempotTrack Type MIDIClock MeasTap Beatlap Select the type of tempo track MIDIClock The tempo track will be created by record ing MIDI Clock data from a song that was created on an external sequencer MeasTap The tempo track will be created by recording taps at the beginning of each measure BeatTap The tempo track will be created by recording taps at the beginning of each beat e ROCA atari Begin recording the tempo track E E TRANSP
192. attern from a dialog box The rhythms that can be selected will depend on the Beat Elank Cancel Sbt Rock 5 RhyhMVOl iia 000 100 Specify the volume of the rhythm When the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page Rhythm button is turned OFF this volume is sent to the master LR bus When the button is turned ON it is sent to the monitor LR bus 6 Rhy anana On Off Switches the rhythm on off A If the rhythm Rhythm L Rhythm R is as signed to a mixer channel in the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page the rhythm will sound during recording and playback regardless of this On Off setting A On The rhythm sound will be sent to the monitor LR bus or the master LR bus depending on the setting of the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page Rhythm button In this case the RHYTHM key LED will light If this is On the rhythm will be recorded during bounce recording A If this is On the rhythm will sound as long as this page is displayed even when the recorder is stopped If you press the METER TRACK VIEW key in this state to display the METER TRACK VIEW page the rhythm will continue sounding Rhuthmott Off The rhythm sound will not be sent to the monitor LR bus or the master LR bus 7 Pattern Length Pattern POSITION c sssssssessseesseeesseseans This shows the length number of measures of the rhythm pattern selected by Sel
193. available 3 DestltaCK ommm 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the swap destination track i In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available A Exec Execute cra Execute the track editing operation This displays the audio data of the track as a waveform Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track p 100 Edit Type Reverse Track This operation copies the track data of the IN OUT range of the reverse source track SourceTrack to the TO location of the destination track DestTrack in reverse flipped back to front You can specify the number of times that the data will be copied When this is executed Exec the copied data will be reversed so that the playback will be backward amp The specified range of the reverse destination track will be overwritten IN OUT SourceTrack ABC ec En EE y DestTrack DAA O8A JAA Surcerrax TE1001 01 000 D Reverselrack 6 2 az 5 trios BER EdifTrk E Tu port E 3 4 2 SourceTrack we 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the reverse source track i In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available 3 DestTrack mm 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the reverse copy destination track Ki In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available Specify the number of times that
194. button to open a confirmation dialog box BackupE611 SC ee ww Are You Sure Ha es Exec Control A MIDI H Sync A MMC Be u RstH DiskUtil Here you can specify a date timestamp for the file Press the Date button to open the dialog box select the date and time fields and turn the VALUE dial to edit them Press the Yes button and the backup will begin Effect user data will also be backed up at this time ie Effect user data is saved under a name of filename specified in steps 6 and 7 DFX You cannot save if an identically named file already exists on the USB drive You will need to change the name Restoring song data When backed up song data is restored back into the D1600mkIL the data will once again be playable To restore 1 If you are restoring from CD R RW insert the disc into the CD R RW drive Restorelist A001 01 000 _ B U RstType Destination 2 Select Restore In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to choose Restore Alternatively you can press the E button to open the Select Backup Restore Type dialog box and make your selection there 3 Select the restore source drive Press the Drive button to open the dialog box Select C CD B or U USB DOS and press the Yes button 4 Select the restore source song Press the E button to open the Select Re
195. chain Thrshl Threshold 40 0 0 0 Level at which noise reduction begins to apply Decay Dec rasa 0 20 Decay time Threshold Threshold must be adjusted according to the input level Since the input level of a guitar will differ depending on whether it has single coil or humbucking pickups adjust the input trim to an appropriate level before you adjust Threshold For a single coil guitar leave the trim set to approximately 10 at a point where the noise is not too loud and then adjust Thresh old so that the sound is not cut off unnaturally Since NR2 is optimized specifically for pre amp it operates dif ferently than NR Comp Compressor Limiter Ratio ROMO AA 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Thrshl Threshold GB J sessscassnsanvnssnnses 40 0 Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Attck Attack cri 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release NEEN 1 100 Sets the release time GLevel Gain Adjust dB S ay Sets the compressor output gain 38 CompT Tube Compressor Limiter This is a vacuum tube type compressor Ratio RADO usaras 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Thrsh Threshold dB 40 0 Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Attcek Attack ratas 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release e 1 100 Sets the release time GLevel Gain Adjust dB
196. chno 2 4 130 F 6 8 3 o 120 16beat 5 4 100 FiJazz 1 1 100 I Techno 3 4 130 E 6 8 1 6 120 16beat 6 4 100 F Jazz 2 1 100 F Techno 1 1 130 E 6 8 2 5 120 16beat 1 4 100 E Jazz 8 100 F Techno 2 1 130 E 6 8 3 5 120 1 16beat 2 5 100 Motown 4 120 E Techno 1 5 130 1 16beat 3 4 100 Motown 4 120 E Techno 2 5 130 4 4 188 pattern F 16beat 1 1 100 F Motown 1 120 E Techno 3 5 130 RhythmName Length Tempo F 1 6beat 2 1 100 E Motown 4 120 Bossa nova 4 132 bt Rocki 1 120 120 F 16beat 3 1 100 SurfRock 8 169 Bossa 4 132 8bt Rock2 8 120 E 16beat 1 3 100 SurfRock 4 169 F Bossa 1 132 8bt Bock 8 120 E 1 6beat 2 3 100 F SurfRock 1 169 E Bossa 5 132 8bt Rock4 8 120 E 16beat 3 5 100 E SurfRock 4 169 Beguine 2 120 8bt Rock5 4 120 Shuff 1 4 130 Twist 2 165 IBeguine 4 120 8bt Rock6 4 120 Shuff 2 4 130 I Twist 4 165 F Beguine 1 120 tt Rock 4 120 Shuff 3 4 130 F Twist 1 165 E Beguine 5 120 tt Bock 8 120 Shuff 4 8 130 E Twist 4 165 Mambo 2 100 l 8bt Boch 4 120 Shuff 5 8 130 Reggae 4 95 Mambo 4 100 FISbt Rocki 1 120 oTe 8 130 FiReggae 1 95 F Mambo 1 100 F 8bt Rock2 4 120 Shuff 1 5 130 HipHop 1 8 90 E Mambo 3 100 F 8bt Boch r 120 Shuff 2 4 130 HipHop 2 4 90 Salsa 8 90 E 8bt Rock A 120 I Shuff 3 8 130 HipHop 3 2 90 Salsa 2 90 E 8bt Boch 7 120 F Shuff 1 2 130 HipHop 4 2 90 F Salsa 1 90 E 8bt Bock 4 120 F Shuff 2 2 130 HipHop 5 2 90 E Salsa 3 90 F Shuff 3 1 130 HipHop 6 2 90 Gamba 4 95 E Shuff
197. command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to InsertTrack DestTrack II OO 01 000 TE IrlInsertfrack ER BU El ear Tmport ff Export DestTrack 3 Select the number of the track into which you wish to insert blank space Set DestTrack to track 1 4 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 5 Verify the results Press the IN LOC1 key to play back from the IN location and verify that the blank data was inserted correctly NS You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command Erasing data from a track Erase Track The Erase Track command erases the specified region IN OUT of recorded track data When data is erased a blank space will be created in that region e You can erase data from not only one track but from the IN OUT region of multiple tracks simultaneously WA Unlike the Delete Track command the data that fol lowed the OUT location will not be moved forward Procedure for erasing track data Erase Here s how to erase the IN OUT region of track 1 1 Register the IN and OUT times 2 Select the Erase command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to EraseTrack DestTrack II OO 01 000 Te EraseTrac
198. connector to your computer you can save data from the USB drive of the D1600mklI s hard disk onto your computer The following data can be saved to or loaded from your computer via the USB drive Song data Song data such as the data of each track and pan and effect settings etc Since this data is in the D1600mkII s own format it cannot be played or edited as audio data on your computer or another device In order to play this data you must restore it into the D1600mkIL Effect user data Data stored in the effect program user area Since this data is in the D1600mkII s own format it cannot be edited on your computer In order to edit this data you must restore it into the D1600mkIT WAV files audio files in WAV format This is audio track data that you copy to the clip board 1 Saving data to your computer amp Do not format initialize the D1600mkII s hard disk from your computer The hard disk may be formatted only by the D1600mkII itself Windows users Windows Me 2000 or later In order to use the D1600mkII with Windows 98 you will need to install a device driver For details on obtaining and installing the device driver visit the Korg website http www korg com Ki The screens that appear will depend on the system you are using The screens shown here are for Windows XP 1 Use a USB cable to connect your computer Connect the USB cable to your computer and connect the other end to th
199. ctave 2 NoteDisplaV aiii C B This shows the name of the note that is closest to the input sound It is not possible to detect the pitch if two or more notes are played simultaneously Sa Callar erro 435 440 445Hz Specify the frequency that will be the basis for tuning Normally you will set this to 440 4 SelectSource sccccsssseeeesreseees Input8 Track Nol 16 Input8 Select this when you wish to tune an external device such as a guitar Track No 1 16 Select the track whose pitch you wish to measure Move to the time location that you wish to measure then specify the track in this page and play back to measure the pitch of the specified track 18 EQ PHASE P1 Eql 4 EQ settings for mixer channels 1 4 Here you can apply EQ equalizer to the playback of tracks 14 Use these settings when you wish to apply EQ to the play back The EQ has three bands High EQ and low EQ are shelving type and the mid EQ is a peaking type with adjustable cutoff frequency 5 6 3 o 4 a 1 TrackLevelMeter 1 2 3 4 CLP 8 18 42dB This shows the input level from each track The horizontal axis indicates the channel and the vertical axis indicates the level A Lu EEN Fc 10kHz 15 0 15 0 dB Set the high EQ gain You can cut boost over a range of 15 0 15 0 dB ata 10 kHz cutoff frequency 3 MIC sd 100Hz 20 0k Hz Specifies the center frequency of the mid EQ
200. cts are always overwritten StoreEtt ect GTS GuitarMultis gt DEE ReverbHall P3 InsEff2 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 2 Select insert effect 2 and make settings for it For details refer to P2 InsEff1 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 1 p 127 P4 InsEff3 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 3 Select insert effect 3 and make settings for it This will appear only if you have selected linloutx4 or linloutx8 for SelectEffType in the InsAsn tab page For details refer to P2 InsEff1 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 1 p 127 P5 InsEff4 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 4 Select insert effect 4 and make settings for it This will appear only if you have selected linloutx4 or linloutx8 for SelectEffType in the InsAsn tab page For details refer to P2 InsEff1 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 1 p 127 P6 Ins5 8 Selection and settings for Insert Effects 5 8 Select insert effects 5 8 and make settings for them This will appear only if you have selected linloutx8 for SelectEffType in the InsAsn tab page gt p 126 Here you can select one effect from SelectEffect5 8 and edit it For details on the other parameters and buttons refer to P2 InsEff1 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 1 p 127 Esrecturaser 5 000 00 000 DEJO ero frenan DEMA
201. d1 Cutoff Hz 20 1 0k Sets the center frequency of Band 1 Eeer 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G1 Gain dB 18 0 18 0 Sets the gain of Band 1 Fc2 Band2 Cutoff Hz 50 10 0k Sets the center frequency of Band 2 Minas 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G2 Gain 08 Ratas 18 0 18 0 Sets the gain of Band 2 Fc3 Band3 Cutoff Hz 300 10 0k Sets the center frequency of Band 3 WEIT 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 G3 Gain AA 18 0 18 0 Sets the gain of Band 3 Fc4 Band4 Cutoff HZ 500 20 0k Sets the center frequency of Band 4 E 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 G4 Gain 0D escitas 18 0 18 0 Sets the gain of Band 4 Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Band1 Type Band4 Type Selects a filter type for Band 1 and 4 Special Effect SEL SE4 Category Special Effect 28 SEL St Ring Modulator Stereo Ring Modulator This effect creates a metallic sound by applying the oscillators to the input signal LPFLVvI Pre A 0 100 Sets the damping amount of the high range input to the ring modulator Fc Fixed Frequency Hz 0 12 0k Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed of the oscillator fre quency modulation Depth LFO Dept scan 0 100
202. damping amount in the low range Spread Spread nata cuan tenias 0 50 Sets the width of the stereo image of the effectsound Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds High Damp Low Damp These parameters set the damping amount of high range and low range The tone of the delayed sound becomes darker and lighter as it feeds back Spread This parameter sets the pan width of the effect sound The stereo image is widest with a value of 50 and the effect sound of both channels is output from the center with a value of 0 9 DL St Cross Delay Stereo Cross Delay This is a stereo delay and can by used as a cross feedback delay effect in which the delay sounds cross over between the left and right by changing the feedback routing Mode Stereo Cross Stereo Cross LTime L Delay Time msec 0 680 RTime R Delay Time msec 0 680 LF back L Feedback 100 100 RFback R Feedback 100 100 HiDamp High Damp 0 100 LoDamp Low Damp 0 100 Spread Spread E 50 50 Mix WMetifnd Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Switches between stereo delay and cross feedback delay Sets the delay time for the left channel Sets the delay time for the right channel Sets the feedback amount for the left channel Sets
203. data can be converted simultaneously e The converted data can be copied multiple times in succession This command can be used in ways such as the follow ing e Drum loops of different tempo can be changed to the same tempo e Phrases can be made to fit into a specific time length Procedure for expanding Expansion or compress ing Compression track data and copying it Here s how the IN OUT range of track 1 can be convert ed to the length of the TO END range of track 2 and copied there three times 1 Register the IN OUT TO and END times 2 Select the expansion compression command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to Exp CompTrack sourceTrack 5 001 01 000 A Exp CompTrack_ e Hz E Source Track DestTrack Times 3 Select the expansion compression mode Press the Mode button to access the dialog box SelectExpCompllode SelectPitch Fined Wariable For this example select Fast and Fixed Then press the OK button to return to the TRACK EditTrk tab page 4 Select the expansion compression source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 5 Select the expansion compression destination track number Set DestTrack to track 2 6 Specify the number of times that the data will be copied Set Times to 3 7 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so
204. de Exit button and press ENTER When you have exited USB mode disconnect the USB cable from the D1600mkIL WA If you are using Windows Me USB Mass Storage Device will appear as USB Drive 85 Basic operation selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 86 Macintosh users Mac OS 9 0 4 or later 1 Use a USB cable to connect your computer Connect the USB cable to the USB connector of the D1600mkII Make sure that the connector is oriented correctly and push it all the way in Access the USB Mode screen In the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page press the USB Mode button amp Do not disconnect the USB cable or turn off your computer while this screen is displayed A drive named KORG D1600 will appear on your desktop fe When you connect the D1600mkII for the first time a device driver will be installed Back up the data on your computer Open KORG D1600 that appeared in step 3 and you will see the contents of the USB drive within the D1600mkII s hard disk Copy the desired data into your computer You can also copy data from your computer into the USB drive Drag the added drive into the trash To disconnect the D1600mkII drag the drive from your desktop into the trash or sel
205. ded on an external MIDI sequencer Connect the D1600mkI and your MIDI sequencer as follows MIDI MIDI MIDI Ca GH O MIDI Sequencer en COLA CA 00000VLVAVAALAAAA D1600mkil 1 Make synchronization settings for the D1600mkII and your external MIDI sequencer Set the D1600mkII as the master and the external MIDI sequencer as the slave Make preparations so that your MIDI sequencer will synchronize to the MIDI Clock or MTC messages transmitted from the D1600mklI p 92 2 Enable control change transmission on the D1600mkII In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page turn the Mixer Control parameter Control Change Trans to ON 3 Put the external MIDI sequencer in record ready mode The mixer control data of the D1600mkII will be transmitted on MIDI channels 1 16 corresponding to tracks 1 16 Make settings on your external MIDI sequencer so that MIDI channels 1 16 will be recorded For details refer to the owner s manual of your MIDI sequencer fs For the parameters refer to the MIDI implementa tion To obtain the MIDI implementation contact your Korg distributor 4 Begin recording When you press the D1600mkII s
206. der etc To Ol ad L R oo00000 ee eect az Master recorder Digital DAT MD etc DIGITAL IN Kl DIGITAL OUT KI S P DIF IN Mic MASTER OUT L R S P DIF OUT wh GUITAR IN PHONES LEVEL OQ PHONES jack PHONES LEVEL knob fs The audio signal that is output from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and the PHONES jack is set in the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page 3 Connect your input devices To record analog signals e Guitar bass lt gt GUITAR IN jack e Mic XLR lt gt INPUT 1 INPUT 4 jacks e Synthesizers etc lt INPUT 1 INPUT 8 jacks For details on specifying how the input audio signals are sent to mixer channels and how to monitor the input sound refer to Assign audio inputs to the mixer p 36 K A guitar or bass guitar that is being sent through a compact effect device can be connected to INPUT 1 INPUT 8 Computer Powered monitors etc Oon Oon MIDI i ES to the AC outlet A MIDI a ouTURY Y wor UM Mac connector OUTPUT d SCH Deh H E SI Heil leese WI aen CAN Pp WEI Keyboard
207. der position matches the actual volume level and then adjust the level appropriately Can t hear the playback C Is the TRACK STATUS set to PLAY p 3 134 _ Has Solo been turned on to mute the track audio p 131 _ If you are using audio punch in out and cannot hear the playback of the recorded track TRACK STATUS REC outside of the in out region has the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page setting AutoIn been turned On L When cue is selected the cue level of each channel may have been lowered In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page raise the cue level Can t hear the input _ After being connected to an input jack has the input been sent to a mixer channel In the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page send the signal to a mixer channel gt p 36 123 TT Check that an audio signal is being input In the METER TRACK VIEW page set SelectDisplay to PostFdr and watch the meter to verify that audio is being input to each mixer channel Raise the CHANNEL faders and MASTER fader to appropriate positions If the meter does not move there is no input to the channel _ Are the monitor settings appropriate In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page select the signal that you wish to monitor Normally set MasterLR to On If Rhythm or Cue are turned On raise their volume levels p 132 _
208. djust the send volumes so that CLIP does not light e Final effect While watching the meter in the MASTER EFFECT AUX FinalEff tab page adjust the volume of each channel so that CLIP does not light Output e Insert effect Adjust the effect parameters or TRIM while listening to the result e Master final effect While watching the meter in the MASTER EFFECT AUX EffSnd1 EffSnd2 or FinalEff tab page adjust the effect parameters so that CLP does not light _ If distortion is occurring in the EQ make the follow ing adjustments For the analog input adjust the input EQ For play back adjust the gain of the channel EQ p 48 Effects do not apply TT Have you selected effect program number 000 Select an EffectNumber other than 000 NO EFFECT Insert effect does not apply _ Is the digital input enabled gt If Digiln is turned On in the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page the insert effects are disabled Turn the setting Off L Is the effect inserted at an appropriate location In the INSERT EFFECT InsAsn tab page set Assign to In if applying the insert effect to the input or to Trk if applying the insert effect to the playback Can t control the insert effect by expression pedal or MIDI _ Has a valid effect been selected for Asn in the SYSTEM USB
209. e SelectEffType m button and select the effect type 5 Specify the channel into which the effect will be inserted Press the InsertTo button to open the dialog box For each effect rotate the VALUE dial to set SelectCh to the input output channel After making the settings press the OK button 6 Select an effect program Use the INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 or InsEff2 tab page to select the effect that you wish to use Select EffectNumber and rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired effect program EffectNumber el OOO 00 000 LEU e Ece ferns 7 Press the PLAY key to begin playback You can also select effect programs while you listen to the playback 000000000000000000000000009090 3 Master effects The D1600mkII contains two master effects MstEff1 and MstEff2 which can be used simultaneously You can adjust the send amount from each channel to change the depth of the effect How the master effects can be used The master effects are used mainly for spatial processing reverb etc to create an overall sense of depth and bal ance For example you could use send 1 for ReverbHall and send 2 for ReverbRoom in order to use the effects to simulate a complex spatial environment In this way you can combine two different effects to produce results that would not be possible when using only a single effect Using the master effects 1 Access the M
210. e Enhancer effect is applied A 0 100 Sets the 2 band EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Sets the gain of High EQ Mix Wem Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Exciter Blend This parameter sets the depth intensity of the Exciter effect Posi tive values give a frequency pattern to be emphasized different from negative values Emphatic Point This parameter sets the frequency to be emphasized Higher values will emphasize lower frequencies Enhancer Dly L msec Enhancer Dly R msec These parameters set the delay time for the Enhancer left and right channel Specifying a slightly different delay time for the left and right channel will add a stereo image depth and width to the sound 26 DY6 St Decimator Stereo Decimator This effect creates a rough sound like a cheap sampler by lower ing the sampling frequency and data bit length You can also simulate noise unique to a sampler aliasing LPF Rre KE Off On Selects whether the harmonic noise caused by a decrease in sampling fre quency is generated or not Fs Sampling Frequency Hz 1 0k 44 1k Sets the sampling frequency Bit RESOIULION cc cececsecsscsseseeseeseeeeens 4 24 Sets the data bit length Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed A A ean 0 100 Sets the depth ofthe sampli
211. e TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp tab page use RhythmVol to adjust the volume When using the tempo map use the ImpMap tab page Edit button to adjust the volume of each map Rhythm sound does not stop or sounds doubled volume is excessive In the TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp tab page has Rhythm been turned On TEMPO RHYTHM key lit Either switch Rhythm from On to Off or use Vol to lower the volume Is the rhythm selected for monitoring In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page turn Rhythm Off Is the rhythm assigned as an input In the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page do not assign Rhythm L or Rhythm R to a channel Alternatively lower the fader of the channel that the rhythm is assigned to Pressing a key does not perform the function L Some keys do not function when the recorder is play ing or recording Stop the recorder and then perform the operation Some keys do not function while scrub is turned on Turn off Scrub and then perform the operation p 122 Could the screen be displaying a dialog box Press the Yes No OK or Cancel button to close the dialog box MIDI MIDI sequencer does not synchronize MIDI control is not possible L Is the MIDI cable connected correctly p 7 87 _ Is the MIDI cable broken
212. e USB connector of the D1600mkII Make sure that the connector is oriented correctly and push it all the way in A Turn on your computer and start up your operat ing system before you do this 2 Access the USB Mode screen peme E 001 01 000_ CheckDrive 5 USB Mode In the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page press the USB Mode button GER ELY UDE amp Do not disconnect the USB cable or turn your computer on off while this screen is displayed A drive named KORG D1600 will appear on your computer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help x 19 gt Q Back 2 Search Folders Address 3 E KORG Folders de 4 Desktop L3 My Documents d My Computer a J 3 Floppy A ep Local Disk C I 3 WXPHFPP_EN D 3 El KORG D1600 F S BACKUP J WAN D1600 Icon Back up the data on your computer Open the KORG D1600 drive that appeared in step 3 and you will see the contents of the USB drive on the D1600mkII s hard disk Copy the desired data into your computer You can also copy data from your computer into the USB drive Disconnect the D1600mkII from your computer Left click the 8 icon shown in the right side of your computer s task bar From the menu that appears left click Safely remove USB Mass Storage Device drive name Make sure that a message of You may now safely remove the USB Mass Storage Device appears Select the USB Mo
213. e the system settings editing editing effects mixer 70 5 Execute the song editing operation Press the Exec button to execute the song editing operation In the case of the screen shown in step 4 song 1 will be copied to song 2 Previously existing song 2 and any following songs will move backward i e be renumbered upward 2 Examples of song editing Copying a song Copy Song This operation copies the selected song to the desired song number You can use this when you want to create a different mix or arrangement of the same song i 2 Select the copy source song SourceSong Select the Copy Song operation In the SONG CD EditSong tab page select CopySong as the EditType Fotoe 15 000 00 000 Te e TEC Ae paz DestSong SourceSong Verify the song you want to copy Make sure that SourceSong is set to the desired copy source song Select the copy destination song number Set DestSong to the copy destination song number Execute the editing operation Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute the editing operation When the operation is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button Moving a song Move Song This operation moves the selected song to a different song number You can use this to rearrange the order of the songs 1 Ze Se
214. e total hard disk capacity the remainder of the hard disk is the song drive D1600mkil 0000000 Song Drive A A USB Drive Perform the following operations if you want to erase data from a drive or CD RW disc or if error messages appears 1 Checking the hard disk This operation detects and repairs errors on the song drive of the hard disk Execute this if error messages such as DiskBusy start appearing frequently After execu tion you can continue using the song data if there were no major errors 1 Select CheckDrive S Access the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page Choose SelOperation and use the VALUE dial to select CheckDrive S Execut 15J001 01 000 CheckDrive75 Hee USB Mode SelOperation 2 Execute the Check Drive operation Press the Exec button to open the dialog box CheckDrive Are You Sure Specify the area to be checked In this example select Unused Press the Yes button to begin checking The display will indicate Completed when check ing is finished Press the Yes button 2 Formatting the hard disk Execute this operation if you want to erase data from the entire song drive and or USB drive or if DiskError
215. e Press the up down left right CURSOR keys to move the cursor to that parameter e Ina list display screen rotate the VALUE dial to move the cursor Setting a parameter value The method of setting a parameter value will differ de pending on the type of parameter O Underlined ___ parameters and icons such as EQ Either directly press the parameter displayed in the LCD or use the CURSOR keys to move the edit cell so that the parameter is highlighted and rotate the VALUE dial to edit the value This is the typical method and also applies for underlined parameters such as Tempo parameters displayed as an icon such as EQ and changes in locate times Popup buttons and dialog boxes Use the popup button to access the dialog box and set the parameter value e When you press a popup button shown in the LCD screen a dialog box will appear e Use the CURSOR keys to move the edit cell to the popup button and press the ENTER key to access the dialog box O Toggle buttons These buttons are used to turn a function on off e Each time you press a toggle button shown in the LCD screen the setting will alternate on off e Use the CURSOR keys to select the parameter and press the ENTER key The button will turn on off each time you press it O Radio buttons These buttons are used to select one of multiple choices e When you press one of the radio buttons shown in the LCD it will be selected e Us
216. e case of the limiter applying compression will lower the over all level so you should use Gain Adjust to make adjustments Attack Release These parameters set the attack time and release time A higher attack time will cause the compression to be applied more slowly Side PEQ Insert Side PEQ Cutoff Hz Q Gain dB These parameters are used to set the EQ applied to the trigger signal The Limiter determines whether the compression is applied based on the post EQ trigger signal Setting the equalizer allows you to set the Limiter to respond to any frequency band Trigger Monitor Setting this parameter On will cause the trigger signal to be out put instead of the effect sound Use this parameter to check the trig ger signal with EQ applied Usually set this to Off 23 DY3 Multiband Limiter This effect applies the Limiter to the low range mid range and high range of the input signal You can control dynamics for each range to adjust the sound pressure of the low range mid range and high range in a different way from the EQ Ratio Ratio A 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Thrshl Threshold dB 40 0 Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Attack Attack AAA 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release 1 100 Sets the release time LoOfst Low Offset dB 40 0 Sets the low range gain of trig
217. e expansion com pression destination track will be overwritten amp The available ratio of expansion compression is limited and if the IN OUT duration is drastically different than the TO END duration an error message will appear when this is executed In general the TO END time can be changed to 50 200 of the IN OUT time IN OUT Source Track ABC TIMES Ee Ce an py DestTrack ABC ABC ABC 2 SourceTrack aia 1 16 1 2 15 16 Select the expansion compression source track For a 24 bit song only up to tracks 7 8 can be selected 3 DeStTrack wiccccscceceaeeueueaeeueaeaneusaeas 1 16 1 2 15 16 Select the expansion compression copy destination track For a 24 bit song only up to tracks 7 8 can be selected Specify the number of times that the data will be copied 5 Exec Execute sssesssesnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnn Execute the track editing operation This displays the audio data of the track as a waveform Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track gt p 100 Select how the expansion compression will be processed This will appear when you press the Mode button SelectExprCompllode SelectPitch Fined Variable 7a SelectExp CompMode ssseesseeeeens Fast Mid Best Specify the conversion mode for expansion compres sion Fast Processing speed will be given pri
218. e gain of High EQ This produces a wah effect It can be controlled using an expres LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15 HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15 Wah sion pedal FcBtm Frequency Bottom 0 100 FCTOp Frequency TOP assesseer 0 100 Mode Sweep Mode Auto Pedal LFOlvI LFO Level enana 0 100 S peed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Reso Besonancel 0 100 LEF IEPs nannan eter tata eet Off On Mode Sets the lower limit of the wah center fre quency Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency Switches between auto wah pedal con trol Sets the LFO level that is added to con trol Sets the LFO speed Sets the resonance amount Switches the wah low pass filter on and off If you wish to use an expression pedal to control the Wah select Pedal For details refer to Using a pedal to control wah p 151 Filter This is a filter with resonance whose frequency can be moved by an envelope Type Filter Type LPF BPF HPF Sens Sensitivity 0 100 Attack Attack arca 1 100 Manual Manli 0 100 Reso RESONANCE conoci 0 100 Polrty Polarity adsl AmpSim AmpSimulator Selects the filter type Sets the sensitivity Sets the attack level Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Sets the resonance amount Sets the polarity This effect simulates the aco
219. e is installed correctly p 160 Only the sound of an audio CD can be heard Is CD Monitor turned On so that the monitor sound is not output If CD Monitor is On all sound other than the sound from the CD drive will be muted Turn this Off unless you are using the CD drive to monitor an audio CD gt p 111 No sound from AUX OUT External effect does not apply AUX OUT p 155 Can t hear the rhythm p 155 Can t hear the Scrub playback Have you selected the wrong track in the Scrub page gt Select the correct track 153 ces Various Troubleshooting messages Hard disk and CD R RW drive Specifications MIDI implementation chart Effect Program Block diagram List List Rhythm Pattern Index Demo Song I Channel fader or EQ does not work Faders do not work When pairing is on the faders of even numbered channels 1 16 will not function The volume level of an even numbered channel is controlled by the fader of the adjacent odd numbered channel to the left L When you turn pairing off after it had been on or after Scene Read is used the volume levels of the channels may not match the fader positions Raise and lower the faders so that the fader positions match the actual volume levels During playback channel faders whose TRACK STATUS is REC are used to adjust the
220. e left and right S peed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed K nl 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Fdback Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range Mix Wem se Wet 1 99 Dry Sets the balance between the effect and 1 99 Wet dry sounds LFO Shape Changing the LFO waveform shape controls the peak sweep of flanging effects Feedback Wet Dry The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value is dif ferent The harmonics will be emphasized when the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you set a positive value for both Feed back and Wet Dry and if you set a negative value for both Feedback and Wet Dry High Damp This parameter sets the amount of damping of the feedback in the high range Increasing the value will cut high range harmonics 16 MO 3 St Phaser Stereo Phaser This effect creates a swell by shifting the phase It is very effec tive on electric piano sounds This is a stereo effect and you can control the spaciousness of the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other LFO LFO Waveform cesses TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Phase LFO Phase degree
221. e maximum value in Max and the minimum value in Min When you have finished making settings press the OK button In the EffectAlgorithm dialog box press the OK button MS If you wish to save the above settings save your data as described on 5 Editing an effect step 8 p 56 Operate the expression pedal or external MIDI controller to control the effect MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 31 St 7 Using an external effect A send signal can be output from the AUX OUT jack and processed by an external effect The output of the external effect can then be returned to the INPUT 1 INPUT 8 jacks and sent to the desired channels or to the master LR bus As an example here s how the playback sound can be sent to an external effect and returned to the master LR bus via the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 jacks 1 Connect your external effect processor Connect the AUX OUT jack of the D1600mkII to the INPUT jack of your external effect processor and connect the OUTPUT jacks of the external effect processor to the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 jacks of the D1600mkII 2 Send the playback sound to the external effect Access the MASTER EFFECT AUX AuxSend tab page Select Aux for the channel s that you wish to send to the external effect and rotate the VALUE dial to adju
222. e the CURSOR keys to move the edit cell to the desired button and press the ENTER key O Selecting an item from a list e To select a song or mark rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired item e To select a song in a program play list use the fol lowing procedure 1 Select the playback list number 2 Rotate the VALUE dial to select the song Parts and their function Objects in the LCD screen and their functions Preparations Listening to the demo song 10 Preparations 1 Connections The diagram below shows a basic example of connec tions when using the D1600mkII to record Make the appropriate connections for your system substituting your own equipment as necessary for the equipment shown here amp Be sure that the power is turned off while you are making connections If the power is on while connec tions are being made your speaker system may be damaged or other malfunctions may occur 1 Connect the included power supply cable Connect the power supply cable to the D1600mkII s AC connector Then plug the other end into an elec trical outlet 2 Connect your audio monitoring system Use a phone cable to connect powered monitors etc to the MONITOR OUT L R jacks If you will be monitoring through headphones con nect the 1 4 phone plug of your headphones to the PHONES jack Use the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the volume Master recorder Analog cassette tape recor
223. e the current time to the location where you wish to begin recording Start recording from the beginning of the song 001 01 000 or 000 00 000 3 Press the TRACK STATUS key of the track that you wish to record to set the status to REC LED lit red 4 Enter record ready mode Press the REC key The REC and PLAY LEDs will blink 39 Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Ee po teem Assign audio inputs Playback Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 40 5 Start recording Press the PLAY key The REC and PLAY LEDs will light Begin playing 6 Stop recording When you have finished playing press the STOP key The REC and PLAY LEDs will turn off When you have finished recording verify that the performance was recorded correctly 7 Move to the beginning of the song 8 Specify the track s for playback Press the TRACK STATUS key of the track you recorded to set its status to PLAY LED lit green 9 Begin playback Press the PLAY key The PLAY LED will light 10 Stop playback When you are finished playing back press the STOP key The PLAY LED will turn off 2 Recording on virtual tracks The D1600mkII has sixteen tracks and each of these tracks has eight virtual tracks For example when recording
224. e upper limit of the wah center Mode Sweep Model Auto Pedal LFO Selects the control from auto wah mod S peed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Reso Besonancel 0 100 Sets the resonance amount EPP ALP EE Off On Switches the wah low pass filter on and off Mode Select Pedal if you wish to use an expression pedal to control the wah Compl Compressor1 Sense Sensitivity 1 100 Attack Attack 1 100 Level Output Level wees 0 100 Sets the output level of the compressor Comp2 Compressor2 Sets the intensity depth of the Exciter effect Sets the frequency range to be empha sized Sets the EQ input level Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ frequency ulation source and LFO Sets the LFO speed Sets the sensitivity Sets the attack level This effect adds Pre LEQ and Pre HEQ to Compl Sense Sensitivity 1 100 Attack ATSC EE 1 100 Trim EQ Tom 0 100 LEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15 Sets the sensitivity Sets the attack level Sets the EQ input level Sets the gain of High EQ HEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15 Level Output Level seen 0 100 Lmtr Limiter Ratio Ratio 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Thrshl Threshold dB 40 0 Attck Attack portador 1 100 Relse Release rr 1 100 GLevel Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24 AmpSim Amp Simulator Type
225. e vou Sure Carefully read the COPYRIGHT WARNING sec tion of the manual p iii If you accept the terms select the writing speed Select a writing speed that is supported by the disc you are using NS Depending on your system you may not be able to write at the selected speed If so try a slower writing speed Press the Yes button and the D1600mkII will begin creating an image file R9 If you press the Abort button while the image file is being created creation of the image file will be stopped Then the D1600mkII will begin writing the CD K If you press the Abort button while the CD is being written writing will stop If you were writ ing to CD R that disc will be unusable However if you were writing to CD RW you will be able to erase that disc and use it again as a blank disc For details refer to 3 Erasing the data from a CD RW p 83 When writing is finished the display will indicate Completed If you want to write the same song to another CD press the Yes button If not press the No button If you press the Yes button the CD R RW tray will open When you insert a new blank disc or an unfinalized disc and close the tray writing to the CD will begin automatically Since the previously created image file will be used in this case the writing process will be faster than the first time When writing is finished the display will indicate Co
226. e with the beginning of recording on the D1600mkII If you want to start recording from the beginning of the audio CD use Trigger Recording 10 To stop recording press the STOP key To stop playback of the audio CD before it ends press in the SONG CD CDR RW page W When you finish recording press the track 1 and 2 TRACK STATUS keys to set them to Play LED green and play the song from the begin ning to verify that the recording occurred cor rectly 161 Various Troubleshooting messages E 6 3 p f Specifications MIDI implementation chart Effect Program Block diagram List List Rhythm Pattern Index Demo Song 162 Specifications Operating temperature range 5 35 C do not allow condensation E Specifications lt Recorder section gt Number of tracks 128 tracks including virtual tracks 16 tracks simultaneous playback 8 tracks simultaneous recording 16 bits 8 tracks simultaneous playback 4 tracks simultaneous recording O 24 bits 24 bit 16 bit uncompressed 44 1 kHz 16 bit recording maximum 122 hours 24 bit recording maximum 61 hours Recording format Recording time Storage capacity 40 GB hard disk however 2 GB is used as a USB drive Number of songs 100 songs per drive Locate points four points per song Mark points 100 points per song marks can be named Metronome patterns 96 Rhythms 215 MMC functions Synchronization
227. eClhy INS the tenp E 72 Di 75 1 Backing up and restoring song data 75 2 Backing up and restoring effect user data 77 De Dana WAV Tea 79 4 Data compatibility with other models in the Digital Recording Studio serieg 81 DEN 82 1 Checking the hard disk issiiionaciiano tines 82 2 Formatting the hard dek 82 3 Erasing the data from a CD RW eee 83 4 Using the drive capacity etficently 83 EE 85 1 Saving data to your computer eee 85 Updating the system e 86 1 Downloading the system file 0 0 eee 86 2s Update thie system 86 MD ECO O 87 e HIER GE 87 2 MIDI messages used by the D1600mkKI 87 SE MID ld sida 87 Reference NN GI Tc COUNTER isicrirara aaa 91 Counter Counter display aire 91 2 SY STEMI USB io 91 P1 Control Foot switch control change device pedal MIDI settings aan 91 PZ MIDI MIDI Seting sarral 92 P3 Sync Synchronization settings cooccnoccocanonconeninnnnos 92 PAMMESMMEO SEN Spa 93 P5 B U Rst Backup restore using a removable disc93 P6 DiskUtil Managing drives eects 96 Ji RECORD S 99 P1 RecMode Selecting the recording mode 99 P2 Bounce Settings for bounce recording 99 Ai AG A ieeueues e S 100 P1 Vtr1 8 Select virtual tracks LH 100 P2 Vtr9 16 Select virtual tracks OJI 100 FS Edit ee 100 Di Import Import a WAV file eee 106 P5 Export Exporta WAV Tiles nicas 107 9 DONG Dia ci 108 P1 SelSong Selecting a OB rinitis 108 PZ
228. eS You must use a MIDI sequencer that supports MMC These following operations are not possible with a sequencer that does not support MMC MMcMaster 12J001 01 000 Hihi Dev BBE Select MMC Mode Cott Control MOT ff Sune A ur A 1 Make MIDI connections Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of your MIDI sequencer to the MIDI IN connector of the D1600mkII CEE E v000OV0VLVLVVLLOVLAAAS A A MIDI Sequencer D1600mkIl 2 Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it will output MMC messages to control external devices For details refer to the owner s manual for your MIDI sequencer 3 Turn on MMC reception In the SYSTEM USB MMC tab page set Select MMCMode to Receive 4 Set the device ID settings to match Set MMCDevID to the same setting as the MMC device ID of your MIDI sequencer MS Since the device ID specifications may differ depending on the type of your MIDI sequencer it may not be necessary for the number to be the same Basic operation Creating selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown
229. eated on the D1600mkII can also be used on these models Song data and effect user data will appear in the D12 D1200 D1200mkI drive list as D12 B However the data of tracks 13 16 cannot be restored amp As mentioned above some D12 insert effects use a different algorithm than the D1600mkII Data compatbility with the D16 and D1600 A CD R or CD RW created on the D16 or D1600 can be used in the same way as D1600mkII data A CD R or CD RW created on the D1600mkII can also be used by these devices Compatibility of data saved to computer via the USB connector Data compatibility with the D1200 and D1200mkil When data created on the D1200 or D1200mkII is restored into the D1600mkIL it can be used in the same way as D1600mkII data When D1600mkII data is restored into the D1200 or D1200mkII it can be used in the same way as D1200 or D1200mkII data However the song data of tracks 13 16 cannot be restored LO pa Basic operation Creating selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 82 Drive The D1600mkII s internal hard disk is divided into a song drive used to record and play back the songs you record and a USB drive used to exchange data with your computer WA The size of the USB drive is fixed as 2 Gbytes of th
230. ecord the second take y First take Second take O To erase A and B from the first take Execute the Optimize Track operation on the track you recorded from the beginning of the song to the end This will create new audio data that contains the intro from the first take A and B from the second take and the solo from the first take A and B from the first take will be erased Example 3 You recorded A and B on the first take and intro A B and solo on the second take The A and B audio data you recorded on the first take will remain in the track However at the point you finish recording the second take the audio data of the first take is not used at all and thus the data of the first take will not occupy space on the drive In other words in this case there is no need for you to execute the Optimize operation A B First take First take E Second ake Introl Ar B Soo Erasing the Undo data The D1600mkII lets you execute the Undo operation up to 99 times Old data is kept on the drive so that you can do this If you want to erase this Undo data simply restart the D1600mkI When you restart all of the Undo data will be erased recovering the space on the hard disk Sharing audio data When you execute Copy Track to copy track data into an other track or song the copy source and copy destina tion will share the same audio data This means that no additional space will be used on the
231. ect Remove from the Special menu In the USB Mode dialog box press the Exit button to exit the USB Mode dialog box Disconnect the USB cable from the D1600mkII Updating the system 1 Downloading the system file You can download the latest system file from the Korg website http www korg com For details refer to the Korg website Using a CD RO M RI RW Insert the media containing the system file into the CD R RW drive Using USB Use a USB cable to connect the D1600mkII to your computer and copy the system file into the root level of the USB drive the same location as the KORG folder 2 Updating the system 1 Load the system file In the SelOperation field of the SYSTEM USB DiskUtil tab page choose LoadSystem C if you want to load from CD ROM R RW or LoadSystem U if you want to load from the USB drive Execute J001 01 000 Load System EC USE Mode SelOperation 2 Execute loading Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to begin loading Exe oading warning Do not disconnect power Please wait restart amp If the power is turned off while the system is being loaded the D1600mkII may stop operating correctly If this occurs please contact your Korg distributor 3 When loading is completed the D1600mkI will check whether the system file was loaded correctly
232. ed to the INPUT 1 INPUT 8 GUITAR IN jacks will be input to the channel CD L R The output of the audio CD inserted in the CD R RW drive will be input to the channel Select L for an odd numbered channel and R for an even numbered channel These CD inputs can be selected only if Digiln is Off S PDIF L R The digital output of the DAT or other device connected to the S P DIF IN jack will be input to the channel This can be selected only if Digiln is On amp Insert effects cannot be used Rhythm L R The rhythm you selected in SelRhythm p 116 will be input to the channel If you select this the rhythm will sound during recording and playback regardless of the Rhythm p 116 On Off setting This rhythm can be recorded p 72 Select L for an odd numbered channel and R for an even numbered channel Ze DIGI naaa On Off This setting is common to the Ch9 16 tab page On Select this if you want to use digital input i e select SPDIF L or SPDIF R for Ch1 Ch16 When you turn this On the Obey Copyright Rules message will appear Carefully read the owner s manual section COPYRIGHT WARNING p iii If you accept the terms press the Yes button in response to the Are You Sure message Digital input will be ena bled A Insert effects cannot be used Obey Copyright Rules l Ar
233. effect 1 gt p 129 P5 AuxSend External send settings Here you can set the send level from each mixer channel that will be output to the AUX OUT jack For details on connecting and using an external effect refer to p 58 ce 001 01 000 eta 3 1 2 1 SendLevelMeter SND A CLP 8 18 42dB This shows the output level to the AUX OUT jack The vertical axis shows the level Ze PUK cios Ch1 16 000 100 Set the send amount from each mixer channel to the AUX OUT jack Specify pairing for adjacent mixer channels For details refer to P1 Ch1 8 Select the inputs for mixer channels 1 8 Pair p 123 130 P6 FinalEff Selection and settings for the final effect The final effect is applied to the overall output from the mixer and is used mainly to adjust the overall balance For the location at which the final effect is inserted refer to the block diagram p 165 1 OutputLevelMeter O UTL R CLP 8 18 42dB This shows the output level of the effect The horizontal axis shows the effect output and the vertical axis shows the level 2 Effect umber FOOO F001 032 4033 064 Select the desired effect program u033 u064 is the user area in which you can store effect programs that you edited 3 EffectProgramN ame u ssccsssssessseeees Effect Program List When you press this button the Effect Algorithm dia
234. eing soloed the SOLO MONITOR key will blink You can select more than one signal to solo Bea 000000107 a a Y Y Y E E 2 Adjust the monitor volume Use the MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob or PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the volume level To turn solo off e Access the SOLO MONITOR Solo tab page and turn the Solo button Off e By pressing the ClearAll button you can turn off all solo settings O utputting the solo signal from master LR If desired the solo signal can be output from MASTER OUT L R Do this when you wish to output the solo signal from a monitor system connected to the MASTER OUT L R jacks O In the SOLO MONITOR Solo tab page turn the SoloToMstOut button On highlighted However this will automatically be turned off when you exit the SOLO MONITOR page 7 Registering and playing scenes Mixer settings you make can be registered as a scene and selected automatically as playback progresses Frequently used settings can also be registered and recalled when desired to reproduce the mixer settings at another time or part of the settings can be modified and overwritten NS Up to 100 scenes can be registered for each song The following settings can be registered in a scene e EO e Effect settings e EffSnd effect send e AuxSend auxiliary send e PAN knob e CHANNEL fader Scene 1 Scene 2 Scene 3 Scene 4 Interlude
235. elect Rhythm L In the same way set Ch2 to Rhythm R 3 Check the record mode Select the RECORD RecMode tab page Select Input record the input 4 Specify the recording tracks Press TRACK STATUS keys for tracks 1 and 2 to set them to REC LED lit red 5 Adjust the recording level and record Use the CHANNEL faders of tracks 1 and 2 to adjust the level appropriately 4 Specifying the tempo As an alternative to playing your entire song at the same tempo you can make the tempo change during the song or synchronize the tempo to an external MIDI device Choose one of the following tempo sources to control the tempo of the song e Manual tempo when the tempo is the same for the entire song e Tempo map when you want the tempo to change dur ing the song e Tempo track when you want to use the tempo recorded from MIDI Clock or Tap Tempo O The tempo source is set by the TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp tab page TempoSource setting ee 001 01 000 126 6404 RhythmeOtt Setup Tmpttap BT TempoSource SelRhythm Tempo Beat Here s how to use each type of tempo setting Manual tempo When you use manual tempo the song will play back according to the Tempo tempo Beat time signature and SelRhythm rhythm pattern settings the tempo etc will not change during the song Set the tempo source to Manual Access the TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp
236. elect Backup Restore Type dialog box and make your selection there Execute E 001 01 000 Source B U Rstlype Destination Select U USB DOS as the backup destination drive Press the Drive button to open the dialog box Choose U USB DOS and press the Yes button Select the effect that you want to back up Move the cursor to Source and use the VALUE dial to select Ins055 Verify the backup destination drive and filename The name of the effect you are backing up will be the filename Make sure that U effect name is selected as the Destination Edit the filename Press the Rename button and use the Rename File dialog box to edit the filename p 35 K If a file of the same name already exists on the USB drive you will not be able to save Please change the name MS If you select all effects EffAll the name of the currently selected song will be the name of the effect user data file Execute the backup Press the Exec button to display the confirmation screen Exeo ackup UserData Are vou Sure Erec Control MOT A Eeer Here you can specify a date timestamp for the file Press the Date button to open the dialog box select the date and time fields and use the VALUE dial to edit them Press the Yes button and the backup will begin Restoring effect user data To restore 1 When resto
237. elected channel fader settings When you select an icon the channel number and set ting value will be displayed in the upper left ban fader guide sssssscseass li rf These symbols show the difference between the actual fader or pan locations and the values that are registered in the scene When a scene is recalled the current position of the fad ers may differ from the values registered in the scene In this case selecting the item that you wish to adjust will cause an indicator symbol to appear showing the approximate difference between the internal setting value and the control Faders The fader position is more than 51 steps above the internal value The fader position is between 21 50 steps above the internal value The fader position is between 1 20 steps above the internal value The fader position matches the internal value The fader position is between 1 20 steps below the internal value t The fader position is between 21 50 steps below the internal value T The fader position is more than 51 steps below the internal value Pan The pan knob is more than 51 steps to the left of the internal value The pan knob is between 21 50 steps to the left of the internal value The pan knob is between 1 20 steps to the left of the internal value The pan knob matches the internal value The pan knob is between 1 20 steps to the right of the internal value
238. enabled in 2 Transmitted if MTC Mstr is selected in SYSTEM USB Sync SYSTEM USB MIDI 3 Transmitted if Clock Mstr is selected in SYSTEM USB Sync 7 Transmitted received if ProgChange is enabled in SYSTEM USB MIDI 4 Received if MIDIClock is selected for SelectRecTempoTrackType in 8 Transmitted if MMC Mode Transmit is selected in SYSTEM USB MMC TEMPO RHYTHM TmpTrk and tempo is being recorded 9 Received if MIDISync Mode MTC Slave is selected in SYSTEM USB 5 Received to control effects when selected in SYSTEM USB Control Sync Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No Consult your local Korg distributor for more information on MIDI IMPLEMENTATION Bn ES Ki x O i co S z SAUP MY 4 09 sn Pu gooys jqNoIL snouepA pue Sip pIeH suone gt ypbseds oe So elt aN PY LUeISe mp pog Ue 1b01d Puy dek e Il Il ETENA EE TTT anton UY RUY qISsSATEUTA 440740 SSedag Ino 33158n ZPISIFAASTSEH SOUETEg SNQ4O TUOWO 1 gt i S oros S3NOHd O 15407 TUONI y O a sch ino SaOLINOW 9TLASUNL 9143 nm a STIASUNL ES o FIL Aeunml Iw a a T 23443434 S8 H ET LASUNA KE ALT BS I jotes ura vape ege LS i cusrssgya 10 4O4TUOH a Z d ET LAU ZIL g
239. ency range in which un wanted noise hiss is heard or to boost cut the low or high range to correct the tone Normally you should make EQ settings so that the audio is heard more clearly If you use EQ excessively by boosting the EQ gain of a channel to the maximum setting the overall mix will become unbalanced EQ can be used in the cut Minus direction as well Applying EQ to the track playback e When Pairing is on use the odd numbered channel Eq to make adjustments p 49 e These settings can be registered in a scene p 50 1 Select the tab page that contains the EQ you wish to adjust Select from the EQ PHASE Eq1 4 Eq5 8 Eq9 12 and Eq13 16 tab pages 001 01 000 Isi Eat er Phase 2 Select the desired EO For each channel the EQ controls are arranged as fol lows e High EQ gain H upper right icon e Low EQ gain L upper left icon e Mid EQ gain M lower right icon e Mid EQ center frequency F lower left icon 3 Adjust the gain and center frequency Adjusting the gain in the negative direction will cut the signal and adjusting it in the positive direction will boost it Increasing the center frequency value will raise the frequency and decreasing the value will lower the frequency High EQ Low EO e Select Hi EQ Gain H or Low EQ Gain L of the channel you want to adjust and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the gain The nu
240. ensenscnserserccrens 99Level 8Level 1Level Specifies the undo level The number of previous operations you specify here will be saved You can select either 99 8 or 1 as the number of undo levels D Undo Level ssusssnunnsuunsnnnnnnnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Shows the undo level you specified in Level 6 Undo sssssannssnnunnnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Executes Undo You will return to the state prior to executing the opera tion you selected in the UndoList Executes Redo You will return to the state of Level 00 A The contents of the list are preserved until you perform the next recording or track editing operation When you record or edit the data for levels following the last performed Undo will be erased The contents of the list will also be erased if you select a different song and record or edit it amp The D1600mkI s hard disk recording preserves a history of the up to 99 most recent recordings edits or operations letting you use the Undo function to return to a previous working state This means that old data that no longer exists in a track will still remain on the hard disk This data will occupy space on the disk decreasing the available recording time In such cases you can recover this disk space by turning the D1600mkII off and then on again to erase the Undo data 3 EFSI cuisine 000 700ms 1 4 TRIG G ER When trigger recordi
241. eo file Write CD Failed L Failed to write the CD Try writing to CD R RW at a slower speed Appendices About the hard disk and CD R RW drive The D1600mkII is shipped with a removable hard disk and CD R RW drive installed at the factory Please use caution when moving or transporting the D1600mkII 1 Hard disk The hard disk is installed as follows Troubleshooting Various messages Specifications MIDI implementation chart Effect Program Block diagram List List Rhythm Pattern Index Demo Song 159 2 About the CD R RW drive Cautions for handling Make sure that the unit is level when operating Do not use in extremely cold or hot locations Do not use in locations of high humidity Do not use this unit in locations of excessive dust or smoke e Do not apply strong physical shock to the unit In par ticular the unit is highly sensitive to physical shock during operation either reading or writing and must not be jarred e Normally the drive uses software ejection Although the CD tray can be opened by pressing the eject button you can also make the tray open by inserting a pointed object such as straightened paper clip into the emergency eject hole e Do not store the unit in high temperature or high humidity Never touch the focussing lens Do not use commercially available lens cleaners Do not transport the unit with a disc left in the drive Do
242. er for Control Device External control is disabled This lets you compare the sound processed by the effect with the unprocessed effect Press the Bypass button to bypass the effect the unprocessed sound will be heard Press the Cancel button to cancel bypass e Rena Me sasssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Here you can modify the name of the effect program Select the effect program whose name you wish to modify press the Rename button to access the dialog box and modify the name A name of up to 16 characters can be used For details refer to 2 Naming a song p 35 amp After modifying the program name use Store to store it The effect program name you modified will be discarded unless you use Store to store it pa N TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO FF IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR FX AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB 128 The effect program whose name or parameters you modified can be stored in user areas U001 U128 The D1600mkII provides 128 user areas for insert effects In the StoreEffect dialog box specify the user area number and press the Exec button to store the effect To cancel press the Cancel button A Effe
243. es are not able to read a CD unless it has been finalized A If there is no space remaining on the CD R RW disc it will be finalized automatically Exec Execute Executes the WAV file export operation Eer 24 16bit Dither H re toute tri JZE Gai Export SIZE 16bit 24bit You have this choice only if the clipboard contains 24 bit data This specifies whether the 24 bit data that you copied to the clipboard will be exported as a 16 bit WAV file or a 24 bit WAV file bb Dither Wisin On Off You have this choice only when exporting 24bit 16bit This specifies whether the 24 bit data you copied to the clipboard will be dithered when it is exported as a 16 bit WAV file Gg On Dithering will be performed to make quantization noise less noticeable Off Dithering will not be performed 5 SONG CD 000000000000000000000000009090 P1 SelSong Selecting a song Songilumber 5 000 00 000 F 1 LEIN Demo zong gg 2 Hue Tempo Manu 128 64 04 Metrod SelSona Edson PraPlay Icon L SONON UMD ciaci n 001 100 Selects the song The display indicates the song number song name The 84 icon indicates that a 24 bit song is selected and jm indicates that the song is protected You can press the IF button and select a song from the list DemoSon gh 1 UE 1 SIS Demo onop Cancel Demosoangee4 R You can also select a song by holding down the STOP key and
244. ets the reverberation time Sets the damping amount in the high range PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200 Sets the delay time of the reverb sound and gate control signal EQTrim EQ Trim ates teehee 0 100 Sets the EQ input level LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 15 Sets the gain of Low EQ HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 15 Sets the gain of High EQ RevBal Reverb Balance Dry 1 99 99 1 Sets the effect balance of the reverb Wet Gate Contrl Input Reverb Mix Dry 1 99 99 1 Sets the balance between the dry and Wet reverb sounds of the gate control signal Polrty Polarity aaa sora Switches between non reversed and reversed Gate on off Thrshl Threshold ataca cara taria 0 100 Sets the level to which the Gate is applied Attack Attack rancios 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release ocoocociciciciconininicnconoos 1 100 Sets the release time Insert Effect linloutx8 These algorithms can be selected as an insert effect if linloutx8 is selected for SelectEffType Different insert effects can be used on each of eight channels tracks Effects MN1 MN11 are monaural type effects Ze linloutx8 effects cannot be controlled by an expression pedal etc 88 MN1 OverDrive HighGain The parameters are the same as for ODHIG 89 MN2 Compressor2 The parameters are the same as for Comp2 90 MN3 Limiter The parameters are the same as fo
245. evouSure I DNR Ach3 16 AinEgi 4AInE95 84 Tuner Make these settings when you wish to use the inputs as sub inputs p 60 for inputting the return from an external effect to the INPUT 1 INPUT 8 GUITAR IN jacks or so that the sound of an instrument connected to these jacks can be mixed with the track playback After completing a song on the D1600mkIl you can synchronize a sequencer to the D1600mkII and use sub inputs to mix the sequenced sounds with the track playback of the D1600mkKII These inputs are sent via the stereo mono switch through the balance and fader settings and then to the master LR bus IS Use the AUX OUT jack to transmit the effect send to your external effect processor For details refer to MASTER EFFECT AUX AuxSend tab page p 130 3a Stereo MONO ssssssansnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Stereo Mono Stereo Odd numbered channel inputs will be sent to the master L bus and even numbered channel inputs will be sent to the master R bus f Mono Odd numbered and even numbered channel inputs will be summed and the same signal will be sent to the master L bus and R bus Use this when the input is received on only one channel amp If the sound distorts when this is set to Mono ad just the level on the input device or using the TRIM knob 3b BalanCe ssssssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns L63 CNT R63 Adjust the balance for when the sub input is sent in stereo to the m
246. ey to move toward the beginning of the song If you hold down the key you will rewind continuously You can also rewind during playback Moving forward Press the FF key to move toward the end of the song If you hold down the key you will fast forward continuously You can also fast forward during playback Moving to the beginning of the song While in the middle of the song hold down the STOP key and press the REW key to return to the beginning of the song Moving to the end of the song While in the middle of the song hold down the STOP key and press the FF key to jump to the end of the song Using the locate keys to move LOC1 LOC2 LOC3 LO C4 You can register specific times in the locate keys and jump instantly to those times Up to four locate points can be registered for each song Use the IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 and END LOCA keys K In addition to recalling the locate times that you reg ister these keys are also used to specify the time loca tions for auto punch recording IN OUT times and for track editing the editing region For details on the various locate functions refer to p 118 Registering a locate point 1 Move the current time to the location that you wish to register Use the counter Counter or the FF REW keys to change the current time 2 Press the STORE key to capture the selected time location Son ELO OA Hot 5 641 081 006 toredTime
247. ffects you can select will depend on this setting For the effects available in each structure refer to Effect Program List p 166 SelectEffectType E linzoutse FF Ci 2inZoutye 338 Clin doutss O lintoutsd 1in2outx2 Choose this if you want to use two mono in stereo out effects This is the best choice when you want to add spaciousness to a lead guitar or vocal You can also use these as 1 in 1 out monaural effects amp You cannot select this if Assign is Trk 2in2outx2 Choose this if you want to use two stereo in stereo out effects This is the best choice for stereo input sources such as a keyboard linloutx4 Choose this if you want to use four mono in mono out effects This is the best choice for sources with a fixed location such as rhythm guitar linloutx8 Choose this if you want to use eight mono in mono out effects This is the best choice for fixed location sources such as drums 3 Insert ssssssnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnn Select the location at which the insert effect will be inserted Press the button to access the dialog box and make settings Press the OK button to execute your settings or press the Cancel button to cancel them The screen that appears next will differ according to what you choose for Assign amp When you specify the insertion location of insert effect the setting of the lower nu
248. following procedure to turn on the power of the D1600mkII and of the devices connected to it amp Before turning the power on be sure to lower the vol ume of each device to the minimum position and turn the devices on beginning with the first device in the signal chain Ge devices that produce audio sig nals 1 Lower the D1600mkII s MASTER fader to msm the position Also turn down the vol ume of each connected device pote H Il 11 2 Turn on the power of the external input device such as a keyboard connected to the D1600mkII Se 3 Turn on the Main power of the D1600mkII The STANDBY LED will light The D1600mkII will be in standby mode 4 Press the POWER key of the D1600mkII to turn on the power The opening message will appear in the LCD screen and then the SONG CD SelSong tab page will appear The selected song will be the one that had been selected when the power was last turned off INN eee ee ee za d 8 5 Turn on the power of your external equipment such as the monitor system to which audio is being sent from the D1600mkII Turning the power off When you are finished playing or recording a song turn off the power If you will not be using the D1600mkII for an extended time e g when you have finished work for the day be sure to turn off the main power so that the power is turned off completely Use the following proce dure to turn off the power of
249. for which you have received permission from the copyright holder to publicly perform record broadcast sell and duplicate or in connection with activities which constitute fair use under copyright law If you are not the copyright holder have not received permission from the copyright holder or have not engaged in fair use of the works you may be vio lating copyright law and may be liable for damages and penalties If you are unsure about your rights to a work please consult a copyright attorney KORG TAKES NO 4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY INFRINGEMENT COM MITTED THROUGH USE OF KORG PRODUCTS CLASS 1 LASER CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT TO IEC LASER KLASSE 1 NACH IEC 60825 1 S Company names product names and names of formats etc are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Table of Contents IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS li THE FCC REGULATION WARNING for U S A ii CE mark for European Harmonized Standarda 11 Data handling mirta sd iil IntroductiON o oocococooco2 1 ts Main de atrasa elle 1 2 Printing conventions in this manual 2 een Included Mead dai 2 Parts and their function ENEE 3 b TOPPE NEE 3 Ze 5 104 0109 PANE cpp eats 5 Os ARCA PANE acct reas eae eee emanate 6 Objects in the LCD screen and their functions 8 1 Objects in the CD Seria 8 2 Adjusting the LCD screen contrast 8 Basic operation
250. g for 24 bit recording playback Tracks 1 8 will be available Use the Mixer Set radio buttons to select the desired mixer settings gt p 109 SongType Mixer Set CE Cancel Mixer Set 4 Press the OK button A song named NEWSONG will be created follow ing the last song that currently exists 2 Naming a song Songs on the D1600mkII have a song number and a song name The song number is a number in the range of 001 100 assigned in the order in which each song was created You can freely specify a song name of up to sixteen characters MS A newly created song will have a name of NEW SONG We recommend that you assign a different name so that you will be able to distinguish it from other songs Press the SONG CD key to access the SelSong tab page E songhumber 0071 01 000 KA ELES HEWS ONG Rename E Tempo Manu 120 04 04 Metrod 2 Press the Rename button The RenameSong dialog box will appear 3 Modify the song name Use the 44 buttons to move the cursor in the song name to the character that you wish to change and rotate the VALUE dial to modify the name The buttons in the LCD screen have the following function 0 9 Select numerals e g 0 A a Select alphabetical characters e g A Press the button once again to select lowercase alpha betical characters e g a
251. ger signal MdOfst Mid Offset dB 40 0 Sets the mid range gain of trigger signal HiOfst High Offset dB 40 0 Sets the high range gain of trigger signal GLevel Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 424 Sets the output gain Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Low Offset dB Mid Offset dB High Offset dB These parameters set the gain of the trigger signal For example if you do not want to apply compression to the high range reduce the High Offset value down below the Threshold level In this way the high range limiter will not respond and com pression will not be applied 24 DY4 St Gate Stereo Gate This effect mutes the input signal if its level is lower than the specified level It also reverses the on and off operation of the gate and uses Note On and Off messages to turn the gate on and off Envelp Envelope Select L RMix L Only Selects from Control via the modulation R Only source mixing the left and right signals Only left and Only right Polrty Polarity errr Switches between non reversed and reversed Gate on off TPS ALTOS OIA aa aaa 0 100 Sets the level to which the Gate Is applied Attack Aach 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release ENN 1 100 Sets the release time DTime Delay Time msec 0 100 Sets the delay time of
252. gs Using MIDI to control scenes MIDI output When the scene changes a scene change message program change will be transmitted This message will be transmitted in the following cases e When you use SceneNumber to switch scenes in the SCENE ReadDel tab page e When you press the STORE key and SCENE key to register a scene e When SceneRead is On and the scene changes during playback or recording MIDI input If SceneRead is Off scene change messages program changes that are received will cause the D1600mkII to select the scene of the corresponding number If SceneRead is On these messages will not be received regardless of whether the D1600mkKII is playing recording or stopped 1 Connect the external MIDI device p 87 2 Make MIDI settings In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page set GlobalCh to the channel of the external MIDI device that will be transmitting the messages To transmit MIDI messages turn the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page ProgChange Trans On To receive MIDI messages turn the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page ProgChange Recv On In the SCENE ReadDel tab page turn SceneRead Off Transmit a program change from the external MIDI device to recall a scene When the D1600mkII receives program change 0 it will recall scene 001 Program changes 0 99 corre spond to scene 001
253. h as for faders or the TRACK STATUS keys are printed in bold type and parameter values are printed in bold type Bold type also indicates content within the text that we wish to emphasize Steps 1 2 3 Steps in a procedure are indicated as 1 2 3 p m This indicates a page or parameter number for reference Symbols amp EE These symbols respectively indicate points of caution and notes of advice xx tab page This indicates a page displayed in the LCD screen To access this page press the key on the panel If there is more than one tab the tab pages will be selected successively each time you press the key LCD screens The parameter values shown in the LCD screens printed in this manual are explanatory examples and may not necessarily match the displays that appear on your D1600mkII 3 Included items Make sure that the following included items are all present e Owner s manual this document e Power cable Parts and their function 1 Top panel 33 34 MONITOR PHANTOM PHANTOM PRANTOW PHANTOM tam trim tain rm TRIMS TRIM TRIM TRIM 10 20 3 40 50 60 O 7 O 8 O LI 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 00000000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000000000 oooooo0o00000000000000000000000000000000 oooooo0oo00000000000000000000000000000000 O000000000000000000000000000000
254. he INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page assign the input to a mixer channel gt p 36 123 Is the recording mode Select RecMode appropri ate gt p 99 Is RHSL turned off p 135 Can t input digitally 154 If you wish to input a digital signal press the Digiln button to turn it On in the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page Does the D1600mkII support the sampling rate of the digital input 96 kHz sampling rate is not supported Too much noise or distortion in the input sound or recorded sound L Is the TRIM setting appropriate If the TRIM is too high the sound will be distorted If it is too low there will be excessive noise To adjust TRIM to the optimal settings for the INPUT 1 INPUT 8 GUITAR IN jacks use the METER TRACK VIEW page Select Display to choose PreFdr and adjust TRIM so that the level is as high as possible without allowing the level meter CLP to light If the input or output of an effect is distorted make the following adjustments e Input e Insert effect While watching the meter in the INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 InsEff5 8 tab page use TRIM etc to adjust the input volume so that CLIP does not light e Master effect While watching the meter in the MASTER EFFECT AUX EffSnd 1 or EffSnd2 tab page a
255. he audio data has also been completely repaired Disk Repaired 2 Disk Repaired 3 Disk Repaired 2 and 3 indicate that the hard disk inspection found errors in the drives The drive was repaired but the audio data could not be repaired completely You can minimize the pops by executing Optimize Track Drive Condition Error This message may appear when you play back an un finalized CD Finalize the CD before you play it L If this message appears while you are operating the CD R RW drive an error has occurred in the drive Check the drive connections If there are no problems with connections or operation try using different media Drive Full There is insufficient drive space Shutdown and then turn the power on again If you were recording or track editing the previous data is saved on the disk If this message still appears delete unneeded songs or select a different drive for work Illegal Disc You attempted to execute an operation but the appro priate CD media was not inserted Illegal Drive O peration The operation you performed was not appropriate for the selected drive For example this message will appear if you attempt to load the system from a drive that does not contain the system gt Select the appropriate drive or operation 157 ces Various Troubleshooting messages Hard disk and
256. he illustration for step 2 1 in 1 out x 4 has been selected 5 Insert the effect between INPUT 8 GUITAR IN and channel 8 Press the InsertTo m button For effect 1 use SelectCh to set the channel to 8 After making the settings press the OK button Select InsertEffect AssignChannel AA Z e SelectCh channel selection Input Effect 1 indicator 6 Select the effect program Access the INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 tab page Select EffectNumber and rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired effect program EffectNumber el OOO 00 000 EU e Ee ferns InsAsn E Instrt B InsEff2 E InsEff3B InsErfdE teed i 7 As described in 1 Adjust the recording level and record gt p 39 adjust the record level and then record Applying an insert effect to a track during playback Here s how an insert effect can be inserted into a mixer channel and applied to the track playback 1 Select the track s that you wish to playback Press the TRACK STATUS key of one or more recorded tracks to set their status to PLAY LED lit green 2 Access the INSERT EFFECT InsAsn tab page assig E Trk IS 000 00 000 al SelectEff Type InsertTo 1 H 1 e 1 H 2 e E 1intoutx4 fe orf 3 rot Ot 4 InsAen H Insk ffi Insette K InsEff3H Inset feeb 3 Press the Assign button In the dialog box that appears select PlayTrack Trk 4 Press th
257. he master D1600mkII In the SYSTEM USB Sync tab page set Select MIDI SyncMode to MTC Mstr In the SYSTEM USB MMC tab page set Select MMC Mode to Transmit For this example set MMCDevID to 10 2 Make settings on the slave D1600mkKII In the SYSTEM USB Sync tab page set Select MIDI SyncMode to MTC Slave In the SYSTEM USB MMC tab page set Select MMC Mode to Receive For this example set MMCDevID to 10 the same as the master If you do not want to receive mixer control data you can either turn the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page Control Change Trans parameter Off on the master D1600mkII or turn the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page Control Change Recv parameter Off on the slave D1600mkIL 3 Press the PLAY key on the master D1600mkKkII When the slave D1600mkII receives time code and establishes synchronization with the time code of the master unit the slave D1600mkII will begin playback Several seconds may be required in order for synchronization to be established Using MIDI for mixer control In the SYSTEM USB MIDI tab page you can turn the Control Change Trans and Recv parameters ON so that D1600mkII mixer parameters can be transmitted and received Recording D1600mkill mixer control operations Here s how operations of the D1600mkII mixer can be recor
258. hen this is Off control will not occur Max Min Specify the upper and lower limits of the range in which the parameter value will be controlled By exchanging the Max and Min values you can for example reverse the effect that occurs when a pedal is advanced and released The available values will depend on the effect Max and Min will not be displayed when Param is set to Off or Wah Using a pedal to control wah Insert FX 2in20Ut x 2 Final FX 1 As explained in 6 Controlling an effect from an external device p 57 make settings for Device etc and select an effect program that provides a wah 2 Press the Effectlcon button for Cntrl and set Param to Wah 3 Press the Effectlcon button for Wah and set Mode to Pedal Insert FX Lin2out x 2 Insert FX Linlout x 4 Linlout x 8 151 152 Troubleshooting Nothing appears in the display C Is the D1600mkII powered on p 11 _ Is the contrast adjusted appropriately p 8 No sound _ Is the D1600mkII and the connected equipment powered on p 11 L Is the MASTER fader or PHONES LEVEL knob raised _ Is the channel volume level raised After using pairing and then switching it off or after reading a scene the actual volume level may not match the fader position Raise and lower the fader so that the fa
259. his function either as is or in conjunction with the Pitch Shifter effect to practice rapid phrases that are difficult to catch by ear A If this is On the VALUE dial will be used for Scrub playback this means you will not be able to use the VALUE dial to edit the value of settings 1 Loc LOCATE raiona 000 00 000 Change the current time location You can rotate the VALUE dial to change the current time location while listening to the sound and viewing the waveform 2 TRACKS Ch steerer Trk1 16 Select the track that will be played and whose waveform will be displayed Press the le button and select from the list 122 3 ZOOM In Out UP DOWN isc Adjust the size of the waveform display and the play back speed Expand the waveform display vertically Shrink the waveform display vertically dk Expand the waveform display horizontally Fa Shrink the waveform display horizontally 16 ENTER By pressing the ENTER key you can finalize a parameter selection or turn it on off 17 INPUT TUNER 000000000000000000000000009090 P1 Ch1 8 Select the inputs for mixer channels 1 8 Here you can select the inputs for mixer channels 1 8 een Sc SE 1 Ch1 8 Inputl 8 CD L R S P DIF L R RhythmL R Select a channel icon Ch1 Ch8 and specify the source that will be input to each channel Input1 8 The analog output of the instrument or device connect
260. ier Type AMP1 5 Selects the type of guitar amplifier 95 MN8 Multitap Delay The parameters are the same as for Mt Dly 96 MN9 Chorus Flanger2 The parameters are the same as for ChF12 97 MN 10 Phaser The parameters are the same as for Phaser 98 MN11 Expander Effect Parameter List This effect makes the sound tighter and improves the dynamic Effect C 0 ntrol range and S N ratio by compressing signals that are below a specified level Cntrl Control Thrshl Thrmeebald 0 127 Sets the level at which the effect begins Select the parameter that will be controlled by an expression to apply pedal or an external MIDI controller and specify the range of Attack Attack rneer 1 100 Specifies the length of the attack parameter values for control Relse Release ee 1 100 Specifies the length of the release See x ag A ORO EE 1 0 1 inf 1 Specifies the compression ratio Param Para meten en Name of parameter to be controlled b KK j Respo RESPONSE essers 1 100 Specifies the speed at which change will EE etc value of parameter to be con 5 occur in response to the input e UE 7 Minimum value of parameter to be con trolled ett E Param 9 Select the parameter to be controlled The parameters that can ic 2 be selected will differ depending on the program For example the Cho Fl Depth selection for Param will control the Depth parameter of the Cho Fl W
261. igher value will simulate the auto pan effect in which the sound is panned between left and right 19 MO6 St Auto Pan Stereo Auto Pan This Auto Pan effect pans sound between left and right It is ste reo and shifting the left and right LFO phases from each other will simulate the sound of the left and right channels crossing over each other by turns or chasing each other LFO LFO Waveform cccccceeees TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Phase LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right S peed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed Depth Depth pasitos 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds LFO Shape You can change the panning curve by modifying the LFO waveform LFO Phase This parameter determines the difference in the left and right LFO phases When you change the value gradually from 0 the sound from the left and right channels will chase each other around If you set the parameter to 180 or 180 the sound from each channel will cross over each other You need to input different sounds to each channel in order for this parameter to be effective 20 MO7 Ensemble This Ensemble effect has three chorus blocks that use
262. impression of a talking guitar or synthe sizer Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 00 Sets the LFO speed VTop Voice Top ansia A l U E O Selects a vowel sound at the top end of control VCentr Voice Center A U E 0 Selects a vowel sound in the center of control VBotom Voice Bottom A U E O Selects a vowel sound at the bottom end of control Formnt Formant Shift 100 100 Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied Reso RESONANCE memos 0 100 Sets the Level of resonance of the voice pattern Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Formant Shift This parameter adjusts the frequency level to which the effect is applied If you wish to apply the effect to a higher range sound set this parameter to a higher value to apply the effect to a lower range sound set this to a lower value Resonance This parameter sets the intensity of resonance for the voice pattern A larger value will add more character to the sound Insert Effect 2in2outx2 Final Effect These algorithms can be selected for an insert effect if 2in2outx2 is selected for Select Eff Type They can also be selected for a final effect Large size LS1 LS7 Category Large size effects 32 LS1 St Graphic 7band EQ Stereo Graphic 7band EQ This is a stereo 7 band graphic equalizer The bar graph of the ga
263. in setting for each band gives you a clear visual idea of fre quency responses You can select a center frequency setting for each band from twelve types according to the sound Type Type 1 Widel 2 Wide2 3 Wide3 Selects a combination of center frequen 4 HalfW1 5 HalfW2 6 HalfW3 cies for each band 7 Low 8 WideLo 9 Mid 10 WideM 11 High 12 WideHi Trim ins 0 100 Sets the input level B1 Band1 OB E 18 18 Sets the gain of Band 1 B2 Band2 OB Discordia 18 418 Sets the gain of Band 2 B3 Band3 dB 18 18 Sets the gain of Band 3 B4 Band4 dB 18 18 Sets the gain of Band 4 B5 Bands 0B osuna 18 418 Sets the gain of Band 5 B6 Band6 OB lesion 18 18 Sets the gain of Band 6 B7 Band7 EE 18 18 Sets the gain of Band 7 Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Type This parameter selects a combination of center frequencies for each band 33 LS2 StMultiband Limiter Stereo Multiband Limiter This is a stereo multiband limiter Ratio Ratio sico 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compression ratio Thrshl Threshold dB 40 0 Sets the level above which the compres Sor is applied Attack Attack ride 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release 1 100 Sets the release time LoOfst Low Offset dB 40 0
264. input of a channel whose TRACK STATUS key is set to Record exceeds the threshold level recording will begin auto matically MS Recording will not begin unless the input level exceeds the threshold level in record ready mode If recording does not begin when you expect press the STOP key or REC key to cancel record ready mode and adjust the Threshold setting Off Trigger recording will not occur 2 Threshold sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 000 100 When trigger recording is used this sets the input level at which recording will begin Recording will begin when the input level exceeds this setting KZ Normally you should set this to as low a level as possible without allowing noise to trigger recording The appropriate level will differ depending on the input source If recording begins too early or too late re adjust this level 121 TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END OAI RHYTHM CD USB 15 SCRUB Scrub Play From Play To and Slow Play functions can be switched on off here Each time you press the SCRUB key the setting will be switched on or off By using these functions you can register Locate and Mark times more precisely and easily ee If you use the Scrub functio
265. input set ting screen RBD e Inz 7 Turn the M mute button Off for the connected input Select the Fader icon and rotate the VALUE dial to raise the value so that the audio signal will be input If the input is mono press the Stereo Mono button to select Mono so that the audio will be sent to both L and R buses Track editing 1 Track editing functions The following functions are provided for track editing e Copy Track copy a track e Insert Track insert a blank space e Erase Track erase a track e Delete Track delete a track e Reverse Track reverse track audio end to end e Optimize Track optimize track data e Swap Track exchange tracks e Expansion Compression Track expand or compress a track e Copy Whole Track copy an entire track e Swap Whole Track exchange entire tracks e Fade Track fade in fade out e Normalize Track optimize the level amp In some cases track editing functions may not be usable if you have insufficient hard disk space You must allocate sufficient free space equivalent to the IN OUT or TO END time for the track editing operation Basic track editing procedure 1 Specify the region time that will be edited In order to edit a track you must first specify the region area of time that will be edited Move to the location that you wish to register Press the STORE key and then press one of the following keys to regi
266. ins consisting of three to five effects Two of these chains can be used These are ideal for adding spa ciousness to a lead guitar or vocal 2 in 2 outx 2 These are stereo in stereo out effects such as reverb chorus and delay Two such effects can be used simultaneously These are ideal for stereo input sources such as keyboard 1 in 1 outx 4 These are mono in mono out effect chains consisting of two effects Four such effects can be used simulta neously These are ideal for sources whose stereo location is fixed such as rhythm guitar 1 in 1 outx 8 Up to eight mono in mono out effects can be used This is ideal for sounds with a fixed pan location such as drums Examples of using the insert effects Various ways in which insert effects can be used for recording or track playback are described below for each effect type During recording 1 in 2 out x 2 mono in stereo out x 2 While recording guitar and bass simultaneously you could apply Guitar Multi to the guitar and Bass Multi to the bass as you record While recording two vocals simultaneously you could apply separate Vocal Multi programs to each singer as you record While recording vocal and guitar simultaneously you could apply Vocal Multi to the vocal and Guitar Multi to the guitar as you record Wocal INPUT 2 in 2 outx 2 stereo in stereo out x 2 While recording keyboard and rhythm machine simultaneously you could apply St Chorus to the
267. io input source to INPUT 2 and assign 1t to mixer channel 2 e Connect a keyboard to the INPUT 3 and INPUT 4 jacks and assign them to mixer channels 9 and 10 MS If you are using stereo input you should use adjacent inputs 1 2 34 and input the signals to adjacent mixer channels KEN Before you proceed create a new song as described in 1 Creating a new song p 35 Na Connect a guitar to the GUITAR IN jack and assign it to mixer channel 8 1 Connect your guitar Set the INPUT 8 GUITAR IN TRIM to the minimum 4 dB and lower the MASTER fader before connecting your guitar to the GUITAR IN jack m 2 Select the input channel Access the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page as me 1001 01 000 1915 Ch1iCh2iCh3 ChdiChS Che Ch7iChs disc ba chi 3 Select the Ch8 icon and rotate the VALUE dial to select INPUT 8 The input from the GUITAR IN jack has now been assigned to mixer channel 8 Assign the input sound to mixer channel 8 Press the track 8 TRACK STATUS key to set it to INPUT LED lit orange Use the trim to adjust the input level Press the METER TRACK VIEW key Press the i button to access the dialog box Select DisplayMode Cancel E C Trkviewi 8 C TrkViewl 1 OT rkviews 16 Press the PreFaderLev radio button and press the OK button Play your guitar to input sound and the level meter of Ch 8 wil
268. ion 47 122 SOli ON 50 131 132 Song d a 14 35 109 Select id 36 108 SONS lA 85 IS E 75 93 94 Resto narra es 76 95 SON EdE aa anes 69 109 CORY SONG RR 70 109 Delete SONS tail 70 110 TT Y 70 109 Protect cont 70 110 SE et ousngaemene 36 Special electo ninia nes 142 DICTCO POSO ueria a 48 134 HR SCH Beie E 3 Store EHect PROCLAIM eegene 57 Emal een 131 reenen 128 Master etet EE 129 DUDA UL taa 60 123 Swap acc 65 102 Swap Whole Track 67 105 Synchronization nasa 92 Eeer 8 Lab Paisa 8 9 SEI 74 115 TEMPO Map EE 72 115 116 Tempo settng Clg 72 115 tte 79 117 Time SIQNature suiii 1115 To record analog signals 10 Toggle e RE 8 9 ER 40 Track At Once eee eee 110 111 Tracked EE 61 100 Copy Tak toca 62 100 Copying to a track in a different ETag 62 Copy Whole Track 66 104 Copying an entire track 66 Copying to a virtual track 67 Delete Track 63 102 Erase te eege 63 102 Expansion Compression race aci n 66 104 Compression track data 66 Expansion track data 66 Pade Te ocaareieer ureia 68 105 IN OUT TO and END times 61 Insert Prack sic 63 101 Inserting blank data 63 Normalize Track 69 106 Boosting to the optimal EA IE EE 69 Optimize Track 64 103 Erasing audio event 65 Erasing punch noise 65 OPA E ee A 64 Reverse Track 64 103 Copies a reverged eee 64 Wap M
269. ion drive Change the file name p 35 80 Song Protected The selected song is protected Either defeat the protect setting p 70 or select a different song p 35 If you are formatting turn the Force button On p 82 97 System Error AE Timeout Tempo Fast L When recording tempo recording failed because the tempo was too fast If you are recording MIDI Clock set your sequencer or other MIDI output device to a slightly slower tempo If you are recording tap input tap a bit slower Tempo Slow TT When recording tempo recording failed because the tempo was too slow If you are recording MIDI Clock set your sequencer or other MIDI output device to a tempo of J 40 or higher If you are recording tap input tap a bit faster ToTime gt EndTime _ There is a problem with the TO and END settings you made for the track editing operation Exp CompTrack and the operation cannot be executed This message will appear if TO is later than END or at the same location Set the times correctly Track Full L When writing an audio CD the number of tracks songs written to the CD has exceeded 99 Write the songs to new CD media Unsupported File Type L When importing a WAV file you attempted to import a file that was other than an 8 16 24 bit 44 1 kHz monaural stereo file Select an 8 16 24 bit 44 1 kHz monaural ster
270. ion formats the song drive of the hard disk peme Ie 001 01 000 _ Format 5 1 USE Mode Press the Yes button to begin checking the drive amp The Check Drive operation requires a substantial amount of time for execution When Area is Full approximately 4 hours and 30 minutes When Area is Unused approximately 25 minutes 1 Exec Execute eegenen Executes formatting of the song drive amp If DiskBusy messages appear even after you execute Check Drive you will need to optimize the track data TRACK EditTrk tab page Optimize Exe a Track AG wiWBeCleared amp Very low frequency vibration in a studio etc may cause DiskBusy errors to appear In this case cor Are You Sure rect the problem by moving the D1600mkII to a dif ferent location before you execute Check Drive La QUICK SW aida On Off Sel Operation Erase CD RW Selects the type of formatting This operation erases the data from a CD RW When a CD RW has been erased you will once again be able to use its full capacity as a blank disc ENTE On Select this if you simply want to erase all the song data at once Since this will only initialize the man agement area of the drive it will not require very much time for execution Off Select this if DiskError messages appear frequently A All data on that disc will be erased when you execute EraseCD RW amp You can
271. ion ratio Thrshl Threshold dB 40 0 Sets the level above which the compres sor is applied Attack Attack AAA 1 100 Sets the attack time Relse Release ee 1 100 Sets the release time GLevel Gain Adjust dB Inf 38 24 Sets the output gain SPEQ Side PEQ Insert Off On Toggles between on off of the trigger sig nal s EQ Triggr Trigger Monitor Off On Switches between effect output monitor and trigger signal monitor Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Fc Side PEQ Cutoff Hz 20 12 0k Sets the EQ center frequency for the trig ger signal E 0 5 10 0 Sets the EQ bandwidth for the trigger signal Gain Gain OB lencia 18 0 18 0 Sets the EQ gain for the trigger signal Envelope Select When L R Mix is selected for this parameter the left and right channels are linked to control the Limiter using the mixed signal If L Only or R Only is selected the left and right channels are linked and the Limiter is controlled via only the left or right chan nel With Indivi the left and right channels control the Limiter indi vidually Ratio Threshold dB Gain Adjust dB This parameter sets the signal compression Ratio Compression is applied only when the signal level exceeds the Threshold value In th
272. isplay method for the CD R RW playback counter Select TimeDisp Type mAbs Track Abs Total Abs Track show the elapsed time for one track Abs Total show the elapsed time for the entire disc CD R RW transport keys Use these keys to stop play or select songs on the audio CD you created aa If you are in the middle of a song this button moves to the beginning of that song If you are at the beginning of a song this button moves to the beginning of the preceding song _ttH Moves to the beginning of the next song Ol Starts stops playback of the song The playback audio will be output from the audio out put of the CD R RW drive 6 STORE You can store a time location for a registration to a locate point scene or mark When you press the STORE key the location is put into a memory buffer and can be registered by pressing one of the registration destination keys IN LOC1 OUT LOC2 TO LOC3 or END LOC4 If you press the STORE key once again instead of pressing a registration destination key the store operation will be cancelled For details on these functions and on the registration proce dure refer to Locate Registering a locate point p 46 Registering a mark p 47 and 7 Registering and play ing scenes p 50 7 MARK You can register a specific time location in a Mark and then jump instantly to that location when desired Since you can assign a
273. it down When you press and hold the POWER key a dialog box will ask you for confirmation If you press the Yes button the song will be saved automatically and then the D1600mkII will shut down and enter standby mode If you press the No button you will return to the previous screen If you press the Restart button in the power off confirmation dialog box the D1600mkII will restart By restarting you can delete the Undo data and recover the space it had occupied on the hard disk By pressing the D1600mkII Main power switch to turn it off you can turn the power off completely If an external drive is connected turn off the power of the external drive Turn off the power of external input devices such as keyboards Listening to the demo song Here s how to listen to the demo songs 1 Move the D1600mkII s CHANNEL faders to the 0 mark and the MASTER fader to the o mark Press the SONG CD key to access the SelSong tab page Make sure that 001 SISTER DANCE is selected Songiumber IS 000 00 000 Ce SISTER DANCE ib ees e Scene 001 DEM0 SONG SelSong fe ditsongll PraPlay AEN Make the TRACK STATUS key LED of all tracks light green PLAY If any are lit a different color or are dark press the key to make the LED light green Press the PLAY key to begin playback Slowly raise the MASTER fader to adjust the vol ume level When the demo
274. ition Select Pre Post Switches the feedback connection Fdback Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range Mix Wem Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Mode This switches the operating mode of the pitch shifter Slow will produce the least tonal change Fast will provide the fastest response Medium is between these two It is best to use Fast when only a small amount of pitch shift is needed and Slow when you wish to shift the pitch by a large amount Mode Fine If Cntrl is controlling Pitch and you change Modes or the Fine tun ing you must once again use Cntrl to readjust the Max and Min parameters Feedback Position Select Feedback When Feedback Position Select is set to Pre the output of the pitch shifter will be once again sent back to the pitch shifter This means that if Feedback is raised the pitch will continue stepping up or down each time feedback is repeated If Feedback Position Select is set to Post the feedback will not pass through the pitch shifter so that raising Feedback will cause the pitch shifted sound to be repeated without further pitch change MicSim Mic Simulator The mic simulator is a modeling effect that can transform a sound recorded on a conventional dynamic
275. k Mtr i e Bi ER EditT rk A Import H Export ES DestTrack 3 Select the number of the track from which you wish to erase data Set DestTrack to track 1 4 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 5 Verify the results Press the IN LOC1 key to play back from the IN location and verify that the data was erased correctly Ki You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command Deleting track data Delete Track The Delete Track command deletes data from the speci fied region IN OUT of recorded track data When data is deleted the data that followed i e the data after the OUT location will be moved toward the beginning of the song e You can delete data from not only one track but from the IN OUT region of multiple tracks simultaneously Procedure for deleting track data Delete Here s how to delete the IN OUT region of track 1 Register the IN and OUT times 2 Select the Delete command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to DeleteTrack DestTrack 2J001 01 000 TE DeleteT rack DestTrack 3 Select the number of the track from which you wish to delete data Set DestTrack to track 1 4 Execute the editing command Press the
276. k Times 3 Select the reverse source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 4 Select the reverse destination track number Set DestTrack to track 2 5 Specify the number of times the data will be copied Set Times to 3 6 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 7 Verify the results Press the TO LOC3 key to play back from the TO location and verify that the data was edited correctly You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command amp The longer the specified range IN OUT the longer this command will take to process until the Completed display appears Optimizing track data Optimize Track This operation optimizes the specified region IN OUT of recorded track data If you repeatedly record or edit short intervals of time the data on the hard disk will become fragmented requiring the D1600mkII to access the disk more frequently and making it more likely that skips will be heard or that the DiskBusy message will appear possibly making it impossible to play back correctly In such cases you can optimize the fragmented region so that it will play back correctly Optimizing track data Here s how to optimize the IN OUT region of track 1 1 Store the
277. k and record ing while you are performing on an instrument or when you are at a distance from the D1600mkII 1 Ze 3 Connect a foot switch to the FOOT SW jack Access the SYSTEM USB Control tab page Specify the function of the foot switch Select Func FootSwFunction to PunchI O Fancontro JE 001 01 000 Fung PunchL Cp Control E RI E Sune AMC EUR EA In Manual punch in out steps 5 and 6 perform manual punch in out by pressing the foot switch instead of the REC key you may use either E You can also use the foot switch to record from the beginning of the song Set the Func parameter of step 3 to Play Stop Press the REC key at the beginning of the song LED will blink and press the foot switch to start record ing autoPunck IS 000 00 000 A Register IN punch in as the time at which record ing will begin and OUT punch out as the time at which recording will end For details on registering the IN and OUT times refer to p 46 In the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page you can press the Wave button to register the IN and OUT points while viewing a waveform display Ki The time locations you register will be overwritten onto the IN LOC1 key and OUT LOC2 key Connect the input device and adjust the recording level Refer to 1 Analog inputs and 1 Adjust the record ing level and record p 3
278. k number to be deleted in the upper left If you wish to delete it press the Yes button to delete it If you decide not to delete it press the No button To delete all marks press the SelectAll button to turn it On Then press the Yes button to delete the marks Naming a mark e Press the Rename button to access the Rename Mark dialog box For the rename procedure refer to 2 Naming a song gt p 35 e When you have assigned a name press the OK but ton Basic operation Creating selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording CH 2 a O MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 48 Using the mixer Here you can adjust various mixer settings such as volume tone pan recording and playback to create the desired levels for your song For details on adjusting the effects refer to p 53 1 Adjusting the volume o The input or recording playback volume is adjusted by the CHANNEL faders Raise or lower the faders to adjust the volume p 134 The volume can be adjusted from silence to unity gain 0 dB to 12 dB gain Normally you should set the faders at unity gain the position where the input signal is output at the same volume and then lower the faders for any channels that are too loud rather than raising the faders of ch
279. l move accordingly Adjust the INPUT 8 TRIM knob while watching the level meter Raise the TRIM as high as possible without the level reaching CLP while playing your guitar fe PreFdr PkHald E 003 603 060 Snd Mon Mst EE 123436 7 5 91011121319 1516 4 Audition the sound Set the MASTER and CHANNEL 8 faders to unity gain 0 dB Access the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page Press the MasterLR button to turn it On high lighted Gradually raise the PHONES LEVEL knob or MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob and listen to the sound in your headphones or monitor system Connect a mic to IN PUT 2 and assign it to mixer channel 2 1 Connect a mic Set the INPUT 2 TRIM to the minimum 4 dB lower the D1600mkII s MASTER fader and connect a mic to the INPUT 2 jack If you are using a condenser mic turn on phantom power for INPUT 2 after you connect the mic amp Turn phantom power on only if you are using a condenser mic amp Phantom power must be turned on after connect ing the condenser mic If you connect or discon nect the mic with phantom power turned on your equipment may be damaged Specify the input channel Access the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page Select the Ch2 icon and rotate the VALUE dial to select INPUT 2 The input from the INPUT 2 has now been assigned to mixer channel 2 az m 151000 00 000 A Chi Ch CHE Ch Chiche dE
280. lect here is explained separately below Edit Type Copy Track This operation copies the audio data in the IN OUT range of the copy source track SourceTrack to the TO location of the copy destination track DestTrack repeating the specified number of times You can use the clipboard to copy data to a track of a different song amp When this is executed Exec the copy destination track DestTrack will be overwritten IN OUT Source Track AP y Ae y ARA d DestTrack Sa 16 001 01 000 D PTA 6 5 3 4 SourceTrack 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Clip Select the copy source track 1 You can choose Clip only if the clipboard contains data indicates the number of tracks in the clipboard 1 2 4 8 16 You can use Clip to copy from tracks of a different song KZ When you copy 24 bit data to a 16 bit song it will be handled as 16 bit data Ki In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available Destlrack mm 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Clip Select the copy destination track 1 The number of tracks in the clipboard is shown in You can use Clip to copy data to a track of another song When data is copied between songs of differing Bit quantization settings the data will be handled as 16 bit data at the copy destination Ki In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available
281. lect the move source song SourceSong Select the Move Song operation In the SONG CD EditSong tab page select MoveSong as the EditType EditTupe 5 000 00 000 Te KI Bet E SourceSong DestSong Verify the song you want to move Make sure that SourceSong is set to the desired move source song Select the move destination song number Set DestSong to the move destination song number Execute the editing operation Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute the editing operation When the operation is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button Deleting a song Delete Song This operation deletes the selected song 1 2 Select the song you want to delete DestSong Select the Delete Song operation In the SONG CD EditSong tab page select DeleteSong as the EditType EditTupe IS 000 00 000 H CEET 1661 DemoSongab i DestSong Verify the song you want to delete Make sure that the song you want to delete is selected as the DestSong Execute the editing operation Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute the editing operation When the operation is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button Protecting a song
282. lected speed If so try a slower writing speed 5 Carefully read the owner s manual section COPYRIGHT WARN ING p iii and press the Yes button if you accept the terms The D1600mkII will begin creating an image file Step 3 Mixdown amp You can stop creating the image file by pressing the Abort but ton during this time Then the D1600mkII will start writing the CD amp If you press the Abort button while data is being written to the CD the writing will stop If you were writing a CD R that disc will become unusable If you were writing a CD RW you can 3 Erasing the data from a CD erase the entire disc and use it again as a blank disc RW p 83 When writing is completed the display will indicate Completed E eh Hst WriteSongTaCb ReR iW Co mpleted 1 Write another CD S 33 34 6 Press the No button in the dialog box If you want to create another The SONG CD CDR RW tab page will appear identical CD press the Yes button 00 OO If you want to write additional songs select the next song and then If you want to write songs to perform steps 1 6 more than one CD write the SE songs to all the CDs and then 7 Press the Final button finalize the CDs A message will ask you to confirm that you really want to finalize the disc amp A CDisnotcompleted as an audio CD i e cannot be played back by a CD player until you fin
283. lection in the SONG CD SelSong tab page DEStSONG nan 001 100 Selects the copy destination song number The available numbers will be 001 existing song number 1 Exec Execute Executes the copy operation When you execute the song will be copied to the copy destination song number DestSong If DestSong is an existing song number that song and subsequent songs will be renumbered upward by one no songs will be overwritten amp You cannot Undo this operation Edit Type Move Song This operation moves the selected song to a different song number Fotoe ISl0D0D0 00 000 Te EJtiovesong 4 SOU linia 001 100 Shows the move source song number To change this make your selection in the SONG CD SelSong tab page s DOSTSONG aia 001 100 Selects the copy destination song number The available numbers will be 001 existing song number Exec Execute Executes the Move Song operation If the move destination number DestSong is higher than the move source number SourceSong the song at the DestSong number and subsequent songs will be moved forward if the move destination number is lower these songs will be moved backward No songs will be overwritten amp You cannot Undo this operation pa O TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO L
284. led When you store a scene these filter settings will be stored as part of each scene When scenes are being read recalled these filter set tings will be applied to each recalled scene In the Select SceneFilter dialog box you can use the l and 4Prew buttons to switch between screens Select SceneFilter E aH 113 TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END OAI RHYTHM CD USB 114 Select SceneFilter InsEtf MetEf1 Meter paella Cancel On Filtering will be turned on for the corresponding channel or parameter and the settings of the scene will be ignored Off Filtering will be off the settings of the scene will be applied Scene umber ssassssunsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 001 100 This recalls the mixer settings of a scene to the current time location This is also used to recall a scene when you wish to mod ify its name or to change its time location The time location at which the scene is registered is shown beside SceneNumber If SceneRead is Off you can select any desired scene If this is On the scene for the current time will be selected and cannot be chosen manually Sort scenes in order of time Normally scenes are arranged i
285. light and touch panel AC Local Voltage 40 W 510 W x 383 D x 138 H mm 20 08 W x 15 08 D x 5 43 H incluting protrusions 7 8 kg 17 20 lbs E Principal specifications Frequency response S N Dynamic range THD N A D conversion D A conversion Sampling frequency 10 Hz 20 kHz 1dB 4 dBu 10 kQ load 96 dB typical IHF A 96 dB typical IHF A 0 02 typical 20 Hz 20 kHz 16 dBu 10 kQ load 24 bit 64 times oversampling 24 bit 128 times oversampling 44 1 kHz E Analog digital input and output specifications lt INPUT1 2 3 4 gt Connectors Input impedance Nominal level Maximum level Source impedance lt INPUT5 6 7 8 gt Connectors Input impedance Nominal level Maximum level Source impedance lt G UITAR IN PUT gt Connector Input impedance Nominal level Maximum level XLR 3 31 type 48V phantom power SW 1 4 TRS phone jack balanced 4 kQ XLR 3 31 10 kQ TRS phone jack 60 dBu TRIM max 4 dBu TRIM min 48 dBu TRIM max 16 dBu TRIM min 600 Q 1 4 TRS phone jack balanced 10 kQ 60 dBu TRIM max 4 dBu TRIM min 48 dBu TRIM max 16 dBu TRIM min 600 Q 1 4 phone jack unbalanced 1 MQ 60 dBu TRIM max 4 dBu TRIM min 48 dBu TRIM max 16 dBu TRIM min Source impedance 600 Q lt MASTER OUTPUT L R gt Connector 1 4 phone jack unbalanced Output impedance 150 Q Nomi
286. lly saves your recorded or edited songs and phrases to the hard disk whenever you switch songs or turn off the power Whatis zems JEMS Resonant structure and Electronic circuit Mod eling System is Korg s proprietary technology for dig itally recreating the numerous factors that produce and influence a sound ranging from the sound pro duction mechanisms of acoustic instruments and elec tric electronic musical instruments to the resonances of an instrument body or speaker cabinet the sound field in which the instrument is played the propaga tion route of the sound the electrical and acoustic re sponse of mics and speakers and the changes produced by vacuum tubes and transistors 2 Printing conventions in this manual Switches and knobs Keys dials and knobs on the panel of the D1600mkII are printed within square brackets Parameters that appear in the LCD screen Parameters that appear in the LCD screen are printed inside double quotation marks The terms button and cell refer to objects in the LCD screen RA The LCD screen of the D1600mkII is a touch panel To select a parameter simply touch that parameter di rectly Alternatively you can use the CURSOR keys to move the cursor to the desired parameter Most of the procedure examples given in this manual will use the method of directly pressing the parameter in the LCD screen to select it Bold face type Panel settings suc
287. log box will appear Here you can view the structure of the program and its on off status HALL On It 000 00 000 Cor 3a EME Nr 3D Effect Om Oria On Off Refer to Effectlcon and Effect On Off for the insert effects p 127 Refer to Bypass for the insert effects p 127 9 RENAME sssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Here you can modify the name of the effect program Select the effect program whose name you wish to modify press the Rename button to access the dialog box and modify the name A name of up to 16 characters can be input For details refer to 2 Naming a song p 35 YA After modifying the program name use Store to store it The effect program name you modified will be discarded unless you use Store to store it The effect program whose name or parameters you 2 1 SO LO M O N ITO R modified can be stored in user areas u033 u064 The D1600mkII provides 32 user areas for final effects In the StoreEffect dialog box specify the user area 4040 60 90000 0 000 000 00000000000 number and press the Exec button to store the effect Pl Solo Solo select To cancel press the Cancel button amp Effects are always overwritten 1 SelectSolo 1 16 S1 S2 Al R1 R2 On Off Switch the solo function on off Only the audio for which the Solo button is On
288. mbered effect will take priority For example if you make the same settings for effect number 1 as for effect number 4 the settings of 4 will be cancelled Also it will not be possible to make settings identical to the settings of 1 for any other effect numbers 3b 3c When Assign is In Specify the return channel 3a INDUC citer In1 8 CL CR Dr DrR This shows the selected input In1 8 Analog input INPUT1 INPUT8 GUITAR IN CL CR L or R audio signals from the internal CD RW drive sold separately DrL DrR Rhythm L or rhythm R Only if an internal CD R RW drive is installed SDa EOL ieiiived inact EEEE 1 8 This shows the effect number SC Selec hunda 1 16 Off Specify the return channel for the effect output When Assign is Trk The signal flow will be input channel select effect gt return insert channel Jas Selec i arar nds 1 16 Off Select the insert destination mixer channel E When SelectEffType is 2in2outx2 only odd numbered channels can be selected for SelectCh 35 EN 1 8 This shows the insert effect number 36 OUWHUCh aa 1 16 Off This shows the return channel of the effect output The same channel as 3a SelectCh will be selected You can specify that adjacent mixer channels be paired For details refer to P1 Ch1 8 Select the inputs for mixer channels 1 8 Pair p 123
289. merical value is shown in the upper left of the screen Mid EO e Select Mid EQ Center Frequency F of the chan nel you want to adjust and turn the VALUE dial to specify the center frequency The numerical value is shown in the upper left of the screen e Select Mid EQ Gain of the channel you want to adjust and turn the VALUE dial to adjust the gain The numerical value is shown in the upper left of the screen Applying input EQ to the analog inputs Recording with input EQ You can apply input EQ to the analog inputs EQ cannot be applied to the digital input and record the sound that has been adjusted by the EQ 1 Access the page that includes the channel to which you wish to apply EQ Select the INPUT TUNER InEq1 4 tab page 001 01 000 Isi 2 Input an audio signal and adjust it to an appropri ate level Refer to 1 Analog inputs and 1 Adjust the record ing level and record p 36 39 Verify that the level meter on the left side of the LCD screen moves when you hear the sound 3 For each InputEQ select the gain settings and mid EQ center frequency and rotate the VALUE dial to adjust them Refer to step 2 and step 3 of Applying EQ to the track playback p 48 4 Record the sound as adjusted by the EQ Refer to 1 Adjust the recording level and record p 39 4 Pairing Adjacent odd and even numbered channels 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 10
290. meter to be effective Tap1 Level 11 DL4 St Modulation Dela y Stereo Modulation Dela y This stereo delay uses an LFO to sweep the delay time The pitch also varies You will obtain a delay sound with swell and shim mering LFO LFO Wavefom TRI SIN Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Speed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 LPhase L LFO Phase degree 180 180 RPhase R LFO Phase degree 180 180 LDepth L Den marras 0 200 AR Depth R DM 0 200 LTime L Delay Time msec 0 500 RTime R Delay Time msec 0 500 LFback L Feedback 100 100 RFback R Feedback 100 100 MIX Wet Dry sosser Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Selects LFO Waveform Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Sets the LFO speed Sets the phase obtained when the left LFO is reset Sets the phase obtained when the right LFO is reset Sets the depth of the left LFO modula tion Sets the depth of the right LFO modula tion Sets the delay time for the left channel Sets the delay time for the right channel Sets the feedback amount of left delay Sets the feedback amount of right delay Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds LLFO Phase degree R LFO Phase degree L LFO Phase and R LFO Phase specify the phase difference between the two LFOs when they are reset This allows the pi
291. mp While recording the sound of an audio CD you will not be able to select digital input from the S P DIF IN jack 1 Set the CHANNEL 1 and CHANNEL 2 faders to 0 dB If you want to hear the sound of the audio CD while you record we suggest that you first set the MASTER fader below 0 dB set the PHONES LEVEL knob and MONITOR OUT knob to 0 Then in step 8 gradually raise the volume while you play back the audio CD and when you have decided on the volume play back the CD once again and record it The setting of the MASTER fader does not affect the volume during recording Insert the audio CD into the CD R RW drive 3 Access the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page and make sure that DigiIn is set to LDigiIn 4 Inthe INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page select the Ch1 icon and use the VALUE dial to select CD L Then select the Ch2 icon and use the VALUE dial to select CD R 5 Access the RECORD RecMode tab page For SelectRecMode choose Input 6 Press the track 1 and 2 TRACK STATUS keys to select REC LED lit red 7 Access the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page and press MasterLR to set it to PST 8 Access the SONG CD CDR RW tab page and press eo e 9 Press the REC key to enter record ready mode and then press the PLAY key to start recording amp Playback of the CD in the CD R RW drive does not synchroniz
292. mpSim 62 MM8 Comp OD HiG Comp1 ODHiG 63 MM9 Comp P4EQ Comp1 P4EQ 64 MM10 Comp Cho Fing Comp2 ChFIl1 65 MM11 Comp Phaser Comp2 Phaser 66 MM12 Comp Mt Delay Comp2 MtDly 67 MM13 Exciter Comp Excit2 Comp1 68 MM14 Exciter Limiter Excit2 Lmtr 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 MM15 Exciter Cho Fing Excit2 ChFI1 MM16 Exciter Phaser Excit2 Phaser MM17 Exciter Mt Dela y Excit2 Mt Dly MM18 Limiter P4EQ Lmtr P4EQ MM19 Limiter Cho Fing Lmtr ChFI2 MM20 Limiter Phaser Lmtr Phaser MM21 Limiter Mt Delay Lmtr Mt Dly MM22 OD HiG Cho Fing O DHiG ChFI1 MM23 OD HiG Phaser O DHiG Phaser MM24 OD HiG Mt Delay ODHiG Mt Dly MM25 OD HiG AmpSim ODHiG AmpSim MM26 Wah AmpSim Wah AmpSim MM27 Decimator AmpSim Decim AmpSim MM28 Decimator Comp Decim Comp1 MM29 Cho Fing Mt Delay ChFI2 Mt Dly MM30 Phaser Cho Fling Phaser ChFI2 MM31 AmpSim Tremolo AmpSim Trml MM32 Reverb Gate Reverb Gate MM33 MicSim Limiter MicSim Lmtr Effects within mult effect programs MM1 MM33 and their parameters Here are explanations of the parameters of each effect in the multi effect chains listed above P4EQ Parametric 4band EQ Fc1 Band1 e e uge
293. mpleted If you want to write the same song to another CD press the Yes button If not press the No button K If you press the No button you can then press the CD Monitor button to check the content that was written to the CD 6 If you want to write other songs perform steps 2 4 and 5 The songs will be written on the disc in the order in which you write them 7 Finalize the disc If you want to play the newly created CD R RW in an audio CD player finalize the disc by pressing the Final button when writing is completed amp No further songs can be written to a finalized disc This means that you should execute the Finalize step after you have written all the songs you want to write on that disc 8 Check the written content Press the CD Monitor button and then press the Oo button to play back the disc and check that it was written correctly 9 Play back the disc in your audio CD player to check it Play the disc ina CD player to verify that the audio CD was created correctly Ki CD RW discs will not play in some audio CD players Making an audio CD from a live recording If you want to make an audio CD from a single item of song data such as a live recording or a long song you can use the Disc At Once method to write the disc With this method the marks you register within the song will be used to divide the tracks of the CD letting you create a live C
294. n all the desired songs to it A CD R RW created using Disc At Once will be final ized automatically so this step will not be necessary ee Ae Erases the data from a CD RW amp Erased data cannot be recovered You cannot execute this on a CD R disc DAO DISCATO NCE iia ras On Off When writing the audio data of tracks 1 and 2 to CD R RW this specifies whether the data will be written using the Disc At Once method or the Track At Once method When writing to CD R RW writing will start from the beginning 00 00 00 time of tracks 1 and 2 ATEN On the data will be written using the Disc At Once method Disc At Once performs the entire process of writing to the CD R RW and finalizing the disc Only one song can be written and no further songs can be added fs If you place marks in your song before you write to CD R RW these marks will be the track divisions The beginning of the song will be the first song on the CD R RW CD track 1 and each subsequent mark will be the second song CD track 2 third song CD track 3 etc There will be a gap of zero seconds between songs A When you place marks in the song make sure that the marks are at least four seconds apart An error will occur if the marks are closer than four seconds Any marks later than the end time of tracks 1 and 2 will be ignored Off the data will be written using the Track At Once method The audio data of tracks 1 and 2 will be wri
295. n external effect to the signal from the AUX OUT send output use the INPUT 1 INPUT 8 jacks to receive the return signal s In this case you can choose whether the signal s will be returned to the mixer channel s in the same way as a conventional input or sent directly to the master bus Refer to 7 Using an external effect p 58 Connections when using a foot switch to perform manual punch recording or playback stop etc Connect the pedal switch separately sold option PS 1 to the FOOT SW jack Connections when using a foot pedal to control effects Connect the expression pedal separately sold option EXP 2 XVP 10 to the EXPRESSION PEDAL con nector amp If a volume pedal is connected it will not operate correctly Connections when controlling effects or switching scenes from an external MIDI device Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device gt MIDI IN connector of the D1600mkII Connections for synchronizing the D1600mkII with a MIDI sequencer MIDIIN connector of your sequencer lt gt MIDI OUT connector of the D1600mkII use a MIDI cable for connection MIDI OUT connector of your sequencer lt gt MIDI IN connector of the D1600mkII Connections for saving or backing up data on your computer USB connector of your computer lt gt USB connector of the D1600mkII use a USB cable for connection 2 Turning the power on off Turning the power on Use the
296. n on a song that uses the tempo track you should set the counter display p 91 unit to time display MSM or frame display MSF If this is set to MBT rotating the VALUE dial may not play the data immediately You can use the following functions when the SCRUB key is on lit e Scrub function You can turn the VALUE dial to play back the track data Use this when you want to hear the audio while searching for a specific location in the song This is somewhat similar to manually turning an analog record on a turntable to find the beginning of a song Play From function When you press the PLAY key playback will begin from the location at which you are currently stopped and will end after two seconds and automatically return to the point at which playback began e Play To function When you hold down the STOP key and press the PLAY key playback will begin from a point two seconds earlier than the location at which you are currently stopped and will end at the location at which you were stopped You can use the Play From function and Play To function to find a location more accurately Slow Play function When you press the FF key half speed playback will begin from the location at which you are currently stopped When you press the STOP key playback will stop and you will return to the location at which you started Since the slow playback will be one octave lower than the normal pitch you can use t
297. n opera tion Never turn off the Main power switch or disconnect the power cable until shutdown has 4 been completed If you turn off the Main power switch or dis connect the power cable before shutdown has been completed data and user settings may be lost or the hard disk may be damaged 3 INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 jacks Audio sources such as mic or line keyboard etc can be connected here 5 Both balanced XLR and balanced 1 4 TRS phone jacks are provided Unbalanced phone plugs can also be connected 48V phantom power is provided on the XLR jacks so that you can use condenser mics fe If you connect the phone jack you will not be able to input from the XLR jack If you want to use the XLR jack don t connect anything to the phone jack 6 INPUT 4 O N PHANTO ii Phantom power switch MONITOR OUT e ON OFF PHANTOM 48V oir cahir d instructions USB S z sier O o E dE 2 Balanced phone plug INPUT 4 INPUT 3 INPUT 2 INPUT 1 LCD CONTRAST OUT MIDI IN E En 15 AT OUT S P DIF IN y m 9 1011 12 Unbalanced phone plug GND HOT amp If a condenser mic is connected or disconnected with the phantom power switch on damage to your equipment may occur For this reason always turn the phantom power switch off before connecting a condenser mic GND COLD HOT amp Never connect an unbalanced mic or device when the phantom power switch is on Doing so
298. n the order in which they were registered but you can sort them in ascending order of registered time amp Undo is not available after executing Sort Rename ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn This lets you modify the name of a scene Use SceneNumber to recall the scene whose name you wish to modify press the Rename button to access the dialog box and modify the name A name of up to six teen characters can be used For details refer to 2 Nam ing a song gt p 35 If the SONG CD SelSong tab page item Select Disp Parameter is set to Scene the scene name will be dis played in that page This lets you change the registered time of a scene Use SceneNumber to recall the scene whose location you wish to change Press the EditLoc button to access the dialog box and modify the location of the scene Use the cursor to select the time that you wish to modify and use the VALUE dial to modify the time Press the OK button to finalize the change or press Cancel button to cancel the change EditSceneLocation pp CER Loc 888 99 908 This lets you delete a scene amp The Undo function is not available after you delete a scene Delete Gene SelectAll ArevouSure Wes Tas Selec ld cocaina On Off This selects all scenes for deletion EDESA On All scenes will be subject to deletion The scene numbe
299. nal level 10 dBu Maximum level 2 dBu Load impedance 10 KQ or more lt MONITOR OUTPUT L R gt Connector Output impedance Nominal level Maximum level Load impedance 1 4 phone jack unbalanced 150 Q or more 10 dBu 2 dBu 10 kQ or more lt AUX OUTPUT gt Connector Output impedance Nominal level Maximum level Load impedance lt PHONES OUTPUT gt Connector Output impedance Maximum level 1 4 phone jack unbalanced 150 Q 10 dBu 2 dBu 10 kQ or more 1 4 stereo phone jack 100 Q 50 mW 32 Q lt S P DIF IN PUT O UTPUT gt Connector Format lt USB gt Connector Format OS support lt MIDI IN OUT gt Connectors lt FOOT SW gt Connector optical 24 bit S P DIF IEC60958 EIAJ CP 1201 Type B Slave USB 1 1 compliant Windows Me Windows 2000 or later Mac OS 9 0 4 or later If you want to use this product with Windows 98 please check the Korg website or your Korg distributor DIN 5 pin x 2 1 4 phone jack use separately sold PS 1 lt EXPRESSION PEDAL gt Connector E Accessories E Options 1 4 stereo phone jack use separately sold XVP 10 or EXP 2 Power cable Owner s Manual PS 1 pedal switch XVP 10 EXP VOL pedal EXP 2 foot controller e For other recommended drives please contact your Korg distribu tor Appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice July 2003
300. nanannnnanan Executes the backup When backing up to CD R RW Exe E f Data ackup User Pare on 2ure Contra MOT A Sune A A E TT E You can specify the writing speed when backing up to CD R RW Press the Yes button to begin the backup When backing up to the USB drive a e TA Backup User E Input the date and time Press the Date button to open the dialog box and specify the timestamp date and time for the file Use the cursor to select the field you want to change and use the VALUE dial to edit the date and time File Date ZRHDH ai 81 LS Cancel Press the Yes button to begin the backup A You cannot save if an identically named file already exists on the USB drive Either change the name or delete the existing file from the USB drive B U Rst Type Restore This operation restores backed up song or effect user data into the song drive of the hard disk From Backup1Song data on the USB drive or CD you can restore that song and effect user data From BackupAllSong data on a CD you can restore one specific song or all songs Effect user data will also be restored From the USB drive or a CD on which you performed BackupUserData you can restore effect user data MS When restoring one song or all songs you can choose whether to restore effect user data execute II O01 01 O00 _ D Resto re Zu EE S C U Selects the rest
301. ncel the Undo press the Redo button to return to the Level00 take The undo operation you executed in step 11 will be cancelled Press the OK button to return to the previous screen In addition to the recording methods described above the following possibilities are available when recording on the D1600mkII For details refer to the page listed e Apply EQ to the audio being recorded p 48 e Apply effects to the audio being recorded p 54 e Listen to the internal rhythm while recording your per formance p 72 e Record the internal rhythm p 72 e Rehearse the recording p 135 Playback This section explains basic playback on the D1600mkII and also how to use program playback 1 Playback 1 Select the track s for playback Press the TRACK STATUS keys for the tracks that you wish to play to put them in PLAY LED lit green 2 Move to the time location from which you wish to playback For details on changing the time location refer to p 46 3 Begin playback Press the PLAY key The PLAY LED will light 4 Stop playback Press the STOP key The PLAY LED will turn off WA You can also use a PS 1 foot switch separately sold option to start and stop playback gt p 91 2 Program pay 7 Here s how you can play back multiple songs in the or der you specify In addition to using this to play songs in a desired order this function is also convenien
302. nd if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the user s authority to operate this equipment CE mark for European Harmonized Standards CE mark which is attached to our company s products of AC mains operated apparatus until December 31 1996 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC And CE mark which is attached after January 1 1997 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Also CE mark which is attached to our company s products of Battery operated apparatus means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC YA i This produc
303. nect a set of powered monitor speakers etc to the MONITOR OUT L R jacks or connect head phones to the PHONES jack Select the signal for monitoring 1 Select the signal that you wish to monitor Access the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page Normally you will select MasterLR Press the MasterLR button to turn it On high lighted WA If Solo is selected the solo function will take priority Defeat Solo before you make your selection 2 Select input monitoring During playback you will hear the playback tracks of mixer channels whose TRACK STATUS is set to PLAY LED lit green For mixer channels whose TRACK STATUS is REC LED lit red you will hear the external input sound WA If you press the AutoIn button to turn it On mixer channels whose TRACK STATUS is REC will monitor the track playback during playback and will automatically switch to monitoring the external input sound when recording and rehearsing and when stopped 3 Adjust the monitor volume Use the MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor volume of the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and use the PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the monitor volume of the PHONES jack Adjusting the cue level Since the CHANNEL faders of the D1600mkII adjust both the recording level of the tracks and the volume level of each channel the recording level and the monitoring level will be the same For this reason a
304. ng don t forget to set tracks 15 16 back to virtual track Ml yy a Record eight external input audio sources onto two tracks As an example here s how the audio sources being input to INPUT 1 8 can be overwritten onto tracks 1 and 2 1 Specify the input channels Access the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page Assign Ch1 Ch8 respectively to INPUT1 INPUTS 2 Select bounce recording as the recording mode Access the RECORD RecMode tab page Select Bounce bounce recording 3 Select the bounce mode Access the RECORD Bounce tab page For BounceMode select 141Tr 2In 2Tr 4 Record on the currently selected tracks Set RecordVirtualTrack to Current 5 Select the tracks for recording and for audio input Press the TRACK STATUS key to set the recording tracks 1 and 2 to REC LED lit red set the other input tracks 3 8 to INPUT LED lit orange and set the remaining tracks 9 16 to MUTE LED dark 6 Adjust the panning of the input sources Rotate the PAN knobs to adjust the stereo position for 1 8 7 Adjust the input levels Use the CHANNEL faders to adjust the input levels Press the METER TRACK VIEW key Press the Ie button to open the dialog box In the dialog box select PostFaderLev and you will be able to view a meter display for each fader 8 Adjust the volume level Use the MASTER fader to adjus
305. ng a WAV fie Importing a WAV file You can load a WAV format audio file from CD ROM R RW or the USB drive and paste it into a track of a D1600mkII song MS You can use Undo to return to the previous state Exporting a WAV file Audio data you copy to the D1600mkI s clipboard can be exported as a WAV format audio file to CD R RW or the USB drive Importing loading a WAV file You can import WAV files of the following formats e Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz e Bit depth 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit e Number of channels 1 monaural 2 stereo Ki If you want to import a WAV file from your compu ter connect a USB cable and copy the WAV file from your computer to the D1600mkII s USB drive Then import the file from the USB drive Importing a WAV file into the beginning of a track Here s how to import a monaural WAV file from CD into the beginning of track 1 1 Insert the CD R RW disc containing the WAV file into the CD R RW drive 2 Select the Import operation Access the TRACK Import tab page execute J000 00 000 Import File KI Hepa HNWAV Trk DriveList WavFileList DestTrack 3 Select the import source drive Press the DriveList button to display the dialog box Select C CD and press the Yes button 4 Select the WAV file that you want to import Press the WavFileList button to open the dialog box Dicha MA wal Cancel Dieb DZ WAY You can press the Prvw
306. ng frequency modulation HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the ratio of cut of the high range Level Output Level cesses 0 100 Sets the output level Mix Wem Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Pre LPF If a sampler with a very low sampling frequency receives very high pitched sound that could not be heard during playback it could gen erate pitch noise that is unrelated to the original sound Set Pre LPF to On to prevent this noise from being generated 141 Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX 2in20Ut x 2 Insert FX 2in2out x 2 Linlout x 4 1Lin2out x 2 Linlout x 8 Effect Control Master FX Final PX Final FX 142 If you set the Sampling Frequency to about 3kHz and set Pre LPF to Off you can create a sound like a ring modulator Resolution Output Level If you set a smaller value for the Resolution parameter the sound may be distorted The volume level may also be changed Use Out put Level to adjust the level 27 DY7 St Para metric 4band EQ Stereo Parametric 4band EQ This is a stereo 4 band parametric equalizer You can select peak ing type or shelving type for Band 1 and 4 E 0 100 Sets the input level B1Type Band1 Type Peaking ShelvL Selects the type of Band 1 B4Type Band4 Type Peaking ShelvH Selects the type of Band 4 Fc Ban
307. ng is used the D1600mkII can record the sound that was heard immediately before Trigger Recording is a function that starts recording when recording actually started the volume of the input sound exceeds the threshold level Trigger recording will initiate recording when the input that you specify For details refer to 6 Other recording signal exceeds the Threshold level but this can mean methods p 43 that the initial attack of the first note may be lost In such cases you can increase the PreTrigTime so that the earliest part of the sound the part that is lower than the threshold level will also be included in the recording Pl Tr g g er Setti ng S to sta rt tri g g er amp This setting is not valid for the beginning of the song reco rd ing Also if you use trigger recording to continue recording after the end of a previously recorded track setting other than 000ms will cause a a 000 00 000 corresponding length of the previously recorded 1 TriggerRect sound to be lost Trigger on Threshold PreTriggerTime lt Time at which recording begins Lc MOJO renato On Off Turns the Trigger Recording function on off TriggerReci n On Recording will begin when the input audio exceeds the threshold level in record ready mode If this is On the TRIGGER key will light Turn TriggerRec On and press the REC key LED blinking to enter record ready mode When the
308. ning multi ple tracks of data into a smaller number of tracks Here we will explain how to create the master track by bouncing the com pleted song to tracks 1 and 2 For details on how to copy a track refer to Track editing p 61 TRACK STATUS key settings Specify the status of the recording tracks playback tracks and the re maining tracks 1 Press the track 1 and 2 TRACK STATUS keys to select REC LED lit red 2 Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the playback tracks to select PLAY LED lit green 3 Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the remaining tracks to select MUTE LED dark Adjust the recording level The master track will be created with the level and volume balance you specify here this will be the data that is written to create the audio CD 1 Play back the song from the beginning Make sure that all the tracks in the song sound as you intend If you used virtual tracks to record several takes you will need to select the virtual track that you want to use in the final version of the song 2 Use the MASTER fader to adjust the level Adjust the level so that the master LR level meter does not indicate CLP at any point in the entire song Preparations for bounce recording 1 Press the RECORD key to access the RECORD RecMode tab page eouncetn II OO 01 000 Te Select Rechiode Input 2 In the Select RecMode field choose Bounce 31 Quick
309. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannna Executes the Protect setting Each time you execute the setting will alternately turn on or off M POCET SON A On Off A lock symbol fg is displayed when Protect is On Use the Exec button to switch the setting 110 P3 PrgPlay Program playback of songs You can create a program play list with songs arranged ina desired playback order For details on settings and procedure refer to p 45 Select TimeDisp Type m Abs Song Abs Total Selects the counter display method Abs Song show the elapsed time for one song Abs Total show the elapsed time for the entire program Press the OK button to confirm the selected setting or press the Cancel button to cancel 2 ProgramPlay St 01 99 You can arrange the songs in this list From top to bottom place the songs in the desired play back order From the left the list shows the playback order song number and song name If a song in the list cannot be found the next song in the playback list will be played P4 CDR RW Creating and playing CD R RW discs Here you can use the CD R RW drive to create an audio CD and play a CD R RW that you created You can choose either Track At Once or Disc At Once as the writing method By preserving the image file you can write multiple copies of the CD in a shorter time You can write a maximum of 99 tracks to a CD R RW A Some audio CD players are
310. not execute EraseCD RW on a disc other than a CD RW amp Formatting with Quick turned off will require a substantial amount of time Song drive 38 GB approximately 10 hours ZA FOTOO ataron O n Off Forces formatting to be performed even if the drive con tains protected songs beats JE 001 01 000 _ Erase CD RW 1 USE Mode Control E Me REIS un SCH On The drive will be formatted even if it con tains songs protected by the ProtectSong setting Force Off If the drive contains songs protected by the ProtectSong setting a message of SongProtect will appear when you execute and the operation will be aborted Press the Yes button to begin formatting Ly Ee enana Erases the data from the CD RW disc Exe Er aset E nt antrRecover Hut Se Are You Sure w TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD IOC COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END OAI RHYTHM CD USB 98 Sel Operation Format U This operation DOS formats the USB drive of the hard disk eme Ie 001 01 000 _ Format U USB Mode control MIDI ff Sune WNC EUA Diskuti 1 Exec Execute s sssssssrnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Executes DOS formatting of the USB drive Format oU DOS FATE Are You Sure
311. not leave the unit with the tray left open CD R RW disc handling Please observe the following points when handling discs Failure to observe these points may cause problems such as data not being written correctly loss of recorded data or drive malfunction e Do not place discs in direct sunlight or in locations of high temperature or high humidity e Do not touch the surface of the disc Hold the disc by its edges e Remove dust or dirt from the surface of the disc Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust e Do not affix labels to the disc or write on the disc in locations other than specified e Do not use chemicals or detergent to wipe the disc e Do not bend or drop the disc Responsibility for loss of data Korg Corporation will accept no responsibility for any damages direct or indirect whether sustained by the customer or by a third party resulting from loss of or damage to data written on a CD R or CD RW disc The CD R RW drive is installed as follows 160 Inserting a disc Make sure that the power of the D1600mkI is turned on 1 Open the disc tray Press the eject button of the CD R RW drive and the disc tray will open 2 Insert the disc With the label of the disc facing upward place it in the disc tray 3 Close the disc tray Press the eject button of the CD R RW drive to close the disc tray Removing a disc 1 Press the eject button and the disc tray will open
312. ns songs protected by the ProtectSong setting Off If the drive contains songs protected by the ProtectSong setting a message of SongProtect will appear when you execute and the operation will be aborted Press the Yes button to begin formatting Sel Operation Load System C Load System U These operations load the D1600mkI s operating system program from the CD R RW drive or the USB drive to up date the system For details refer to Updating the system p 86 3 RECORD P1 RecMode Selecting the recording mode 1 Select RecMOd eric Input Bounce Selects the recording mode Input The input analog digital internal rhythm pat tern CD R RW drive will be recorded Use the channel faders to adjust the recording level of each track Bounce Bounce recording will be performed The master LR bus will be recorded Use the channel faders to adjust the playback level of each track and use the master fader to set the recording level You can apply master effects and a final effect to multiple tracks while you combine them to two tracks Use bounce recording when you want to master your song to produce an audio CD amp If Bounce is selected the number of simultaneously recorded tracks will always be 2 tracks P2 Bounce Settings for bounce recording For the procedure of bounce recording refer to p 42 pro Ie 000 00 000 1 Select BounceMode 14 Tr 2
313. oadSystem U CiFormat 5 Format All Details of each operation you select here are explained below Sel Operation Check Drive S This operation detects and repairs errors on the song drive You should execute this when DiskBusy error messages appear If there were no major errors on the drive you will still be able to use the song data after executing this opera tion amp You cannot check the USB drive peme Ie 001 01 000 _ CheckDrivess 1 USE Mode control MIDI A sano MMC JE UAT Diskuti E lt GCUNE latas daria laca Executes the check drive operation a Quick SW amics taaan On Off Selects the way in which the CD RW will be erased DS On The entire CD RW disc will be erased at high speed Since only track information will be erased this lets you initialize the disc in a short time This will not affect writing Off The entire CD RW disc will be erased com pletely Use this setting if the disc is not recognized even after being erased with Quick turned On 1a Aa Unused Full CurSng Specifies the area that will be checked Unused Of the unused area the first 2 GB of the area to be used next will be checked and repaired Full The entire area of the drive will be checked and repaired CurSong The area used by the currently selected song will be checked and repaired Press the Yes button to begin the Erase operation Sel O peration Format S This operat
314. oblem MTC messages are not sent consecutively to the D1600mkII the D1600mkII will detect the abnormal MTC state and may stop synchroni zation and halt playback In such cases you can lower the MTC RecvErrorLevel setting so that synchronized playback will continue even if some problems occur with MTC reception JS If this is set to 0 synchronized playback will not stop even if a problem occurs amp Depending on the compatibility between the two devices when a device other than the D1600mkII is used as the MTC master for synchronization correct synchronization may not be possible unless you start from the beginning of the song 000000000000000000000000009090 1 P4 MMC MMC settings The D1600mkII transmits and receives MMC MIDI Machine Control messages When synchronizing two D1600mkII units or when using the D1600mklII together with an MMC compatible MIDI sequencer you can playback stop or fast forward etc by operating only the master device amp Some MIDI devices may not respond to the MMC func tionality of the D1600mkII Details on the MMC func tionality of the D1600mkII are given in the MIDI implementation B U RSE pe sek Backup1Song BackupAllSongs BackupUserData Restore Selects the type of backup or restore operation You can press the le button and make your selection in the following dialog box Select Backup Restore Type BackupAllSongs i BackupliserData i Restore
315. ocation type 126 P2 InsEff1 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 1127 P3 InsEff2 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 2128 P4 InsEff3 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 3128 P5 InsEff4 Selection and settings for Insert Effect 4128 P6 Ins5 8 Selection and settings for Insert Effects 5 reene 128 20 MASTER EFFECT AUX NNN 129 P1 MstEff1 Selection and settings for master effect 1 129 P2 MstEff2 Selection and settings for master effect 2 129 P3 EffSnd1 Send settings for effect 1 0 0 129 P4 EffSnd2 Send settings for effect 2 130 P5 AuxSend External send settings ssssseeeese 130 P6 FinalEff Selection and settings for the final effect 130 21 SOLO MONITOR uscar 131 F rSOlo SOLO selectas 131 P2 Monitor Monitor settings e 132 22 METER TRACK NIE aa 133 23 TRACK STATUS esa 134 24 PAN r 134 29 FADER ere 134 26 TRANSPORT KEYS isvvirarimainsr zea 135 Effect Parameter List 137 Insert Effect 2in2outx2 Master Effect Final Effect 137 Reverb RVI RIV E 137 Delay DL D 137 Modulation MOL MO verrisnlan ains 139 Dynamics DVL SDN an 140 Special e ok b SE asis 142 Insert Effect 2in2outx2 Final Effect 143 Larse size LILES CI na aaa O Ee 143 Insert Effect 1in20utx2 e 144 E RE innnan N 144 PAS INDO iba 144 EE geed 145 EDP eent 145 Mita 145 VOLS VOZ iio oa 145 Effects within multi effect programs GT1 VO2 and their parameters ainue i a 145
316. of the song You will normally select this dis play type if you are using MTC synchronization From the left the numbers are Minutes Seconds Frames 1 30 second __Free Free Time The remaining time available for recording on the currently selected drive will be shown From the left the numbers are Minutes Seconds Ki To change the current time of the counter move the cursor to the counter value and use the VALUE dial to change the value fs If the counter display is set to Free the times in the STORE MARK SCENE A PUNCH LOOP and SCRUB pages will be displayed as absolute time MSM T AToQranre ke TK Oo 2 SYSTEM USB 000000000000000000000000009090 P1 Control Foot switch control change device pedal MIDI settings Fancontrot JE 001 01 000 FanContral 1 3 2 4 5 Pol FootSw Polarity sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns E This sets the polarity of the foot switch Connect a foot switch such as the separately sold PS 1 option to the front panel FOOT SW jack and set this parameter so that the polarity indicator F is lit when you press the foot switch Func FootSw Function Punchl O Play Stop Mark Select the function that the foot switch will control Punchl O The foot switch will start stop manual punch recording Use the TRACK STATUS keys to set the desired track to REC begin playback and press the foot switch at the location where you
317. og box select the PreFaderLev radio button and press the OK button EH PostFdr FkHold 5 07 03 52 OO Step 1 Quick Recording When you play your keyboard the channel 5 and 6 level meters will move 4 While watching the level meters turn the INPUT 5 and 6 TRIM knobs so that the level is as high as possible without allowing the level meters to reach CLP when you play your keyboard most loudly Set the input level by turning the TRIM knob so that the peak indi cator the LED near the TRIM knob lights when the volume is loudest Check the sound 1 Set the CHANNEL 5 6 faders to unity gain 0 dB 2 In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page make sure that the MasterLR button is On 3 While playing your keyboard slowly raise the MASTER fader You will hear the sound through your headphones or monitor speak ers Set the TRACK STATUS keys Set the status of the recording tracks playback tracks and other tracks 1 Press the track 5 and 6 TRACK STATUS keys to select REC LED lit red 2 Press the track 7 and 8 TRACK STATUS keys to select PLAY LED lit green 3 Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the remaining tracks to select MUTE LED dark Step 3 Mixdown Make effect settings Use the INSERT EFFECT InsAsn InsEff1 and InsEff2 tab pages to make insert effect settings For details on the procedure refer to 4 Make insert effect set
318. og inputs of the D1600mkII use high per formance balanced head amps that take full advan tage of its all digital audio quality The four XLR input jacks with 48V phantom power contain high quality mic preamps allowing condenser mics to be connected directly All phone jack inputs are balanced TRS types Unbalanced input is also supported Lev els from mic level to 16 dBu higher than profes sional level are supported letting you directly connect a wide variety of audio sources There s also a dedicated guitar input jack The S P DIF digital input contains a sampling rate converter allowing 48 kHz or 32 kHz sources to be automatically converted to 44 1 kHz for recording e Mixer section provides three band EQ with sweepable mid range e 100 scene memories and mixer data transmission reception via MIDI The D1600mkII s 24 channel 8 bus mixer section pro vides 3 band EQ high EQ and low EQ are shelving types and mid EQ is a peaking type with adjustable center frequency on every analog input and mixer channel Since EQ is applied separately to the inputs and the mixer you won t have the problem of record ing EQ settings being re applied to the playback a mistake that s easy to make with MTR systems that have an analog internal mixer Mixer parameters such as fader EQ pan and effect settings can be stored as a scene and each song can contain one hundred scenes Scenes can be switched automatically as time progresse
319. ol the corresponding mixer parame ters For the parameters that can be controlled refer to the MIDI implementation chart p 164 P3 Sync Synchronization settings By synchronizing the D1600mkII with an external MIDI sequencer you can simultaneously play back tracks of audio together with your external tone generator The action of making the D1600mkII operate at the same tim ing as a MIDI sequencer is called synchronization The device transmitting the synchronization clock is called the master and the device receiving the synchronization clock is called the slave The D1600mkII can operate either as the master or slave mresiaveon 8J001 01 000 Select MIDISyne Mode MTC RecvErrorLevel E 2 1 Select MIDISync Mode MTC Mstr MTC Slave Clock Met O ff Select the synchronization messages that will be transmitted and received from the MIDI IN OUT connectors MTC Mstr The D1600mkII will function as the master device for MTC 30 NDF MIDI time code 30 non drop frame messages MTC Slave The D1600mkII will function as the slave device for MTC 30 NDF MIDI time code 30 non drop frame messages Clock Mstr The D1600mkUH will transmit MIDI Clock messages Off The D1600mkII will not transmit or receive syn chronization messages 2 MTC RecvErrorLevel ctsccsccsssccnseceeneesene 0 10 Specify the MTC check level used if SelectMIDISync Mode is set to MTC Slave If due to some pr
320. olo and ending on the track the regions between these will record silence in reality a noise level signal unnecessarily occupying space on the drive O If you want to keep only the audio data of the intro solo and ending Execute the Optimize Track operation on the track you recorded from the beginning of the song to the end When executing set the Optimize Track Mode to Erase Silence This will leave only the actually used regions as audio data so that only the intro solo and ending will occupy space on the drive IN OUT Optimize Track y After execution Intro Data erased Solo LZ Gas Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 83 84 Example 2 You recorded an intro A B and solo on the first take and overwrite recorded A and B on the second take When you play back the track you will hear only the intro A and B However in actuality the A and B data you recorded on the first take will remain underneath A and B This is because the first take is saved as one piece of audio data and the track is using the intro and solo regions of this data Thus the audio data of the first take and second take are occupying the drive First take Intro a B Solo R
321. om the front panel turning the knob toward the right will darken the text and turning it toward the left will lighten the text 14 MIDI OUT connector MIDI messages are transmitted from this connector Use this when you wish to control a connected exter nal MIDI device from the D1600mkII 15 MIDI IN connector MIDI messages are received at this connector Use this when you wish to control the D1600mkII from a connected external MIDI device E e E E d Basic operation Objects in the LCD screen and their functions Preparations Listening to the demo song Objects in the LCD screen and their functions 1 Objects in the LCD screen The LCD screen of the D1600mkII features the Touch View system which uses a touch panel By pressing objects displayed in the LCD screen you can perform operations such as selecting pages setting parameter values moving the cursor location or editing settings In this manual terms enclosed in quotation marks such as button or tab refer to objects in the LCD sc screen EEN you can A Terms enclosed in square brackets such as key knob dial or fader refer to controls etc located on the top panel front panel or rear panel a Current parameter c Popup d Toggle display button button ee 001 01 Doc Manual 126 6404 as Metrod vol O70 Ebythmid t Sqtup Tuptter Emp ph e Tab b Edit cell a C
322. on BHI n BOUNCE HE 001 100 Indicates the backup source song number This is the song number of the song you selected in the SONG CD SelSong tab page e DI iaa S C U Selects the backup destination drive The drive ID drive information type and capacity and format type is dis played For this operation you can select either C or U S HDD The song drive of the hard disk You can t select this here C CD The CD R RW drive U USB DOS The USB drive of the hard disk ei HDD Op AMUSE DOS 3a Format Type ssssssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn B D16 B Audio Shows the format type of the CD R RW disc B Backup Type D1600mkII or D16 D1600 backup CD D12 B D12 D1200 or D1200mkII backup CD Audio audio CD fi If the disc is blank the format type will not be displayed DestinatiON C U CDx01 99 SONGOO1 100 Shows the backup destination drive and drive informa tion C CD x the number of discs required or U song name amp When backing up to CD R or CD RW you must use blank discs w LA TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD IOC COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END OAI RHYTHM CD USB 94 5 Rename If you select U USB DOS as the Drive you can edit the backup destinati
323. on and press the ENTER key Song Full TT You have exceeded the maximum number of songs that the drive can hold Delete unneeded songs ing is Copy Write etc _ The operation is being executed Please wait until this message disappears Obey Copyright Rules L When using digital input or when creating an audio CD please careful read COPYRIGHT WARNING p iii and comply with copyright law Error messages 4 amp INIT Internal Hard Disk Drive _ The data stored on the hard disk in order to start up the D1600mkII has been damaged for some reason gt When you press the OK button the data on the hard disk will be erased the D1600mkII will be able to start up normally However all data on the hard disk will be erased When turning the power off be sure to use the correct procedure p 11 AE Timeout _ Check the connections of the CD R RW drive and power cable If there are no problems with the connections it is possible that the D1600mkII has malfunctioned Blank Disc L Nothing has been written to the CD media Can tPlay CD _ The audio CD could not be played If the CD has not been finalized finalize it before you attempt to play it If the CD has been finalized check the connections of the drive If there are no problems with connections and operation try using different media Disc Error L When writing an audio CD there was not enough space on
324. on filename For details refer to 2 Naming a song p 35 You can input a filename of up to eight characters You may not use symbols or lowercase characters Renamerte BONG aaa 1 Backsp ClearAll B U Rst Type Backup User Data This operation backs up effect user data CD R RW You can back up all effect user data in a single operation USB drive You can back up all effect user data in a single operation or back it up individually execute II O01 01 000 iz D En User Data Eff All 6 Exec Execute sssesssssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannna Executes the backup Effect user data will also be backed up at this time B U Rst Type Backup All Songs This operation backs up the song drive of the hard disk and the effect user data This data can be saved only to a CD R RW disc selectbrive E OOO 00 000 H Backup All Songs n pat ALL CCD A 2 4 d SOUFCE sssssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnn ALL Indicates that all songs will be backed up d Drive coccion S C U Selects the backup destination drive For this operation select C CD d Destino C CDx01 99 Shows the backup destination drive and drive informa tion C CD x the number of discs required 5 Exec Execute sssesssssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannna Executes the backup Effect user data will also be backed up at this time Das a iii When backing up
325. ong p 35 After assigning the name press the OK button 8 Save the effect program If the song is playing press the STOP key to stop it Press the Store button to access the StoreEffect dialog box StoreEt tect GT S GuitarMultis Hau ReverbHall Specify the number for storing press the Exec button to save the effect program amp When you save the effect program it will be overwritten onto that number and the previous settings of that number will be lost 000000000000000000000000009090 6 Controlling an effect from an external device Select the effect program that you wish to control In the INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 InsEff4 tab pages choose the insert effect that you selected in step 3 Select EffectNumber and rotate the VALUE dial to select the effect program If the selected effect includes a control function and the conditions allow the effect to be controlled a symbol will be added at the end of the effect program name CEE GT5 GuitarMultis Specify the parameter to be controlled and the range of control Press the Effect Program Name button The Effect Algorithm dialog box that makes up that effect program will appear Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location You can also control an insert effect in realtime by using
326. onnect or disconnect a mic with the phantom power turned on you may damage your equipment Assign the input to a mixer channel 1 Press the INPUT TUNER key to access the INPUT TUNER Ch 1 8 tab page 2 Select the Ch 4 icon and use the VALUE dial to select INPUT 4 Check the level Assign the vocal signal to the track and check the level 1 Press the track 4 TRACK STATUS key to select INPUT LED lit orange 2 Press the METER TRACK VIEW key In the screen that appears press the E button to open the dialog box 3 Inthe Select DisplayMode dialog box select the PreFaderLev radio button and then press the OK button 4 Turn the INPUT 4 TRIM knob while you watch the level meter Check the sound 1 Set the Channel 4 fader to unity gain 0 dB 2 In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page make sure that the MasterLR button is On 3 Slowly raise the MASTER fader while you sing into the mic Check the sound in your headphones or monitor speakers TRACK STATUS key settings Set the status for the recording track playback tracks and remaining tracks 1 Press the track 4 TRACK STATUS key to select REC LED lit red 2 Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the playback tracks to select PLAY LED lit green 3 Press the TRACK STATUS keys of the remaining tracks to select MUTE LED dark Effect settings If desired make insert effect settings in the
327. op On 7 Begin recording When you press the REC key the D1600mkII will locate to the beginning of the pre roll time preceding the IN recording start point and will enter record ready mode The REC key LED will blink Press the PLAY key to begin playback Playback will occur for the pre roll time and record ing will begin at the IN time The REC key LED will light When the OUT time is reached recording will end and playback will continue for the post roll time The REC key LED will blink Then the D1600mkII will locate to the beginning of the pre roll time and the same operations will be repeated To stop press the STOP key at a point outside of the recording area IN OUT 8 Listen to the recorded content Use the undo redo function to select the best take 9 Press the UNDO key A list will show the latest and previous recordings Current Level EE Leuelg 2r RecordTrack ERE Record rack Lerelbdi Record Track 10 Rotate the VALUE dial to select what you believe to be the best take from the list 11 Press the Undo button to execute the Undo The selected take will be recalled 12 Play back and verify that you selected the correct take If the AutoPunch AtPunch tab page AutoP unch setting is On when you press the PLAY key the region between the recording start IN and recording end OUT points will play back as a loop 13 If you decide to ca
328. ording play back Tracks 1 16 can be used A maximum of eight tracks can be recorded simultaneously 24Bit 8 Track Create a song for 24 bit recording play back Tracks 1 8 can be used Tracks 9 16 are not availa ble A maximum of four tracks can be recorded simultaneously i When audio data is transferred to a 16 bit song it will be handled as 16 bit data For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track p 100 YA The SongType Bit Track setting can be changed only when creating a new song Ab MixerSet cccccccsecceceaeeueeeaeeusaeauenes N ew PrevSong Select the mixer settings for the new song New New settings will be used PrevSong The mixer settings of the currently selected song will be used P2 EditSong Song editing EditTupe 5J000 00 000 W 1 563 ETE AAS MS Your editing will affect the currently selected song YA You cannot Undo the results of these editing operations 1 Editfype cia CopySong MoveSong DeleteSong ProtectSong Selects the type of editing operation You can press the le button and make your selection from a dialog box Select EditSong Type Details of each operation you can select here are explained below Edit Type Copy Song This operation copies the selected song to the desired song number EditTupe 5 000 00 000 Te e TEC e SOUICESONG iaa 001 100 Shows the copy source song number To change this make your se
329. ording to record repeated takes over the same section and then use undo redo to choose the best take If you turn Loop On during auto punch recording the IN OUT region will be recorded repeatedly looped At this time playback will occur before and after the IN OUT region for the lengths specified by the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page settings for RolTime PreRoll and PostRoll 1 Register the region IN OUT that you wish to record p 46 This setting can also be made using Wave in the LOOP Loop or AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab pages 2 Connect the input device and adjust the recording level Refer to 1 Analog inputs and 1 Adjust the record ing level and record p 36 39 3 Specify how the sound will be output for monitor ing Refer to Manual punch in out step 2 p 40 4 Set the pre roll and post roll In the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page select RolTime Set PreRoll to specify the length of playback prior to the beginning of recording and set PostRoll to specify the length of playback after the end of record ing Set Unit to select the units in which the pre post roll times are set When you have made these settings press the OK button 5 In the AUTO PUNCH AtPunch tab page turn Auto Punch On The AUTO PUNCH key will light 6 In the LOOP Loop tab page turn Lo
330. ore source drive Choose C CD or U USB DOS For more about the drive refer to B U Rst Type Backup 1 Song p 93 Source Selects the restore source song or effect You can press the ie button and make your selection in a dialog box When restoring from a CD Restorelist A001 01 O00 G Resto re A kk 33 Ce PFICLISE EE Selects the file to restore Select RestoreSong MEE DernoSongae i SelectAll a REA cemoSonganz If you turn the SelectAll button on all songs will be restored Press the OK button to confirm your selection or press the Cancel button to cancel W hen restoring from the USB drive execute A00 01 O00 _ El Restore cm Inshi Erec F iskit 3p BackUpFleU ST ciar Selects the file to restore LS 50NG66a1 DEK Cancel SONGHRRS DBE In the BackUpFileList screen folders are shown as folder name To see the contents of a folder select folder name and press the OK button To go back up to the previous level select lt and press the OK button Press the OK button to confirm your selection or press the Cancel button to cancel You can delete a file or folder by pressing the Delete button amp Long filenames are not supported A You can t restore all data in a single operation WO Ul TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCR
331. ority Mid Mid way between Fast and Best Best Audio quality will be given priority However if SelectPitch 7b is set to Variable this setting will have no effect Tb SeletPitch ssssnsnssnnanannnnanannnnnnanan Fixed Variable Select the pitch at which the data will play back after expansion compression has been performed Fixed The pitch will remain the same Variable The pitch will be change When you press the OK button expansion compres sion will be executed with the conversion mode that you selected Press the Cancel button to cancel without executing Edit Type Copy Whole Track This operation copies the track data from the beginning to the end of the copy source track SourceTrack the currently selected virtual track to the specified virtual track of the copy destination track DestTrack amp When this is executed Exec the copy destination track will be overwritten Source Track DestVTrack a h Co sourcetrack 5J001 01 000 E 2 a E 5 Htr i Utr9 164 EditTrk E Import H Export 3 4 2 Sourcelrack sss 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the copy source track Ki In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available 3 Dest rack mmm 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the copy destination track Ki In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available A Deep TRACK ccoo a h
332. ou Sure T WIE SPCC ini a Specifies the speed of writing to the CD R RW When writing is finished the following message will appear If you want to write the same song to another CD press the Yes button If not press the No button E a E TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS METER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH UND LOC4 RHYTHM OD USB 112 If you pressed the Yes button the following message will appear and the CD drive will be ejected Insert another CD and press the Yes button WritelD Insert NextDisk pi i H 4fterInsert PressUk Co Since the image file is preserved the second and subse quent audio CDs will take less time to be created Changing the writing speed will not affect the time it takes to create the temporary image file that is created when writing an audio CD Depending on your system writing at 4x speed or faster may not be successful If so use a slower writ ing speed If you press the Abort button while writing writ ing will be aborted If you were writing to CD R the disc will be unusable If you were writing to CD RW you can perform the 3 Erasing the data from a CD RW p 83 operation and use the disc again E A Abs Track Abs Total Selects the d
333. ounce 42 6 Other recording methoden 43 o EE 45 de Eed Ee 45 Ze ROBT AMD A eactenunns oaesteeess 45 3 Other playback ee E 45 Changing the time locatiOn ccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 46 1 Switching the counter dieplay cee eee 46 2 Moving the current time location eee 46 3 Using scrub playback etc to find a precise time NOGA MO Mics bocce E E teasatin eavatscea ssa bond 47 USING The Mie ollo 48 L Adjusting the VOLUME s siccsiisewsdersssestecanctucsvaesieesevess 48 2 Adjusting the stereo position eee eee 48 3 Using EQ to adjust the tone ooooccoccccccononnanincananinins 48 Bs A AUN li 49 Ds lte 49 O25 SOLO SEU Y 24 OP PON O PO ovata vasa reese 50 7 Registering and playing scenes cconconccconononionanin nos 50 USING BEE 53 b Overview Ol the electa 53 2s Insert CHOCES E 53 SE EE 55 e Final etc 56 9y Edine Ar GE 56 6 Controlling an effect from an external device 57 7 Using an external e tec inns tosses auserenanveantandadticwinsons 58 MICA 58 Ly Creatine ana ioe Dx anda 58 2 Recording to a master open 60 J Usine Ihe Sub PU osa 60 TRACK eat teens 61 L Trackediting LUN CHONS keira 61 2 Track editing examples sarna 62 DONG Re In Le iia 69 Ly SONG editing Operas 69 2 Examples of song ecdtpng eee eee eeee 70 Rhythm tempo settings E 71 1 Specifying and playing a rhythm ssssssssseseseeesese 71 2 Recording your performance while you listen to Mera ovas I2 3 Recording the e E 72 A SP
334. p To avoid accidentally recording a track that has already been recorded use the TRACK Vtr1 8 and Vtr9 16 tab pages to see which virtual tracks are currently selected and which contain data w w TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS METER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO NI LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK Gel SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH END LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB 4 TRACK P1 Vtr1 8 Select virtual tracks 1 8 SelectAl HM 2 1 Select VirtualltaCK mmmcm mm la Lh 8a 8h Select the virtual track for each track 1 8 Each track has eight virtual tracks a h One of these virtual tracks can be selected for recording playback Selected track Recorded track Ze SCA arder On Off Turn this On if you wish to use the same virtual track number for all tracks 1 16 Then choose any Select VirtualTrack to choose the track SIDOR On All tracks will be set to the same virtual track number SelectAll Off The virtual track number can be selected independently for each track P2 Vtr9 16 Select virtual tracks 9 16 For details refer to Vtr1 8 amp This page cannot be selected for a 24 bit song 1 Select VirtuallrackK m mmm 9a 9h 16a 16h Select the virtual track for each pair of tracks 2 Selec lirica todabi
335. pair press the button to enable pairing the button will be highlighted The settings will be applied when you press the OK button note When pairing is on the pairing function will always apply to the fader and track status P2 Ch9 16 Select the inputs for mixer channels 9 16 Here you can select the inputs for mixer channels 9 16 Refer to P1 Ch1 8 Select the inputs for mixer channels 1 8 P3 InEq1 4 EQ settings for inputs 1 4 Here you can apply EQ equalizer to the analog inputs from the INPUT 1 INPUT 4 jacks Make these settings when you wish to directly record the sound that is adjusted by the EQ The EQ has three bands High EQ and low EQ are shelving type and the mid EQ is a peaking type with adjustable cutoff frequency amp This EQ cannot be used on the digital input S P DIF IN or on the rhythm S a 001 HI 000 Olla 1 3 i 4 2 1 InputLevelMeter 1 2 3 4 CLP 8 18 42dB This shows the level of each analog input The horizontal axis indicates the channel and the vertical axis indicates the level The level of inputs that are not selected in INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page will be displayed 2 InputHi9h occoocconnononor Fc 10kHz 15 0 15 0 dB Set the input high EQ gain This adjusts the high frequency range You can cut boost over a range of 15 0 15 0 dB ata 10 kHz cutoff frequency 3 INMI Fria 100Hz 20 0k Hz Specifies the cen
336. pitch of a desired track set SelectSource to Track and select the track number in the field located at the right Move to the time location at which you want to check the pitch and press the PLAY key to play back The note name and pitch will be detected Recording This section explains the basic recording procedure on the D1600mkII 000000000000000000000000009090 1 Adjust the recording level and record Here s how to record the audio that you specified in Assign audio inputs to the mixer p 36 Ki If you wish to create a new song and record into it refer to 1 Creating a new song p 35 Make sure that the RHSL key is Off gt p 135 1 Check the recording mode Access the RECORD RecMode tab page Set Select RecMode to Input Ge the audio input will be recorded inputon 5J000 00 000 E Select Rechiode Pf Bounce Use the CHANNEL fader to set the recording level Press the METER TRACK VIEW key Press the i button to select PostFaderLev and press the OK button Select DisplayMode _ PreFaderLey E C Trkviewi 8 C TrkViewl 1 Cancel CT rkWiewd um Gradually raise the CHANNEL fader and the level meter of the input channel will change according to the input Raise the level as far as possible without allowing the level bar to reach CLP fe PostFdr PkHald E 007 903 052 Snd Mon Mst 2 Mov
337. pply the insert effect to the input from an input jack Press the E button located below Select EffType to open the Select Effect Type dialog box SelectEf fectType E Gei Ur oute SE O in outs O lintoutsd 3 O linloutsS Select the 2in2out x 2 radio button and press the OK button 2in2out x 2 means that you can use two stereo in stereo out effects Specify the destination for the processed sound In this example we ll explain how to apply an insert effect to a stereo connected keyboard Connect your keyboard to the INPUT 5 and INPUT 6 jacks and assign the audio to mixer channels 5 and 6 For our example we will place insert effect 1 between INPUT 5 jack and mixer channel 5 and between INPUT 6 jack and mixer channel 6 1 Press the E button below InsertIo to open the Select InsertEffect AssignChannel dialog box Quick Start Insert Effect Select InsertEffect AssignChannel HIRO Step 1 Quick Recording Input SelectCh In this dialog box you can specify the mixer channel to which the sound processed by the insert effect will be sent For example the dialog box shown above is set as follows The upper left indicates INPUT 1 jack insert effect 1 gt mixer channel 9 This means that the audio signal from the INPUT 1 jack is processed by insert effect 1 and sent to mixer channel 9 The upper right indicates INPUT 3 j
338. pressing the FF key or REW key 2 Select DispParameter nccococccooooss Tempo Mark Scene Select whether the LCD display will show the current tempo mark or scene settings Press the Il button and you will be able to select from a list Select DispParameter SS Tempo Manu 128 64 64 Metrod Gg 461 Intro Tempo The display will show the tempo source tempo time signature and rhythm of the song D Tempo Manu 126 64 04 Metro Mark The display will show the number and name of the mark at or immediately before the current location in the song D Mark Scene The display will show the number and name of the scene for the current location in the song e Scene 081 Intro 3 Rename sssssssssnnnonnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Press the Rename button to access the dialog box and modify the song name A name of up to sixteen characters can be input For details refer to 2 Naming a song gt p 35 461 MarkHameb l This creates a new song following the last song of the currently selected drive Press the New button to access the dialog box MakeNew Gong CI MixerSet Cancel SongType Set SongType and MixerSet and press the OK button to create the new song If you press the Cancel button no song will be created da SONGTYPe ssassn 16Bit 16Track 24Bit 8Track 16Bit 16Track Create a song for 16 bit rec
339. put the track audio from the MASTER OUT L R jacks and listen to the rhythm only through headphones for example during a live performance Off The rhythm will be sent to the master LR bus When using bounce recording the rhythm will be recorded if you turn this Off If in the RHYTHM SetUp tab page you set Rhythm to Off the rhythm sound will not be sent to either bus regardless of this setting D ei TEEN On Off Sends the channel specified by Level to the monitor output When recording you can select this if you want to adjust the monitor volume and panning for the conve nience of the performer without affecting the recording level On The signal will be sent from monitor output Off The signal will not be sent from moni tor output A If solo is turned on for a signal in the Solo tab page you will be unable to turn this setting On In order to turn this On you must first turn solo Off in the Solo tab page 5 Level Cue Level s ssssssssnnnsnnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn Sets the level and panning for each mixer channel when Cue is turned On in SelectMonitor Press the Level button to open the Cue setting dialog box and make the desired settings 5a Pan Ch1 6 Balance Ch7 12 L63 CNT R63 Adjusts the panning or balance at which each channel cue signal is sent to the monitor output IDe
340. py Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute The display will indicate Completed when the operation is finished Press the Yes button RWA The data will be overwritten onto the copy destination track Press the TO LOC3 key and play back from the TO location to verify that the data was imported correctly Exporting writing a WAV file You can export data as a WAV file in the following for mats e Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz e Bit depth 16 bit 24 bit e Number of channels 1 monaural 2 stereo fe When exporting to CD R RW you can add more data to the disc later if desired MS An exported WAV file can be loaded into the D1600mkII or your computer even without finalizing the disc K When a WAV file is exported to CD R RW it is writ ten in ISO9660 level 1 format K A file exported to the USB drive can then be saved on your computer To exporta WAV file Here s how to copy the IN OUT region of tracks 1 and 2 from a 16 bit song to the clipboard and export it as a stereo WAV file to the USB drive 1 Se Select a 16 bit song Store the IN and OUT time locations 3 Copy the track data to the clipboard Surcerrax E 001 01 000 D SCT rack RER o ria itca ef EditTrk E In the TRACK Edit Trk tab page set EditType to Copy Track Select tracks 1 2 as the SourceTr
341. r Lmtr 91 MN4 Gate Polrty G Polarity crr Switches between non reversed and reversed Gate on off Thrshl Threshold dada 0 100 Sets the level to which the Gate is applied Attack G Attack oonononononi ni 1 100 Sets the attack time DER E 1 100 Sets the release time 92 MN5 Exciter2 The parameters are the same as for Excit2 93 MN6 Parametric 4band EQ Fol Band1 Cutoff Hz 20Hz 1 0k Sets the center frequency of Band 1 QIQ naan 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 1 G1 Gain Ue 18 18 Sets the gain of Band 1 Fc2 Band2 Cutoff Hz 300Hz 10 0k Sets the center frequency of Band 2 A KE 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 2 G2 Gain ls 18 18 Sets the gain of Band 2 Fc3 Band3 Cutoff Hz 300Hz 10 0k Sets the center frequency of Band 3 REH LOY WE 0 5 10 0 G3 Gain la 18 18 Sets the bandwidth of Band 3 Sets the gain of Band 3 Fc4 Band4 Cutoff Hz 500Hz 20 0k Sets the center frequency of Band 4 AE 0 5 10 0 Sets the bandwidth of Band 4 G4 Gain dB ra 18 18 Sets the gain of Band 4 Trim TrM EE 0 100 Sets the parametric EQ input level amp The Gate of 86 MM32 Reverb Gate is connected to the Wet output of the reverb This means that the on off switch of the Gate effect is linked to the Reverb and will be switched on off in con junction with the Reverb 94 MN7 Amp Simulator Type Amplif
342. r adjacent tracks simultaneously amp If data recorded at an extremely low level is normal ized any noise included in that region will also be boosted Procedure for normalizing Here s how to normalize the IN OUT region of track 1 1 Register the IN and OUT times Register the start and end times of the region you wish to normalize 2 Select the normalize command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to NormalizeTrack DestTrack II OO 01 000 Te H HormalizeTrack ua rs A US E DestTrack 3 Select the normalize destination track number Set DestTrack to track 1 4 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button 5 Verify that the data was processed correctly Press the IN LOC1 key to play back from the IN location and verify that the data was normalized correctly K You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command amp The longer the specified range IN OUT the longer this command will take to process until the Completed display appears Song editing You can copy a song you recorded change the order of songs or delete an unwanted song You can also apply a protect setting to prevent a song from being accidentally deleted
343. r the USB drive The D1600mkII can export WAV files in the following for mats e Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz e Bit depth 16 bit 24 bit e Number of channels 1 monaural 2 stereo MS When you export a WAV file to CD R RW the data is saved in I5O9660 level 1 format IS If you save files on the USB drive you can then connect your computer via USB and transfer re save the files on your computer When exporting 24 bit clipboard data you can choose whether to export it as 16 bit data or as 24 bit data If you select 16 bit you can also choose whether to apply dithering FS Dithering will make quantization noise less noticeable Seectbrive E 001 01 000 Export File LWtri 8 H VESD EA EditTrk a Import Esport GE 2 Y 4 Weit Indicates the state of the clipboard indicates the number of tracks in the clipboard e Dive sia S C U Selects the drive For details refer to Drive p 93 e un iaa ct Press the Rename button to open the dialog box and assign a name for the WAV file You can assign a name of up to six characters to the WAV file For details refer to 2 Naming a song p 35 MS The seventh and eighth characters of the filename will automatically be filled in as follows depending on the number of tracks you are exporting MN when exporting one track monaural file ST when exporting two tracks stereo file 01 when exporting four or more tracks a number of
344. r will be displayed as Off The single scene selected in Scene Number will be subject to deletion EOI ITET E This lets you view and edit the filter settings that are stored in the scene You can view and edit the filter settings you made in the Filter tab page Even when you store a scene with filtering applied the parameter values at that time are actually stored in the scene By using this page to edit the filter settings you can restore those parameters to the values they had when the scene was stored Recall AAA ere eereerereerreeereeereerree errr iaaa te This recalls the settings that are registered in a scene If you recall a scene and edit the EQ etc pressing the Recall button to recall it will recall the settings prior to editing 1 e the mixer settings that were registered in the scene LOWW EEN This overwrites the current mixer settings onto the currently selected scene number Use this when you wish to make detailed adjustments to the scene or to replace it with a different scene LL ED aia This will appear if the parameters stored in the scene have been edited P2 MixView Pan fader scene display Eo PPP Pan1 Pan16 This shows the currently selected pan settings When you select an icon the channel number and set ting value will be displayed in the upper left LOVE sesetecsnseceessserseesseeeeesseeeersssneenssenenas Levi Lev16 This shows the currently s
345. rack This operation deletes the track data from the IN OUT range of the delete destination track DestTrack When this is executed Exec the data of the IN OUT range will be discarded and any track data that followed the deleted range will be moved toward the beginning of the song IN OUT DestTrack a DestTrack UEL vt Te rer import fl Export 2 DestTrack wees 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the track s from which data will be deleted In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available 102 3 Exec Execute pario Execute the track editing operation This displays the audio data of the track as a waveform Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track gt p 100 Edit Type Swap Track This operation exchanges swaps the track data of the IN OUT range of the swap source track SourceTrack with the track data in the IN OUT range of the swap destination track DestTrack When this is executed Exec the data in the IN OUT ranges of the SourceTrack and DestTrack will be exchanged IN OUT Source Track SEE eG DestTrack _ ION _ B IN OUT SourceTrack B DestTrack 5 2 4 TC CEA import export 3 2 Sourcetrack ws 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Select the swap source track i In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are
346. re data You can also connect the D1600mkII to your compu ter via the USB jack and exchange data between your computer and the D1600mkII s USB drive 19 RECORD key Press this key to make recorder settings such as selecting the recording source or the bounce record ing method etc 20 TRACK key This key is used to select the virtual track for each track to perform track editing operations such as copy or delete and when importing or exporting WAV files 21 SON G CD key Press this key to create a new song rename select a song perform a song editing operation such as copy or move perform program playback of songs or pro duce an audio CD a CD R RW drive is required 22 STORE key Press this key to register the time location for a locate point a mark or a scene 23 MARK key This key registers the desired time location in a song as a Mark so that the registered time can be recalled instantly It is also used to edit marks by renaming or deleting them etc 24 SCENE key This key is used to register CHANNEL fader PAN knob EQ or effect send settings as a scene at the spec ified time location in a song If the Scene Read setting is on during playback the registered scenes will be selected automatically at the corresponding times Scenes can also be sorted renamed or deleted This key will light when Scene Read is On 25 TEMPO RHYTHM key This key is used to set the tempo for a song create a
347. recording to begin automatically in response to an audio input This key is also used to set the threshold level and pre trigger time This key will light when the Trigger Recording func tion is on 31 SCRUB key This key turns the Scrub Play To From and Slow Play functions on off The key will light when the Scrub function is On These functions are used by operating the VALUE dial or TRANSPORT keys 32 ENTER key This key is used to finalize a parameter selection or to turn a parameter on off 33 TRIM knob 60 10 4 dBu These knobs adjust the input level The markings indicate the input level The LEDs will show different colors to indicate the following statuses e Lit green input present e Lit orange correct level e Lit red excessive level Adjust each TRIM knob appropriately so that the LEDs do not turn red when the connected instrument is played at maximum volume The input level will depend on the instrument or per formance but the approximate ranges are as follows e 60 40 dBu mic input e 30 dBu guitar bass guitar e 10 dBu consumer audio devices such as a CD player e 4 dBu keyboards or studio equipment amp If the TRIM knob is raised when nothing is con nected to an input hum or noise may result 34 MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob This knob sets the volume level from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks 2 Front panel 1 2 GUITAR IN jack A guitar or
348. ring from CD R RW insert the disc into the CD R RW drive Select Restore In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to choose Restore Alternatively you can press the le but ton to display Select Backup Restore Type and make your selection execute e1001 01 000 1 ES U Il PwiREWEDEL Inspi1p Eec Control a MI M Sunc H MMC a DiskUtil Source B U RstType Destination Select the restore source drive Press the Drive button to open the dialog box Select C CD B or U USB DOS and press the Yes button If you are restoring from the USB drive select the effect user data that you want to restore Press the E button From the BackUpFileList select the effect that you want to restore For details on the file types refer to p 75 Press the Yes button Verify the restore destination If you are restoring all effect user data the display will indicate If you are restoring individual effect user data select the restore destination effect number Move the cursor to Destination and use the VALUE dial to make your selection Execute the restore Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute When execution is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the Yes button 3 Savi
349. ring the sound from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks has the master LR bus output been turned off In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page press the MasterLR button to turn it On Final effect does not apply L If you are monitoring the sound from the MONITOR OUT L R jacks has the master LR bus output been turned off In the SOLO MONITOR Monitor tab page press the MasterLR button to turn it On External effect does not apply AUX OUTI L Is the external effect send set to 0 or near 0 In the MASTER EFFECT AUX AuxSend tab page use Aux to raise the external send level _ Is the output of the external effect connected to the INPUT 1 INPUT 8 jacks and assigned to a mixer channel Use INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page to assign the input _ Are the sub input settings correct p 60 123 Rhythm No rhythm sound In the TEMPO RHYTHM Setup tab page is Rhythm turned Off Is the TEMPO RHYTHM key dark gt Turn Rhythm On Is the recorder stopped Press the PLAY key to play back The rhythm will sound when the recorder is recording or playing If you wish to check the rhythm sound while the recorder is stopped select the TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp tab page Did you select a silent rhythm pattern Has the rhythm volume been lowered In th
350. s Off De the effect will be applied Compare the effect and bypassed sounds View the effects and chain that make up the pro gram Press the EffectProgramName button to access the EffectAlgorithm dialog box that displays the structure of that effect program ae Cho F I Turn individual effects on off as desired Press the Effect On Off button located below each EffectIcon to turn it On highlighted or Off Edit the settings of each effect Press the EffectIcon button of the effect that you wish to edit The screen shown below is the dialog box when St Dly is selected Fdback 12 Hibarmp Mix 45 55 Select the parameter and rotate the VALUE dial to edit it For details on each parameter refer to Effect Parameter List p 137 You can use Effect On Off in the top of the dialog box to turn the effect on off This on off setting is linked with the Effect On Off button of step 5 The setting of one will be reflected by the other After making settings press the OK button If you wish to edit another effect press the Effectlcon button and edit the parameters In the EffectAlgorithm dialog box press the OK button Assign a name to the edited effect program Press the Rename button to access the RenameEffect dialog box For details on the renaming procedure refer to 2 Naming a s
351. s or can be easily recalled when desired as general purpose settings Mixer data such as fader and pan can be transmitted and received via MIDI allowing the mixer to be auto mated from an external sequencer The three independent built in effects Insert Master and Final use 44 bit internal processing For each of these three effects you can choose an effect program that consists of up to five effects taken from 98 types of high quality effect 128 insert 32 master and 32 final effects total 192 created by professional musi cians and studio engineers are provided as preset programs You can edit these preset effect programs and store 192 more of your own in the user area External MIDI controllers or an expression pedal EXP 2 XVP 10 sold separately can control an insert effect in realtime e Sophisticated editing The non destructive editing offered only by digital recorders lets you edit without impairing the high audio quality You can use auto or manual punch in out The Undo function that lets you revert to the state prior to a recording or editing operation in con junction with the Redo that cancels the Undo lets you step back through as many as 99 prior recording or editing operations Ten different track editing com mands include the convenient Time Expansion Compression operation that lets you match phrases of differing tempo after they have been recorded and Normalize that boosts low level tracks to the appro
352. s that the data will be copied Set Times to 3 6 Execute the editing command Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure so press the Yes button to execute the command When processing is completed the display will indicate Completed Press the OK button amp The data will be overwritten onto the copy destination track 7 Verify the results Press the TO LOC3 key to play back from the TO location and verify that the copy was performed correctly You can use Undo to return to the state before execut ing the command Procedure for copying to a track in a different song Here s how to copy the IN OUT region of song 001 track 1 to the TO location of song 002 track 2 once 1 Select song 001 2 Register the IN and OUT times 3 Select the Copy command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to Copy Track 4 Select the copy source track number Set SourceTrack to track 1 5 Select the clipboard as the copy destination track number Set DestTrack to Clip 6 Execute the copy command Refer to step 6 of Procedure for copying a track within the same song amp The data in the clipboard will be overwritten 7 Select song 002 Register the TO time location Select the Copy command In the TRACK EditTrk tab page set EditType to Copy Track 10 Select the clipboard as the copy source track
353. s the delay time for the left channel LFback L Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the left channel RTime R Delay Time msec 0 680 Sets the delay time for the right channel RFback R Feedback 100 100 Sets the feedback amount for the right channel HiDamp High Damp Do less 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the high range LoDamp Low Damp 0 100 Sets the damping amount in the low range LFO LFO Waveform ses TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Shape LFO Shape esser 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Phase LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right Speed Panning Frequency HZ Sets the panning speed 0 02 20 0 Depth Panning Depth 0 100 Sets the panning width Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Modulation MO 1 MO7 Category Modulation type effects 14 MOL St Chorus Stereo Chorus This effect adds thickness and warmth to the sound by modulat ing the delay time of the input signal A two band equalizer can be used to adjust the tone of the effect sound You can control the spaciousness of the sound by offsetting the phase of the left and right LFOs from each other LFO LFO Waveform ccce TRI SIN Selects LFO Waveform Phase LFO Phase
354. s the resonance amount Mix Wet Dry Wet 1 99 Dry 1 99 Wet Sets the phaser effect balance Delay This effect generates a time delayed copy of the input signal This effect is mono in stereo out DTime Delay Time 1 680ms Sets the delay time Fdback FeedBack 100 100 Sets the feedback amount HiDamp High Damp 0 100 Sets the high frequency attenuation of the feedback LoDamp LOW Damp 0 100 Sets the low frequency attenuation of the feedback Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds S Dly Stereo Delay This is a variation of Delay that allows two channels of simul taneous input The parameters are the same as for Delay Pitch Pitch shifter This effect shifts the pitch of the input signal You can choose from three types fast response minimum tonal change and a setting between these two Since a delay with feedback is also provided you can create special effects in which the pitch pro gressively steps upward or downward Mode Model Slow Medium Fast Switches Pitch Shifter mode Pitch Pitch Shift 1 2tone 24 24 Sets the pitch shift amount in steps of a semitone Fine Fine cent 100 100c Sets the pitch shift amount in steps of one cent DTime Delay Time msec 0 500 Sets the delay time FbSel Feedback Pos
355. sed mainly for dynamics processing compression etc to make the overall level more consist ent During mixdown you can use the final effect to apply mastering effects such as a multi band limiter in order to polish the mix for CD quality results 1 Access the MASTER EFFECT AUX FinalEff tab page Dieter 5 000 00 000 LO Weer Ja Metteg Huef ettsndl qe ttsnd pAussendy Finalett 2 Select an effect program Select EffectNumber and rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired effect program Play back and listen to the output from master LR to hear the result of the effect 5 Editing an effet You can edit modify the effect programs that are used as insert effects master effects and final effects amp If you change the EffectNumber or turn off the power without saving your edited effect settings will be lost If you wish to keep your edited settings you must execute the Store operation 1 Access the page for the effect that you wish to edit This illustration shows the INSERT EFFECT InsEff1 tab page as an example Effecttumber It 000 00 000 2 Select an effect program Select EffectNumber and rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired effect program 3 Listen to the sound produced by the effect program Press the Bypass button and bypass will be turned On Ge the effect will not be applied Then press the Cancel button to turn bypas
356. sent to mixer channel 3 The upper right indicates Off effect 2 gt Off This means that effect 2 is not used 2 Press the effect 1 SelectTr field and use the VALUE dial to select the track channel to which you will apply the effect E For this example select 4 5 3 Press the OK button in the dialog box Select an effect program 6 1 Press the INSERT EFFECT key to access the INSERT EFFECT A InsEff1 tab page E 2 Select the EffectNumber button and use the VALUE dial to select Effect Program List gt p 166 the effect program you want to use Erfectilumber IS 001 01 000 2 EffectNumber 2 0 You can also press the PLAY key and select an effect during play 6 back y D 2 Apply EQ equalizer EQ gt p 48 Here s how to make EQ settings for each mixer channel 1 Press the EQ PHASE key and from the EQ Eq 1 4 Eq 5 8 and Eq 9 12 tab pages select the tab page that contains the EQ you want to adjust 001 01 000 Isi Each channel has a three band EQ with Lo Mid and High and you can adjust the frequency of the Mid range Low EQ gain L fg 1 High EQ gain H 8 B Mid EQ gain M EE Mid EQ center frequency F 2 Select each EQ icon and turn the VALUE dial to specify the value The numerical value is shown in the upper left of the screen Negative gain settings will cut the corresponding frequency
357. sert FX 2in20Ut x 2 Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX 2in2out x 2 1imlout x 4 1in2out x 2 Linlout x 8 Effect Control Master FX Final FX 36 LS5 Early Reflections L This early reflection effect has more precise early reflections with twice the maximum length of a normal size effect You can create a very smooth and dense sound Type Type A Sharp Loose Modula Revers Time ER Time msec 10 1600 PreDly Pre Delay msec 0 200 EQTrim EQ TiM sin 0 100 LEQG Pre LEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 HEQG Pre HEQ Gain dB 15 0 15 0 Mix WMetfnd Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet 37 LS6 Rotary Speaker Selects the decay curve for the early reflection Sets the time length of early reflection Sets the time taken from the original sound to the first early reflection Sets the input level of EQ applied to the effect sound Sets the gain of Low EQ Sets the gain of High EQ Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds This effect simulates a rotary speaker and obtains a more realis tic sound by simulating the rotor in the low range and the horn in the high range separately The effect also simulates the stereo microphone settings ODSW OverDrive SW cece Off On DGain OverDrive Gamm 0 100 DLevel OverDrive Level 0 100 DTone OverDrive Tone neccsser 0 15 SP sim Speaker Simulator
358. settings In this example press the Song Type radio button 16Bit 16Track In the Mixer Set area press the New radio button 4 Press the OK button This creates a song named NEWSONG If any songs exist already You can press the Rename button and input a name for the the new song will be created following the existing songs song 2 Naming a song MakeMewsong_15 001 01 000 We 482 HEWSONG p 35 E Tempo Manu 120 04 04 Metrod SelSong Eden PraPlay SCDE NS 4 Rhythm Now let s make rhythm settings so that you can listen to a rhythm pattern while you record Rhythm settings 1 Press the TEMPO RHYTHM key Then press the Setup tab to access the TEMPO RHYTHM Setup tab page You can also access the Setup tab page by pressing the TEMPO RHYTHM key several times TempoSource Tempo Beat TempoSource Jet 001 01 OO c1 1 SelRhythm Vol Rhythm 2 ce the ESD ue button to make the display read Rhythm i The TEMPO RHYTHM key will light 3 Raise the MASTER fader and verify that you hear the rhythm Use the front panel PHONES LEVEL knob to adjust the volume of your headphones or use the top panel MONITOR OUT LEVEL knob to adjust the volume of your monitor speakers Quick Start Set the tempo time signature rhythm pattern and rhythm volume 1 Select TempoSource and turn the VALUE dial to select the tempo Source
359. sing the C type curve Press the OK button to finalize the selected fade type or press the Cancel button to cancel the setting 105 TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO FF IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH JEND LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB 106 Edit Type Normalize Track If the recorded level is too low this command can be used to boost the specified region IN OUT of track data so that the peak level will be at maximum level before clipping amp The normalize destination track will be overwritten IN OUT IN Max Level Max Level OUT DestTrack 2J001 01 000 TE HormalizeTrack UJ Ut E edite Tmpart fl Export 2 DeStTrackK sasssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 1 16 1 2 15 16 Select the normalize destination track For a 24 bit song only up to tracks 7 8 can be selected 3 Exec Execute aaa Execute the track editing command This displays the audio data of the track as a waveform Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track gt p 100 P4 Import Importa WAV file You can import a WAV file saved on CD ROM R RW or the USB drive and paste it into a track of the D1600mkII You can also use the clipboard to paste the data
360. song data Backing up song data You can back up song data in the following ways e Backup1Song Back up the single selected song e BackupAllSongs Back up all songs CD R RW only e Effect user data will also be saved e A backed up song cannot be played directly In order to play the song you must first restore it into the D1600mkKII To back up to CD R RW Here s how to back up all songs to CD R RW amp No further data can be written to a CD R RW disc you use for a backup amp The CD R RW created by this backup operation is not in 1509660 format You will not be able to load it into a computer or play it on a CD player 1 Insert a CD R RW disc into the CD R RW drive You must use a blank disc To erase the contents of a CD RW disc so that it can be used as a blank disc refer to 3 Erasing the data from a CD RW p 83 2 Select BackupAllSongs In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to select BackupAllSongs Alternatively you can press the E button to open the Select Backup Restore Type dialog box setectDrive e 000 00 000 Source B U Rstlype Destination 3 Verify the songs you want to back up Make sure that Source is set to ALL 4 Select the backup destination drive Press the Drive button to open the dialog box Select C CD and press the Yes button 1 S HO038 36 AMUSE DOS
361. ss the RECORD RecMode tab page Select Bounce bounce recording 3 Select the bounce mode Access the RECORD Bounce tab page Set BounceMode to 14Tr 2In 2Tr 4 Choose the currently selected tracks for recording Set Record VirtualTrack to Current 5 Select the tracks for playback and recording Press each TRACK STATUS key to set the playback tracks 1 14 to PLAY LED lit green and the record ing tracks 15 and 16 to REC LED lit red 6 Adjust the stereo positions of the playback tracks and the input sources Press the PLAY key and rotate the PAN knob to adjust the stereo positions of channels 1 14 Set chan nel 15 to the left and channel 16 to the right 7 Adjust the playback input levels Use the CHANNEL faders to adjust the playback level and input level Press the METER TRACK VIEW key Press the I button to access the dialog box Select PostFaderLev so that you can view the meter dis play for each fader 8 Adjust the recording level Use the MASTER fader to adjust the recording level When you are finished making adjustments press the STOP key 9 Start bounce recording Refer to steps 8 11 of Combining 16 tracks of audio and overwriting them onto 2 tracks p 42 fs After recording or track editing you can use Undo to return the data to the state before recording or track editing After returning to the state before recordi
362. st the send amount est alt 001 01 000 ER Kan EEA Eed Gig uuxSendf FmalETT 3 Input the audio from the external effect processor Select the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page Chi ith ichs Cht ChoiCh6 Chr Cher di EH Digiln a Select the In3 4 Fader icon and turn the VALUE dial to set the return level Use the Balance icon to adjust the return balance Mixdown You can use mixer settings such as EQ faders and effects to adjust the audio from each recorded track and combine the result into two tracks to create your own CD or record it on an external two channel recorder DAT recorder MD recorder cassette recorder etc to create a finished song This process is called mixdown 1 Creating an audio CD You can use the CD R RW drive to create an original CD from songs you record on the D1600mklII amp In order to create an audio CD the hard disk must have free space equivalent to the size the total of the two channels of the song you are creating For example if you want to create an audio CD of a five minute stereo song the D1600mkII s hard disk must have free space for at least five minutes of stereo ten minutes of monaural recording For details on the free area of the hard disk refer to 1 Select Time Disp Type p 91 To write a song to CD 1 Check the completed song Use the faders and knobs to adjust the volume and
363. ster the corresponding location IN LOC1 key IN time OUT LOC2 key OUT time TO LOC3 key TO time END LOC4 key END time For details refer to Using the locate keys to move p 46 The IN OUT TO and END times are used as follows by each editing command How the editing commands use the IN OUT TO and END times Copy Track Blank insert Blank insert Insert Track start time end time Eso mack Erase start Erase end time time Delete Track Delete start Delete end time time Swap Track Reverse Track Fade Track Normalize Copy source Copy source Copy destina start time end time tion start time Swap start Swap end time time Reverse start Reverse end Reversed copy destination time time l start time Optimize Optimize end start time time Expand com Expand com press result press desti copy destina nation end tion start time time Fade starttime Fadeendtime Normalize Normalize start time end time Expand com Expand com press start press end time WA Depending on the EditType the Wave button may appear allowing you to view the waveform as you specify the location more precisely p 101 2 Access the TRACK EditTrk tab page SourceTrack 6 001 01 000 Ti EI CopyTrack MN x CU IE EditTek import i Export Y Select the type of operation that you wish to execute copy insert blank etc Select EditType Select the are
364. storeSong dialog box and select the song that you want to restore When restoring from CD R RW From the file list select the song that you want to restore Select RestoreSong SelectAll RY MEE GorcotGonopp Cancel ECES DermoSongaas If you want to restore all songs turn on the Select All button Select the desired song and press the Yes button When restoring from the USB drive From the file list select the song that you want to restore E Cancel SONGHRRS DER You cannot restore all songs in a single operation Select the desired song and press the Yes button 5 If you are restoring a single song select the restore destination song Move the cursor to Destination and use the VALUE dial to select the restore destination song number 6 Execute the restore Press the Exec button The display will ask AreYouSure Press the Yes button to execute If you are restoring from a multi disc backup you will be requested for the next disc when necessary When this occurs insert the next disc and press the Yes button Insert the discs in the order in which they were backed up When the operation is finished you can choose to restore effect user data If you do so the effect user data currently on the hard disk will be overwritten FestorelUserCata di Overwrite arerouSsure Press the Yes button The effect user data will be re
365. stored overwriting the effect user data on the hard disk If you press the No button the effect user data will not be restored RA When you restore from the USB drive effect user data will not be restored if there is no effect user data file of the same name as the song you are restoring 7 When the operation is finished the display will indicate Completed Press the Yes button 2 Backing up and restoring effect user data Backing up effect user data You can back up effect user data in the following ways e Back up all effect user data e Back up individual effect user data only to the USB drive MS You can also save all effect user data as part of a song data backup amp When you restore the effect user data currently on the hard disk will be overwritten Backing up to CD R RW Here s how to back up all effect user data to a CD R RW disc 1 Insert the CD R RW into the CD R RW drive 2 Select BackupUserData In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to choose BackupUserData Alternatively you can press the E button to open the Select Backup Restore Type dialog box and make your selection there setectorive 001 01 DU KH Source B U Rstlype Destination 3 Select C CD as the backup destination drive Press the Drive button to open the dialog box Select C CD and press the Yes button
366. t KK TId TTL4euny TILA TTI Tena Ara KK Bld 100 xn TL4eun Gla ott OK d CSMAAOFTUOPOL 61 43un aage CSNQGAOZTUOPJO gt 8d ang ii 81 4sun y i E emt IS WW za ln Settle 17 Sd IN m s14euny A Eed i ES ES e plaun IEE S ar lasun 43 cla lt ET LAUN L yl D i Zd TILA e ZLAeunl zuJ SES i gu E TLASUPL gt r H sNgosyo1 gt f n CB pus IW 00128111111 EE Kee L4 l TPUS i a 443 BLEU i Seals i UEJ dSpey SN4e45 E gt 4J Adel AA 2 E TUI l aaun H Ued 837 Ea BS ita eg TUI 6 aounog Zau ey HE EA 91d an ai an ai ly ES EA y ES EES d fen em o pp u 3 uu a a EE Ree o on nie Wee H 3 S n NM EE A 1491 PN uI ed UYY EST buos queq 8779S SAPS SUT 27 95 Sd PISUT 9199333Y149S5UT y199333Y1495UT 2199333Y49SUT Y4507 TUONO 22H Ei as 3 as g anuon antasay paged AE H atoa s PLA Hi 31045 Step e lt H ll Ema SO al M an WIA er A sa Ca e D D De WIA G i us di ki WIA 08 Hal fs ke E e d 7 tan i WIA op Ga e A a L L la L WIA WIM oT Si Si Si o kb mt cuy ya S la xX pul andino orpny 34140 403 Saw C ol ll Ernai binant ao ASP WOLNDHd SEI aot ABp WOLNSHd Z1naN1 ao A8p WOLNDHd minani oc ASh WOLNSHd 165 INSERT EFFECT Preset128 User128 Fotoe ProgramName Algorithm 9
367. t has been designed and manufactured Ha ndling of the internal hard disk according to FDA regulations title 21 CFR chapter 1 Do not apply physical shock to this device In particular subchapter J based on the radiation Control for Health you must never move this device or apply physical shock and Safety Act of 1968 and is classified as a class 1 laser while the power is turned on This can cause part or all of product There is no hazardous invisible laser radiation the data on disk to be lost or may damage the hard disk during operation because invisible laser radiation emitted or interior components inside of this product is completely confined in the protective housings The label required in this regulation is shown below When this device is moved to a location where the tem perature is radically different water droplets may con dense on the hard disk If the device is used in this condition it may malfunction so please allow several hours to pass before operating the device CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of proce dures other than those specified herein may result in haz Do not turn the power on and off repeatedly This may ardous radiation exposure damage the D1600mkII This device begins to access the hard disk immediately Optical picku after the power is turned on P PE SE Type gt SF W35 Never turn off the power while the HDD access indicator is lit or blinking Doing so can cause
368. t the recording level 9 Begin mix recording Refer to steps 8 11 of Combining 16 tracks of audio and overwriting them onto 2 tracks p 42 6 Other recording methods Trigger recording This is a function that uses the input level trigger to initiate recording Recording will begin at the instant that sound is input to the D1600mkII ThresholdLewel E OO0 00 000 TriggerRectOn 1 Connect the input device and set the recording level Refer to 1 Analog inputs and 1 Adjust the record ing level and record p 36 39 2 Select trigger recording Access the TRIGGER Trigger tab page and turn TriggerRec On the TRIGGER key will light 3 Press the REC key to enter record ready mode LED blinking 4 Begin playing When the input level exceeds the threshold level Threshold recording will begin automatically IS Refer to Threshold and PreTrigTime p 121 WA You can use the Rehearsal function to check the threshold level 5 When you have finished playing press the STOP key to stop LA Basic Operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Ee po teem Assign audio inputs Playback Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythny tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 44 Loop recording When using auto punch recording you can use Loop re c
369. t time location will always be in the center and the audio events will be shown as bars TEEN 5 Te FE Eni Mon Mst P E la ScaleChangeSw iocccccocoocorosooronoano 5 10 20 40 This changes the region displayed in the track view Each time you press the button you will cycle through expanding or shrinking the display in a range of 5 sec 40 sec The button is displayed as 4 when expanding or as 4 when shrinking 5sec Display 5 seconds before and after the current loca tion 10sec Display 10 seconds before and after the current location 20sec Display 20 seconds before and after the current location 40sec Display 40 seconds before and after the current location Snd1 2 Mon L R Mst L R sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn These are the level meters for Snd1 2 effect send 1 2 Mon L R monitor L R and Mst L R master L R WA Mett R is also displayed at the right of the page in SONG CD TRACK RECORD INPUT TUNER and EQ PHASE modes allowing you to check the master LR level PK O luisana 0 Be Specify the time until the peak hold of the level meter is cancelled PeakHoldT ime 2s This setting applies to the level meters of this page Press the PkHold button to access the dialog box and make the desired setting Press the OK button to activate your selection or press the Cancel button to cancel
370. t when mixing down to DAT or MD Setting up a program 1 Access the SONG CD PrgPlay tab page EXPERTO A 2 Select the first song Use the scroll buttons to select 01 in the program play list and rotate the VALUE dial to select a song If you wish to change the drive press the Drive button Select the desired drive in the Drive Select screen 3 Select the second third and subsequent songs in the same way MS To delete a song from the list select the song and rotate the VALUE dial to select MS The program play list is maintained until you turn off the power amp The program play list can be played only when the PrePlay tab page is displayed Playing the program Playlist 1 Access the SONG CD PrgPlay tab page 2 Press the PLAY key to begin playback Songs will be played in the order of the list starting with the first song of the program During playback you can press the FF key to skip to the next song or the REW key to skip to the beginning of the current song or if you are already at the beginning of the cur rent song to the beginning of the previous song 3 Press the STOP key to stop playback 3 Other playback options Loop playback This function repeatedly plays the IN OUT region of the song This is convenient when you wish to audition that region and is also used in conjunction with auto punch recording to perform loop recording 1
371. tab page Select TempoSource and turn the VALUE dial to choose Manual For details on Tempo Beat and SelRhythm settings refer to 1 Specifying and playing a rhythm p 71 Tempo map The tempo map lets you specify tempo time signature and rhythm pattern for each measure so that these will change at the specified measure within the song 1 Set the tempo source to Tempo Map Access the TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp tab page Select TempoSource and turn the VALUE dial to choose TempoMap 2 Make settings for the first tempo map event 001 which specifies the initial tempo at the beginning of the song MS The tempo map for a song consists of tempo map event 001 which specifies the initial tempo at the beginning of the song and tempo map events 002 200 which you can specify to change the tempo etc at measures within the song Access the TEMPO RHYTHM TmpMap tab page tempomap II 001 01 000 1 1 e GASTE Measiaai aa2 J 128 t t Metrod Select TempoMap and turn the VALUE dial to select tempo map event 001 Press the Edit button to open the Select TempoMap 001 Param dialog box Select Tempolapaas Par arm Meas opd EE 1101 Beat 6404 Metrot Tempo 126 Rhuthr Ir Use Tempo to set the tempo Beat to set the time signature and Rhythm to specify the rhythm p
372. tch change of the sweep to be set independently for left and right 12 DL5 StDynamic Delay Stereo Dynamic Delay This stereo delay controls the level of delay according to the input signal level You can use this as a ducking delay that applies delay to the sound only when you input signals at a high velocity or only when the volume level is low Contrl Control Tome None Out FB Polrty Polarity tanatorios cee Thrshl Threshold cc cececsscsseseeseens 0 100 Offset Offset 0 Ataca casa 1 Relse Release ee EENEG 1 100 0 0 Dm CO So LTime L Delay Time msec RTime R Delay Time msec Fdback Feedback 100 100 HiDamp High Damp 0 100 a CO So LoDamp Low Damp 0 100 Spread SG preat een 100 100 Mix Wet Dry coco Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Control Target Selects from no control output and feedback Reverses level control Sets the level to which the effect is applied Sets the offset of level contro Sets the attack time of level control Sets the release time of level control Sets the delay time for the left channel Sets the delay time for the right channel Sets the feedback amount Sets the damping amount in the high range Sets the damping amount in the low range Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds
373. te unneeded data Alternatively you may be able to solve this problem by shutting down the D1600mkII and starting it up again MIDI Overflow When receiving MMC or recording MIDI Clock reception of MIDI data failed Delete any unnecessary data that the transmitting device might be sending No CDRW Disc The media you are attempting to erase is not a CD RW Execute the Erase operation on a CD RW No Disc CD media is not inserted No Drive No Disk AE Timeout No Event When writing to audio CD tracks 1 and 2 did not contain audio data gt Bounce the data to be written to CD onto tracks 1 and 2 No internal hard disk drive L The internal hard disk cannot be detected Install the internal hard disk If it is already installed check the installation once again If the CD R RW drive is installed check the installa tion of the CD R RW drive Number Of Tracks L When performing a track editing operation there is a different number of source and destination tracks Specify the same number of tracks for the source and destination L Copying is not possible because Clip contains no data Either copy data into Clip or select a different copy source track SameFileN ameExists L When exporting a WAV file or backing up to the USB drive a file of the same name already exists in the export destinat
374. tem on your computer support the D1600mkII p 85 96 CD R RW CD R RW drive is not detected LI Did you subject the D1600mkII to vibration or impact The CD R RW drive in the D1600mkII is a removable unit Check that the CD R RW drive is installed correctly p 160 Can t write TT You can t write any more data to a CD R RW disc that has been finalized You can t write to a CD RW disc that contains data created by another device L Writing to the CD failed Try lowering the CD R RW writing speed Try different media Can t play the disc in an audio CD player L Did you finalize the disc In the SONG CD CDR RW tab page to finalize the disc p 34 59 L Did you use CD R media Since some CD players are unable to play back CD RW media we recommend that you use CD R media _ Try a different type of media gt Even when you use the recommended CD R RW media some CD players are unable to play certain types The player may be able to play the disc if you use a different type of media Can t back up to CD R RW _ Are you using a blank disc If using CD R use new unused media If using CD RW use the SONG CD CDR RW tab page Erase button to erase the contents of the media before you execute the backup Various messages Confirmation messages Completed The operation was executed successfully Select the OK butt
375. ter frequency of the input mid EQ The range is 100 Hz 20 0 kHz A INpUtMid ven 15 0 15 0 dB Set the input mid EQ gain This adjusts the mid frequency range You can cut boost over a range of 15 0 15 0 dB at the cutoff frequency specified by InMidFc 124 2 INpUOW sssr Fc 100Hz 15 0 15 0 dB Set the input low EQ gain This adjusts the low frequency range You can cut boost over a range of 15 0 15 0 dB ata 100 Hz cutoff frequency P4 InEq5 8 EQ settings for inputs 5 8 Apply EQ equalizer to the analog input from the INPUT 5 INPUT 8 GUITAR IN jacks Refer to P3 InEq1 4 EQ settings for inputs 1 4 P5 Tuner Tuner You can use the built in tuner to tune an instrument connected to the INPUT 8 GUITAR IN jack You can also determine the pitch of a track amp This page cannot be selected during recording or play back Nor is recording possible In order to allow accurate tuning the insert effects and master effects will automatically be turned off when this page is displayed RO In order to detect the pitch accurately the effects will automatically be turned off while you are in this page 1 Ge 001 01 000 leit L CENT Scale sssssssnansnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 50 50 The V symbol in the center will change to Y when the tuning is correct The amount of pitch deviation is shown in units of cents 100 cents 1 semitone and 1200 cents 1 o
376. tering a scene 1 Turn SceneRead On Access the SCENE ReadDel tab page BGL NEW SCENE 001 091 808 Press the SceneRead button to turn it On When this is On the SCENE key will light 2 Play back the song Move to the desired location and press the PLAY key to begin playback When playback reaches the registered time the scene will change automatically Recalling a scene Here s how to recall mixer settings that you registered in a scene 1 Turn SceneRead Off Access the SCENE ReadDel tab page Press the SceneRead button to turn it Off When this is Off the SCENE key will turn off amp If SceneRead is On it will not be possible to recall a scene that was registered at a different time location 2 Recall the scene In the SCENE ReadDel or MixView tab page move the cursor to SceneNumber and rotate the VALUE dial to select the desired scene The selected scene will be recalled Re registering a scene at another time location Here s how you can re register a previously registered scene at a different time location 1 Recall the scene that contains the mixer settings you wish to re register Select the scene as described in Recalling a scene 2 Move the current time to the location at which you wish to re register the scene p 46 3 Register the scene Press the ST
377. the D1600mkII and of the connected devices amp Before turning off the power turn the volume of all devices down to the minimum position and turn off the power switches beginning with the devices that are at the end of the audio signal chain amp When you wish to turn off the power you must per form the shutdown operation Never turn off the Main power switch or disconnect the power cable until the shutdown has been completed If you turn off the main power or disconnect the power cable be fore shutdown is complete data or user settings may be lost or you may damage the hard disk amp Audio that is recorded on the D1600mkII and the mixer settings you make are saved automatically when you select or switch songs or when you shut down However effects that you edit will be lost un less you save them 1 If you wish to keep any effect settings that you edited save them Refer to 5 Editing an effect p 56 2 Lower the MASTER fader of the D1600mkII to the position Lower the volume of any external devices to the minimum position 11 E O iv p K o amp T y G W C 0 5 Of Ye y F Ka Zo 3 EE y E ae Y O O c O D D D el O U f Listening to the demo song 12 Turn off the power of the external output devices such as your monitor system to which audio is being sent from the D1600mkII Press and hold down the D1600mkII s POWER key to shut
378. the data will be copied 5 Exec EXecute s ssssusssuunsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns Execute the track editing operation This displays the audio data of the track as a waveform Here you can set the editing locations IN OUT TO more precisely For details refer to Edit Type Copy Track gt p 100 Edit Type Optimize Track This operation optimizes the IN OUT region of the optimize destination track DestIrack Destra E 001 01 0 000 2 DestTrack vurn 1 16 1 2 15 16 1 4 13 16 1 8 9 16 1 16 Selects the optimize destination track MS In a 24 bit song only tracks 1 8 are available 3 Mode un Normal Erase Silence Erase Punch Noise Selects the type of optimization Select Optimize Mode Erase Silence Erase Punch Moise Normal Multiple audio events in the IN OUT region will be consolidated to prevent DiskBusy errors from occurring If there is no silence or only a small amount of silence between one audio event and the next they will be combined into a single audio event If there is a long area of silence the data will be handled as separate events to avoid wasting space MS By executing optimization with the IN OUT region set to the beginning and end of the song you can ensure that the data is in the ideal condition for access by the hard disk IN OUT SourceTrack l 1 71 Desttrack Erase Silence If an extended recording contains numerous regions
379. the tap tempo Press the RecStart button to put the D1600mkII in record ready mode Press either the PLAY key or the foot switch and playback and recording will begin simultaneously While listening to the playback press either the PLAY key or the foot switch at the intervals you selected in step 4 to record the tap tempo A counter will be displayed while tempo is being recorded MNowRecordingTempoTrack Meas 0603 Beat 61 EndTap S5T0P amp When pressing the PLAY key to record taps do not strike the key with excessive force Doing so may cause the hard disk or other components to malfunction Stop recording After entering the last tap press the STOP key to end For example if you are recording four measures of 4 4 time you would tap 4 times for MeasTap or 16 times for BeatTap and press the STOP key at the beginning of measure 5 If you input taps only part way through the song the tempo of the last input measure or beat will be auto matically copied until the end of the song Select the tempo track as the tempo source Access the TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp tab page Select IempoSource and rotate the VALUE dial to select TempoTrk Data When you switch songs or turn off the power the D1600mkIT s auto save function automatically saves the song you recorded or edited and its parameters This means that it is not absolutely necessary for you to explicitly perform a
380. ther time location Here s how to move a registered scene to another time lo cation 1 Recall the scene As described in Recalling a scene recall the scene that you wish to move 2 Move the time location of the scene Press the EditLoc button EditSceneLocation 61411 Loc 888 ea 490 EJ Specify the time location in the dialog box and press the OK button to execute the move 31 Basic operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording time location U T4 4 98 Changing the mixer MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythn tempo Song Track Mixdown Using the system settings editing editing effects 32 Scene filtering 1 In the SCENE ReadDel tab page press the Filter button to display Select SceneFilter 2 Select the parameters whose settings you wish to disable There are two pages of settings and you can use the Next button to access the next page Select SceneFilter The first page contains settings for the parameters of each channel For example you can use the filter to disable the pan settings for channels 5 and 6 by turn ing the 5 6 and Fader buttons On Select SceneFilter InsEft MstEf1 Wert FinalEf The second page contains settings for overall parame ters As in the first page turn on the parameters that you wish to disable Press the OK button to finalize the settin
381. tings p 24 Step 4 Mastering 21 22 Check the recording mode If you have already checked the recording mode there s no need to check it again if so proceed to the next step 1 Access the RECORD RecMode tab page and make sure that Select RecMode is set to Input Record 1 Set the recording start position to the beginning of the song For details on the counter dis At the beginning of the song the counter value will be 001 01 000 play and on how to change the or 000 00 000 time location refer to Chang ing the time location p 46 2 Press the REC key and then press the PLAY key to start recording 3 When you have finished recording press the STOP key Play back 1 Hold down the STOP key and press the REW key to return to the beginning of the song 2 Press the TRACK STATUS key to set the recorded tracks to PLAY 3 Press the PLAY key to play back 3 Record vocals on virtual tracks In this example we ll record several takes of vocals on the virtual tracks of track 4 Connecta mic 1 Turn the top panel TRIM knob to set INPUT 4 to the minimum level 4 dB 2 Lower the MASTER fader and then connect your mic to the INPUT 4 jack If you are using a condenser mic you must connect it to the INPUT 4 jack and then turn the phantom power switch on amp Never turn on the phantom power switch before you connect the mic If you c
382. to CD R RW you can specify the writing speed Press the Yes button to begin the backup 2 4 5 2 SourceEffN 0 EffAll Ins001 128 Mst001 032 Fin033 064 Shows the backup source effect number You can select EffAll only if you are backing up to the CD R RW drive EffAll All effect user data Ins001 128 Insert effect user data Mst001 032 Master effect user data Fin033 064 Final effect user data Selects the backup destination drive For this operation you can select C or U For details on the drive refer to B U Rst Type Backup 1 Song p 93 4 Destination sssssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn C CD U EffctN ame Shows the backup destination drive and drive informa tion C CD or U filename Normally if you set SourceEffNo to EffAll the filename will be currently selected song name DFX If you select an individual effect for backup the filename will be backup source effect name DFI DFM DFF amp You must use a blank disc when backing up to CD R RW 2 RENAME sssssnssannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn If Drive is set to U USB DOS you can edit the backup destination filename For details refer to 2 Naming a song gt p 35 MS You can input a filename of up to eight characters You may not use symbols or lowercase characters 6 Exec EXecute ssssssssssrnnnsrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnna
383. ts the depth ofLFO modulation Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds 139 Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX Insert FX 2in2out x 2 Insert FX 2in2out x 2 1imlout x 4 1in2out x 2 Linlout x 8 Effect Control Master FX Final PX Final FX 140 18 MO5 St Tremolo Stereo Tremolo This effect modulates the volume level of the input signal The effect is stereo and offsetting the LFO of the left and right phases from each other produces a tremolo effect between left and right LFO LFO Waveform TRI SIN Vintage Selects LFO Waveform Up Down Shape LFO Shape 100 100 Determines how much the LFO wave form is changed Phase LFO Phase degree 180 180 Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right S peed LFO Frequency Hz 0 02 20 0 Sets the LFO speed Depth AD usina 0 100 Sets the depth of LFO modulation Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds LFO Waveform This parameter selects the LFO waveform Vintage wave simu lates the characteristics of the tremolo created on a guitar amplifier Combining this effect with the Amp Simulation will make a realistic vintage tremolo amplifier sound LFO Phase degree This parameter determines the difference between the left and right LFO phases A h
384. tten to the CD R RW As long as you have not yet finalized the disc you can continue writing other songs to it Marks in the song will be ignored and the songs will be the first song CD track 1 second song CD track 2 etc on the CD R RW in the order that they were written In order to play back the CD you will need to finalize it s CD MONDO Piar On Off This specifies whether the audio output of the CD will be sent to the monitor bus when you place an audio CD in the CD R RW drive On The sound of an audio CD placed in the CD R RW drive will be output to the monitor bus Other audio will not be output to the monitor bus at this time Off CD monitoring will be off The sound from the CD R RW drive will not be output to the monitor bus WA If you have assigned the audio output of the CD R RW drive to mixer channels in the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab page you will be able to hear the CD even if CD Monitor is turned off In this case the sound will be routed through the mixer i e EQ and effects will be applied CO Monitor Nd ei EEN Executes writing to the CD R RW When you press the WriteCD button the Obey Copy right Rules message will appear Carefully read the COPYRIGHT WARNING p iii section and use this operation only if you accept the terms Press the Yes button to begin writing i write ToCl TrackatOnee d Obey Copyright Rules Speed du Are Y
385. u can also press the button and select from a list 2 Recording your performance while you listen to the rhythm You can record your performance while listening to the built in rhythm as a guide 1 Make settings as described in 1 Specifying and playing a rhythm Turn Rhythm On Make other settings as necessary 2 Connect your input device and begin recording Refer to 1 Analog inputs and 1 Adjust the record ing level and record p 36 39 When you press the REC key to enter record ready mode the rhythm will begin sounding Recording will begin when you press the PLAY key You will hear the selected rhythm pattern Begin performing using the rhythm as a guide 3 Recording the rhythm Built in rhythm patterns can be recorded on a track As an example here s how the rhythm pattern can be re corded on mixer channels 1 and 2 1 Make settings as described in 1 Specifying and playing a rhythm Turn Rhythm Off If this is turned on the sound will be output in duplicate to the track and also to the master LR bus To set the volume use the mixer channel that you are inputting Since RhythmVol Vol adjusts the send volume to the master LR bus you do not need to set it Make other settings as necessary 2 Specify the input channels Select the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 tab page Select the Ch1 icon and rotate the VALUE dial to s
386. u will leave this at N R ReversePhase The phase of this channel will be inverted Enable pairing for adjacent mixer channels For details refer to P1 Ch1 8 Select the inputs for mixer channels 1 8 Pair p 123 125 TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS METER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ INPUT ENTER SCRUB TRIGGER UNDO LOOP AUTO IN LOC1 TEMPO SCENE MARK STORE SONG TRACK RECORD SYSTEM COUNTER Reference Tr VIEW MONITOR ENT AUX FX PHASE TUNER PUNCH JEND LOC4 RHYTHM CD USB 19 INSERT EFFECT The insert effects can be applied to the analog inputs during recording or to track playback The D1600mkII lets you use up to eight different insert effects simultaneously amp Insert effects cannot be used if Digiln is turned On in the INPUT TUNER Ch1 8 or Ch9 16 tab pages p 123 P1 InsAsn Insert effect insertion location type 126 Le ASSO In Input Trk PlayTrack Select whether the insert effect will be applied to an ana log input or to a playback track In Input Use these settings to apply an effect to analog inputs from the INPUT 1 INPUT 8 GUITAR IN jacks while recording Trk PlayTrack Use these settings to apply an effect to a playback track Effects can also be used during mix down SelectEffTyp 1in2o0utx2 2in2outx2 1inloutx4 linloutx8 Selects the structure of the insert effects The number of e
387. unable to play back CD R RW discs BlankDise CO Monitor a i 1 CD R RW Information sasssa Trk01 99 BlankDisc NoAudioTracks NoDrive Shows the song on the CD R RW disc to play back This will appear when you insert a disc in the CD R RW drive and press the Sp button Trk01 99 the song number within the CD R RW disc BlankDisc a blank disc is inserted NoAudioTracks either no CD R RW disc is inserted or there are no playable audio tracks NoDrive the drive is not connected Size Device TYPl ccooocooorcooonnonos Free Used R RW DA Shows the writable time on the CD R RW disc and the type of disc This will appear when you insert a disc into the CD R RW drive and press the Sp button Time display The time is shown in units of minutes seconds Free shows the free time on the disc Used shows the used time on the disc Disc type R the disc was detected as a CD R RW the disc was detected as a CD RW DA the disc was detected as an audio CD This includes the following e A CD R created on the D1600mkII etc and finalized e A CD RW created on the D1600mkII etc and final ized e An audio CD Final Finalize coco Finalizes the disc You must finalize a CD R RW disc created on the D1600mkII before it can be played in an audio CD player amp Once a disc has been finalized no further songs can be written to it Finalize the disc only after you have writte
388. und moves from right to left 30 SE3 StAnalog Record Stereo Analog Record This effect simulates the noise caused by scratches and dust on analog records It also reproduces some of the modulation caused by a warped turntable RPM Speed RPM 33 1 3 45 78 Sets the r p m of a record Wah PINOT E 0 100 Sets the modulation depth NsDens Noise Density 0 100 Sets the noise density NsTone Noise Tone 0 100 Sets the noise tone NsLvl Noise Level o 0 100 Sets the noise level AE A 0 100 Sets the click noise level EQTrim EQ Trim aorta 0 100 Sets the EQ input level Fc Pre EQ Cutoff Hz 300 10 0k Sets the EQ center frequency ORS Perera cr a reer 0 5 10 0 Sets the EQ band width GLevel Gain dB 18 0 18 0 Sets the EQ gain Mix Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Flutter This parameter enables you to set the depth of the modulation caused by a warped turntable Click Level This parameter enables you to set the level of the click noise that occurs once every rotation of the turntable This simulation repro duces record noise and the noise generated after the music on a vinyl record finishes 31 SE4 Talking Modulator This effect gives the input signal a character similar to a human voice It can create the
389. ur MIDI sequencer so that it will transmit MIDI clock messages Refer to the owner s manual for your MIDI sequencer 4 Specify how tempo will be recorded In the TEMPO RHYTHM Tmp rk tab page select MIDI Clock Recmipiciock IS 000 00 000 Select RecTempolrack Type RecStart 5 Record the MIDI clock data Press the RecStart button to put the D1600mkII in record ready mode Nowy aitingMiDlIC lock Start Sequencer Start your MIDI sequencer When MIDI clock messages are received from the MIDI sequencer the display will indicate Receiving MIDIClock 6 When the MIDI sequencer finishes playing back stop the MIDI sequencer The D1600mkII will stop recording and will display Complete Press the OK button Basic operation Creating Selecting a song to the mixer Playback Recording Changing the time location MIDI Updating USB Drive Data Rhythn tempo Song Track Mixdown Using Using the the system settings editing editing effects mixer 73 74 7 Select the tempo track as the tempo source Select the TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp tab page TempoSource E 001 01 000 1 1 Tempo Setup Tnetar A Tne Tre Select IempoSource and rotate the VALUE dial to select TempoTrk amp If MIDI clock messages cannot be received correctly from the MIDI sequencer tempo recording may end prematurely Tap tempo While playing back
390. urrent parameter display This is the name of the parameter currently selected by the edit cell For icon type parameters such as EQ or fader the value is displayed at the right b Edit cell When you select a parameter in the LCD screen the parameter value will be highlighted in some cases This area is referred to as the edit cell and your editing will apply to the highlighted portion The parameter value in the edit cell can be modified using the VALUE dial or by using the popup buttons in the LCD screen c Popup button When you press this button a dialog box f will appear To enter a parameter value choose the desired value from the dialog box EL Renamed d Toggle button Pressing this type of button will alternately switch a function between on off META on L_Rhythm off e Tab page Each mode contains numerous parameters which are organized into pages Each page is accessed by its own tab f Dialog box To execute press the OK button To cancel press the Cancel button The dialog box will close Select TempoSource PC TempoMap Cancel A TempoTrack g Radio buttons f Dialog box g Radio buttons These buttons are used to select one of multiple items Press one of the radio buttons h Icons These are objects shaped like faders or knobs To modify a value select it and rotate the VALUE dial h Icons i Scroll buttons These buttons are used to
391. use 1 4 130 JazzWaltz1 8 150 8beat 6 2 120 F RockBld 2 1 90 House 2 4 130 JazzWaltz2 8 150 8beat 7 2 120 E RockBld 1 6 90 House 3 4 130 lJazzWaltz 4 150 8beat 1 5 120 E RockBld 2 4 90 House 4 4 130 F JazzWaltz 2 150 8beat 2 4 120 R amp Funk 1 4 98 I House 1 4 130 ElJazzWaltz 5 150 F 8beat 1 1 120 R amp Funk 2 1 98 House 2 8 130 Waltz 8 150 F 8beat 2 1 120 R amp Funk 3 2 98 F House 1 1 130 I Waltz 8 150 F 8beat 3 1 120 R amp Funk 4 4 98 F House 2 1 130 F Waltz 2 150 E 8beat 1 5 120 R amp Funk 5 4 98 E House 1 3 130 E Waltz 4 150 E 8beat 2 3 120 R amp Funk 6 2 98 E House 2 6 130 E 8beat 3 3 120 R amp Funk 7 2 98 Jungle 1 8 160 6 8 14 pattern 16bt Rock1 4 100 R amp Funk 1 2 98 Jungle 2 8 160 RhythmName Length Tempo 16bt Rock2 4 100 I JR amp Funk 2 4 98 I JJungle 8 160 6 8 Vari 4 120 1 16bt Rock1 5 100 R amp Funk 3 2 98 F Jungle 1 1 160 6 8 Var2 o 120 1116bt Rock2 4 100 F R amp Funk 1 1 98 F Jungle 2 1 160 6 8 Var3 4 120 F 16bt Rocki 1 100 F R amp Funk 2 1 98 ElJungle 6 160 6 8 Var4 8 120 F 16bt Rock2 1 100 F JR amp Funk 3 1 98 Techno 1 4 130 6 8 Var5 8 120 E 16bt Rock1 6 100 EJR8Funk 1 1 98 Techno 2 4 130 116 8 1 5 120 E 16bt Rock2 4 100 E R amp Funk 2 2 98 Techno 3 4 130 1 6 8 2 5 120 16beat 1 2 100 EJR8Funk 3 4 98 Techno 4 2 130 1 6 8 3 8 120 16beat 2 2 100 Jazz 1 8 100 Techno 5 2 130 F 6 8 1 o 120 16beat 3 4 100 Jazz 2 8 100 I Techno 1 4 130 F 6 8 2 1 120 16beat 4 2 100 Jazz 8 100 l Te
392. ustical characteristics of a guitar amp Even if you are recording your instrument via a direct line you can produce a realistic sound as though a guitar amp were actually being used Type Amplifier Type AMP1 5 Selects the type of guitar amplifier CabRes CabinetResonator This effect simulates the acoustical characteristics and cabinet resonances of a guitar amp speaker cabinet The AmpSimulator is ideal for direct recording Type Cabinet Type 1x8 1x10 1 x12 2 x 12 4x 10 4 x12 Mariara 0 100 Tone Selects the type of cabinet Sets the depth of the effect This effect simulates the tone control section of a guitar amp It allows you to adjust the character of the vacuum tubes BaSS Bani 0 100 Sets the low frequency level Middle Middle 0 100 Sets the middle frequency level AA 0 100 Sets the high frequency level Tube Tube Type SS 1 99 Burn Character of the vacuum tubes in the power amp section of the guitar amp Cabinet type Models the effect of the air Output level Cabinet This effect models the speaker cabinet of a guitar amp Type CabinetType erene ja EE 0 100 in a 0 100 PESCAR eat 0 100 High frequency level 1 1x8TW Tweed 1x12T Tweed 1x12B Black 1x12V Vox 2x12B Black 2x12V Vox 2x12C ClassicA 4x10T Tweed 4x12C Classic 4x12V Vintage 4x12M Modern
393. utlet and or convenience receptacle e Do not install this equipment in a confined space such as a box for the conveyance or similar unit e Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ca ZBOLNSV FrERY IA DD The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product THE FCC REGULATION WARNING for U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy a
394. utomatically backed up when you back up a song The Restore UserData dialog box will not appear if you are restoring from the USB drive and there is no effect user data of the same filename restored song name DFX A You cannot execute this operation if there is insuffi cient space on the song drive P6 DiskUtil Managing drives Here you can format or check the drive erase a CD RW con nect to your computer via USB and load an updated system A When you format the drive or erase a CD RW all data on that drive or disc will be lost Execut 5 001 01 000 L USB Mode ssssssssnunonsnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnannn Puts the D1600mkII in a mode where it can communi cate with your computer To connect your computer select this button to access the USB Mode screen The connected computer will detect the D1600mkII as a USB drive US EY UU GE YA If you want to exit from this screen while the D1600mkII is connected to your computer via USB you must first perform the appropriate operation on your computer so that the hardware can be removed safely p 85 2 SelO peration ssassn CheckDrive S EraseCD RW Format S Format U FormatAll LoadSystem C Load System U Selects the operation that will be performed on the drive You can press the Il button and make your selection in the dialog box SelectOperatior MCheckOrive S O ErasetD Rw Formate i LoadSystem C E L
395. utton while writing to CD R writing will be halted and the disc will be unusable If you are writing to CD RW the data that was being written will be erased To back up to the USB drive Here s how to back up the selected song to the USB drive 1 2 Select the song that you want to back up Select Backup1Song In the SYSTEM USB B U Rst tab page select B U RstType and turn the VALUE dial to select Backup1Song Alternatively you can press the E button to open the Select Backup Restore Type dialog box execute Jet 001 OI 00 gt Source B U RstType Destination Verify the song that you want to back up Make sure that the song you want to back up is selected for Source Select the backup destination drive Press the Drive button to open the dialog box Select U USB DOS and press the Yes button Verify the backup destination drive and filename The file name will be the name of the song you are backing up Make sure that U song name is selected as the Destination Edit the file name If you want to change the file name press the Rename button Edit the name in the Rename File dialog box p 35 MS You cannot save if an identically named file already exists on the USB drive You will need to change the name The file name can be a maxi mum of eight characters 7 Execute the backup Press the Exec
396. view parameter values that can not be displayed in a single screen Io DemoSongE1 D d DernoSongeld i Scroll buttons 2 Adjusting the LCD screen contrast Use the rear panel LCD CONTRAST knob to adjust the contrast PHANTOM 48V 7 0 A O ON LCD CONTRAST OUT MIDI IN o SEH ding ns DUO DIF IN V Basic operation 1 Selecting a mode To make settings in the LCD screen for the various func tions of the D1600mkII you must first press the key of the mode that includes that function For the functions of each mode refer to Reference p 91 2 Selecting a tab page Each mode contains numerous parameters and these are organized into pages Pages are accessed by tabs 1 Press the key for the desired mode The illustration below shows a tab page of TEMPO RHYTHM mode that will appear when you press the TEMPO RHYTHM key Ki In this manual this is referred to as the TEMPO RHYTHM SetUp tab page Temposource IS 001 01 000 un 2 Select the desired tab page Each time you press the key of the currently selected mode you will cycle through the tab pages of that mode Some pages contain only one tab 3 Selecting and setting a parameter Selecting a parameter Use one of the following methods to select the parameter that you wish to edit e Inthe LCD screen press that parameter directly
397. volume When recording an external input when Input is selected for the RECORD RecMode tab page item Select RecMode this fader adjusts the volume level of the master bus When bounce recording when Bounce is selected for SelectRecMode of the RECORD RecMode tab page this fader adjusts the recording level on the track for which the TRACK STATUS is set to REC 6 RHSL REHEARSAL key 2 6 1 TRA N SPO RT KEYS This key lets you rehearse a recording When you press this key the Rehearsal function will be These keys are used to operate the recorder for operations turned on the LED will light and you will be able to such as recording and playback rehearse the recording Recording will not actually occur When you turn rehearsal on and start recording the monitor output will behave in the same way as when actually recording STOP PLAY allowing you to practice recording WA It is convenient to use this to rehearse before using auto ES punch in out recording ee j Ogag Lea HA n 1 REW key While stopped or playing this key moves the time back wards rewinds If you hold down the STOP key and press the REW key you will move to the beginning of the current song if you are in the middle of the current song or to the beginning of the previous song if you are already at the beginning of the current song 2 FF key When stopped or playing this key
398. will be sent to the monitor bus Use this function when you wish to hear only a specific channel or channels out of multiple audio sources or to check the send etc The solo signal will be output to the MONITOR OUT L R jacks and to the PHONES jack If one or more are On the SOLO MONITOR key will blink On Solo is on Only the selected signal s will be heard 1 Off Solo is off If another signal is set to solo on sig nals for which solo is off will be muted 1 16 Mixer channels 1 16 S1 S2 Sends to master effects 1 and 2 A1 Send to external output AUX OUT jack R1 R2 Return from master effect 1 and 2 amp To adjust the volume of each signal use the corre sponding pages or knobs Be aware that when you switch the signal that is selected some settings may cause the monitor volume to change dramatically Please use caution d Clearhl xxuuuusesprexuuussREERERuRRRRREEEEREEKARKRREREREEEERRRREEEKEEEn This turns Off all SoloSelect settings that were Mh On ZE MENG E 8 aa On Off This specifies whether the solo signal will be output from the MASTER OUT L R jacks Use this setting if you have connected your monitor system to the MAS TER OUT L R jacks and wish to use it for soloing MET On The solo signal will be output from the MASTER OUT L R jacks The On setting is valid only within the SOLO MONITOR page When you exit this page it will automatically be turned Off
399. wish to begin recording Press the foot switch again to stop recording Play Stop The foot switch will start stop playback Press the foot switch to start playback and press it again to stop playback Mark The foot switch will register a mark When you press the foot switch a mark will be regis tered at that time location amp While this page is displayed the foot switch will be used only to verify the polarity and the specified function will be disabled Also during tap recording the function you select here will be ignored and the foot switch will automatically function as a tap marker Device CtriChgDevice Pedal A Touch P Bend Velocity NoteN um CC 000 119 Select the external device that will control the internal effects of the D1600mkII The effect selected by Asn can be controlled in real time Pedal An expression pedal can be used to control the effect Connect an expression pedal separately sold option XVP 10 EXP 2 etc to the EXPRESSION PEDAL jack and operate the pedal to control the effect A Touch P Bend Velocity Note Num MIDI aftertouch pitch bend velocity or note number data can be used to control the effect Connect the MIDI OUT of your external MIDI device to the MIDI IN connector on the D1600mkII and transmit the selected MIDI data from the external MIDI device to control the effect w pa TRANSPOR FADER PAN Tr STATUS MEIER SOLO MASTER INSERT EQ
400. x Wet Dry Dry 1 99 99 1 Wet Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds Envelope Select This parameter selects whether the left and right channels are linked to control both signals simultaneously or whether each channel is controlled independently Sensitivity Output Level The Sensitivity parameter sets the sensitivity of the compressor If this parameter is set to a higher value lower level sounds will be boosted With a higher Sensitivity the overall volume level is higher To adjust the final volume level use the Output Level parameter Attack Controls the strength of the attack that is characteristic of a compres sor 22 DY2 St Limiter Stereo Limiter The Limiter regulates the input signal level It is similar to the Compressor except that the Limiter compresses only signals that exceed the specified level to lower unnecessary peak sig nals The Limiter applies a peaking type EO to the trigger signal which controls the degree of the Limiter effect allowing you to set any band width to be covered This effect is a stereo limiter You can link left and right channels or use each channel indi vidually Envelp Envelope Select L RMix L Only Selects from linking both channels con R Only Indivi trolling only from left channel only from the right channel or controlling each channel individually Ratio Ratio A 1 0 1 50 0 1 Inf 1 Sets the signal compress

Strahl D1600mkII User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents